Servicing Procedure Catalog: SBO 34/28 - #8054

Translation of the original technical documentation
Servicing Procedure Catalog
SBO 34/28 - N° 8054
NESTLE WATERS EGYPT

Egypt
© SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
27/05/2013
SIDEL - Avenue de la patrouille de France - 76930 Octeville sur mer, FRANCE

Tel : 00 33 (0)2.32.85.86.87 - Fax : 00.33 (0)2.32.85.81.00 - Email : service@fra.sidel.com
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Revision history
REVISION HISTORY
The information contained within this document is the property of SIDEL. Except in the case of authorizations
expressly accorded by means of a contract, no part of this document may be copied or disclosed without the
prior written agreement of SIDEL
This document has been written in the original language of the manufacturer. All other versions are
translations of the original version. In the case of contradictions with regard to any translated versions of this
manual, the original version written in the language of the manufacturer will take precedence.
m Creation and revision
Date
Creation 27/05/2013
27/05/2013 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Revision history
2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Contents
GENERAL PRESENTATION Part A

USER PROCEDURE Part B
MECHANICAL OPERATION
Part C
PROCEDURE
ELECTRICAL OPERATION
Part D
PROCEDURE
CONTENTS
General presentation ............................................................................................................................................. 1

Safety procedure .............................................................................................................................................. BSU
Operating procedure ........................................................................................................................................ BCU
Production process procedure ......................................................................................................................... BPU
MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Part C

Inspecting / cleaning procedure ....................................................................................................................... BNM
Removal/Refit procedure ................................................................................................................................. BDM
Adjustment procedure ..................................................................................................................................... BRM
Greasing procedure ......................................................................................................................................... BGM
ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Part D

Inspecting / cleaning procedure ....................................................................................................................... BNE
Removal/Refit procedure ................................................................................................................................. BDE
Adjustment procedure ...................................................................................................................................... BRE
27/05/2013 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Contents
2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Part A

Part C
PROCEDURE
Part D
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL PRESENTATION 1
Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................ 1.1
General Information ............................................................................................................................................ 1.2
Using the Servicing Procedure Catalog .............................................................................................................. 1.3
Procedure classification ............................................................................................................................. 1.3.1
Information contained in the procedure bars ............................................................................................. 1.3.2
List of procedure bars ................................................................................................................................ 1.3.3
Contents of the procedure files .................................................................................................................. 1.3.4
Using the procedures ................................................................................................................................. 1.3.5
Initial status of the machine ............................................................................................................... 1.3.5.1
Basic precautions .............................................................................................................................. 1.3.5.2
Final status of the machine ............................................................................................................... 1.3.5.3
Writing conventions .................................................................................................................................... 1.3.6
Documents supplied with the machine ............................................................................................................... 1.4
27/05/2013 A - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part A Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents
A - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation Part A
1 GENERAL PRESENTATION
1.1 Foreword
Before using a procedure, first read the User Manual.
1.2 General Information

The Servicing Procedure Catalog includes the following:
- safety measures and precautions,
- operating modes for preventive maintenance operations at levels 1, 2 and 3,
- main actions relating to the operation or the setting up of the machine.
1.3 Using the Servicing Procedure Catalog
1.3.1 Procedure classification
The procedures are classed in 5 categories:
- Safety procedure,
- operating procedure,
- process (machine setting) procedure,
- mechanical operation procedure,
- electrical operation procedure.
1.3.2 Information contained in the procedure bars
1 2 3 4 5
1-PIC071-01-xx.svg
m Operation pictogram (1)

The pictogram specifies the procedure type and is a visual reference which makes the Catalog easier to follow.
Pictogram Signifies
Safety procedure
Operating procedure
Production process procedure
Inspecting / cleaning procedure
Removal/Refit procedure
Adjustment procedure
Greasing procedure
27/05/2013 A - 1 - 1/4
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part A Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation
m Procedure level(2)
For operating and setting procedures the level of the procedure corresponds to the required user profile.
For safety and servicing procedures the level of the procedure corresponds to the qualifications required of the
techncians.
m Procedure title (3)
Summary of the procedure.
m Procedure reference (4)
Procedure references are coded as follows:
- The first letter indicates the division within "SIDEL" to which the procedure belongs; "Blowing", "Coating",
"Filling" ...
- The second letter indicates the type of procedure; Operating, Process, Cleaning, Removal, Adjustment or
Greasing.
- The third letter indicates the area of the procedure; Operation, Mechanical or Electrical.
- The 3 figures indicate the reference number of the procedure.
m Reference and number of pages (5)
The first figure indicates the page number. The second figure indicates the number of pages in the procedure file.
1.3.3 List of procedure bars
1-PIC070-01-02.svg
1.3.4 Contents of the procedure files

The procedures contain the following information:
- the part of the machine at which the procedure will take place,
- specific safety precautions relating to the procedure,
- specific conditions relating to the procedure (machine status),
- equipment and materials required for the procedure (spare parts, specific tools, lubricants etc.),
- procedures to be followed,
A - 1 - 2/4 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation Part A
- actions at the end of the operation.
1.3.5 Using the procedures
1.3.5.1 Initial status of the machine
All servicing procedures (except operating procedures) assume that the machine has been correctly installed,
stopped normally (no faults) and has been connected to all required utilities (high and low pressure air, water,
electricity etc.).
If this is not the case, you should first ensure that the machine meets these requirements.
All power supplies to the machine (except those required by and specified in the servicing procedure) must be shut
off.
1.3.5.2 Basic precautions
Before using any of the procedure sheets, first refer to the User manual for the following:
- to follow the safety precautions,
- to ensure that all personnel involved possess the required profile and qualifications,
- to ensure that the correct lubricants and/or cleaning agents are used.
Before starting, make you that you have read the entire procedure, in order to:
- identify the part of the machine at which the procedure needs to be carried out,
- ensure that all power and utility supplies not required for the procedure have been cut,
- follow all safety precautions specific to the procedure,
- obtain other procedure files as required,
- identify and obtain equipment required for the procedure.
Always follow each step of the procedure in order.
Unless otherwise indicated, tighten all threaded parts to the torques corresponding to their diameter and
type, please refer to chapter "Bolt tightening torques" located in the "Appendix" section of the User manual.
1.3.5.3 Final status of the machine
When you have completed a procedure, always check the following:
- that the area where the procedure has been carried out is clean,
- that no tools or foreign objects have been left behind,
- that the machine has been returned to production set up,
- that the machine does not pose any potential danger to the personnel and their surroundings.
1.3.6 Writing conventions
m Symbols
Important sections of text will be accompanied by the following symbols:
Strictly prohibited.
Obligatory before carrying out a procedure.

Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action.
Remark or observation on the results of an operation.
Additional information located in a sub-chapter or another chapter in this manual or another manual.
27/05/2013 A - 1 - 3/4
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part A Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation
m Symbols and writing conventions
Symbol or convention Signifies
Step number in the procedure file
Indicates a condition that must be met in order to carry out an action (Test - Check -
Indirect action)
The location of the operation
Number reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part
Color code: identifies and/or locates an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part in an

illustration
Alpha-numerical reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part
Indicates the result of a step in the procedure
Highlight key words or phrases to make reading easier
Indicate supplementary information relating to this word in the current manual’s

glossary
Indicates a reference to another procedure or chapter
1.4 Documents supplied with the machine

- Presentation Manual.
- User Manual.
- Servicing Procedure Catalog (inspection / cleaning, removal / refit, setting, lubrication, etc.).
- Spare-parts catalog "Machine" (assembly drawings and part-list nomenclature).
- Spare-parts catalog specific to articles to be produced, otherwise known as "Personalized" or "Custom"
parts(assembly drawings and part-list nomenclature).
- Back-up copy of the PCC (DVD-ROM) application.
A - 1 - 4/4 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Part B

Part C
PROCEDURE
Part D
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PROCEDURE BSU
Safety: opening/closing molds .................................................................................................................. BSU-001
Safety: blocking the manual rotation system ............................................................................................ BSU-002
Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine ........................................................................... BSU-003
Pneumatic circuit safety checks ................................................................................................................ BSU-004
Checking the emergency stop buttons ...................................................................................................... BSU-005
Checking the door safeties in JOG mode ................................................................................................. BSU-006
OPERATING PROCEDURE BCU

Turning on the power supplies to the machine ......................................................................................... BCU-001
Turning on the main machine power circuit .............................................................................................. BCU-002
Turning on the preform feeder .................................................................................................................. BCU-003
Turning on the PCC .................................................................................................................................. BCU-004
Turning on the machine utilities ................................................................................................................ BCU-005
Running the machine in "Automatic" mode .............................................................................................. BCU-006
Running an automatic greasing cycle ....................................................................................................... BCU-007
Turning off the utility supplies to the machine ........................................................................................... BCU-008
Turning off the PCC .................................................................................................................................. BCU-009
Turning off the preform feeder .................................................................................................................. BCU-010
Turning off the main machine circuit ......................................................................................................... BCU-011
Isolating the machine ................................................................................................................................ BCU-012
Using the JOG system .............................................................................................................................. BCU-013
Using manual rotation ............................................................................................................................... BCU-014
Running the machine in "Manual" mode ................................................................................................... BCU-015
Inspecting the preforms on delivery .......................................................................................................... BCU-016

Emptying the preform feeder .................................................................................................................... BCU-017
Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system ................................................................................ BCU-018
Operating the feeder in Automatic mode .................................................................................................. BCU-019
Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped ................................................................................... BCU-020
User management .................................................................................................................................... BCU-021
Alarm configuration ................................................................................................................................... BCU-022
Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms ....................................................................................... BCU-023
User login / logout ..................................................................................................................................... BCU-024
Entering numerical values ........................................................................................................................ BCU-025
Acknowledging "critical" alarms ................................................................................................................ BCU-026
Configuring access to application functions .............................................................................................. BCU-027
Entering the date ...................................................................................................................................... BCU-028
Opening and closing the hopper cowling .................................................................................................. BCU-029
27/05/2013 B - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part B Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents
Setting the dedust air pressure ................................................................................................................. BCU-030

Operating the preform feeder in manual mode ......................................................................................... BCU-034
Installing and updating documentation into the application PCC .............................................................. BCU-037
Powering up machine protection UPS cabinet ......................................................................................... BCU-048
Switching off the machine protection UPS cabinet ................................................................................... BCU-049
PRODUCTION PROCESS PROCEDURE BPU

Setting points "P0" and "P10" ................................................................................................................... BPU-001
Setting the blowing pressure ..................................................................................................................... BPU-002
Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder ........................................................................................ BPU-003
Output rate setpoint .................................................................................................................................. BPU-004
Recipe management ................................................................................................................................. BPU-005
Solenoid valve test .................................................................................................................................... BPU-006
Oven test ................................................................................................................................................... BPU-007
Preform feeder test ................................................................................................................................... BPU-008
Setting the parameters of the process ...................................................................................................... BPU-009
Carrying out a trial on a new production process ...................................................................................... BPU-010
Setting the preblowing pressure ............................................................................................................... BPU-012
Checking the preblow flow setting ............................................................................................................ BPU-013
Checking the feeder preform count ........................................................................................................... BPU-014
Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors ...................................................................... BPU-015
Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints ....................................................................................... BPU-017
Initializing the preform feeder production start .......................................................................................... BPU-027
B - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
User procedure
Safety procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Safety: opening/closing molds .................................................................................................................. BSU-001
Safety: blocking the manual rotation system ............................................................................................ BSU-002
Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine ........................................................................... BSU-003
Pneumatic circuit safety checks ................................................................................................................ BSU-004
Checking the emergency stop buttons ...................................................................................................... BSU-005
Checking the door safeties in JOG mode ................................................................................................. BSU-006
27/05/2013 B - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
B - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure Part B
1 Safety: opening/closing molds BSU-001 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The holding brace (1) prevents the locking system

from dropping down from the up-position, which could
result in an operator losing his fingers.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
Never attempt any work on an open mold support unit

1
without first positioning the holding brace (1).
Working on hot molds:
The following procedure is carried out on cold molds. Some
procedures may, however, require an intervention on a hot
mold. In these cases always follow the following safety
instructions:
Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face
during any work on the mold support unit.
1-008494-01-xx.svg
Protective equipment must be in accordance with the
stipulated risks.
Hot metal, risk of burns.
There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high

temperature and pressure.
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
Machine isolated except for:
- primary electrical circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-001,
- main electrical circuit under power, see
procedure "BCU-002,
- PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004,

- PCC application set to "Settings",
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- locking system holding brace (1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part B Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure
2/2 BSU-001 Safety: opening/closing molds 1
PROCEDURE
Opening the mold support unit

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the
machine.
2- Bring the blowing station around to your working
position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
3- Place both hands below the nut (2) and move the
locking system upwards.
4- Manually, open the locking system fully.
1-006680-01-xx.svg
Positioning the holding brace
5- Place the holding brace (1) on the right mold support 1 4
unit support block (3), facing the lock.
6- Turn the knob (4).
The holding brace is now locked in position.
The mold support unit is now secured and there is no
risk of injury.
Removing the holding brace 3
7- Turn the knob (4).
The holding brace is now unlocked. 1-008495-01-xx.svg
8- Remove the locking system holding brace (1).

Closing the mold support unit
9- Place your hands on each of the support blocks (3 ; 5)
and close the mold support unit.
The mold support unit will lock automatically.
BEFORE YOU FINISH 5 3
10- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.
1-006683-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Safety: blocking the manual rotation system BSU-002 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Blocking the manual rotation system prevents the

locking system from being opened manually by
pressing the button (1). Blocking the manual rotation
system ensures the safety of personnel when carrying
out maintenance as long as at least one machine door
is open.
For all major maintenance operations, use the locking

pin to prevent machine rotation, see
procedure "BSU-003.
The visual may be different depending on the 1-006030-14-xx.svg
machine model ad configuration.
MACHINE STATUS
1
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 1-006908-05-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Inhibiting manual rotation
1- Press the (2) key.
The (A) window appears.
Manual rotation is now blocked.
machine.
Releasing manual rotation 2
The manual rotation system can be released if all of

the machine doors are closed.
1-010353-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BSU-002 Safety: blocking the manual rotation system 1

5- Press the (3) key. A
Manual rotation is no longer inhibited.
BEFORE YOU FINISH 3
6- Close the window(s) and return to the "Main page"
family.
1-010348-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine BSU-003 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The machine is blocked at the blow wheel, however

safety cannot be guaranteed if parts of the
transmission have been removed.
Depending on the configuration of your machine, the

location of certain parts may differ.
Some elements may appear differently on your

machine according to its configuration, however their
functions remain identical.
1-006030-65-xx.svg
Mechanically blocking the blowing wheel will prevent

1
the use of manual rotation.
the (5) sensor "B12.6" signals to the plc that the 4

locking bar (1) is not in its housing (3) which prevents
the machine from operating
2
MACHINE STATUS
3
- Machine stopped.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None 5
Consumables
1-010774-01-xx.svg
None
Specific tools 1
- 1 padlock (4).
3
PROCEDURE
Blocking
machine. 2
If necessary, use the manual rotation to position the
blow wheel drive ring (2), depending on need , see
procedure "BCU-014.
2- Remove the brace (1), from its housing (3). 4
The machine can not be rotated.
3- Fit the brace (1) on the drive ring (2). 1-006095-07-xx.svg
Depending on the configuration of your machine, this

procedure will be made easier by the assistance of a
second technician.
4- Lock out the locking brace (1).
The machine can no longer rotate.
Before attempting any procedure, ensure the machine
conditions indicated in each procedure.
Unblocking
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BSU-003 Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine 1
5- Unlock the locking brace (1).

6- Remove the brace (1). 1
7- Stow the brace (1) back in its housing (3).
The machine is now free to rotate. 3
BEFORE YOU FINISH
8- Remove the hand crank . see procedure "BCU-014

9- Place the hand crank back in its housing. 5
1-010775-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Pneumatic circuit safety checks BSU-004 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The aim of this procedure is to make sure that the

pressure in the air lines (except the low pressure and
the permanent pressure circuits) is released when a
door is opened or when an emergency stop button is
pressed while the machine is in production.
MACHINE STATUS
- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001,
- PCC application set to "Settings".
1-006030-152-xx.svg
PROCEDURE B
1
1- Test the blowing on the station located at the rear of the
blow wheel, see procedure "BPU-006.
2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the 2
machine.
High pressure air circuit
The high-pressure air circuit can be of different types

(B ; C ; D).
F Check the pressure before regulation at the gauge (1).
The pressure gauge (1) indicates the pressure in the
1-007402-02-xx.svg
local supply.
F Control the pressure value after adjusting the pressure C
gauges (2).
- The pressure gauges (2) indicate zero pressure? 1
The high pressure circuit is now secured. 2
· Go to the next step.
- One of the pressure gauges (2) shows a pressure
that is not zero?
The high pressure circuit is not secured.
· Contact SIDEL.
1-007859-17-xx.svg
D
1-013499-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BSU-004 Pneumatic circuit safety checks 3
F Check the pressure at the gauge (3).

- the pressure gauge (3) indicates zero pressure?
The preblow circuit is now secured.
- The pressure gauge (3) indicates remaining
pressure?
The preblow circuit is not secured.
· Contact SIDEL.
Low pressure air circuit
The low-pressure air circuit can be of different types

(E ; F ; G).
F (E ; F) only : Check the pressure before regulation at
the gauge (4).
local supply.
F Check the pressure at the gauge (5).
- the pressure gauge (5) indicates zero pressure?
The low pressure circuit is now secured. 3
- The pressure gauge (5) indicates remaining 1-006596-02-xx.svg
pressure?
The low pressure circuit is not secured.
· Contact SIDEL.
E F G 5
5 4
5 4
1-006273-05-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Pneumatic circuit safety checks BSU-004 3/4
F Make sure that there are no current faults on the band

(A) at the PCC. A
If any of the pneumatic circuits are at abnormal

pressures contact SIDEL.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006403-04-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BSU-004 Pneumatic circuit safety checks 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Checking the emergency stop buttons BSU-005 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The emergency stop buttons stop the machine

immediately when pressed by the operator.
For more information on the locations of the

emergency stop buttons, please refer to
chapter "Blowing machine safety system", in the User
manual.
MACHINE STATUS
- PCC application in "Manual" mode, see 1-006030-00-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-015.
PROCEDURE
Blowing machine emergency stop button inspection

Checking the emergency stop buttons which are accessible
while the machine is in operation 1 6
1- Select the minimum output rate instruction, see
procedure "BPU-004.
The alarm will sound until the button (1) changes
1-006704-11-xx.svg
status.
3- Release the button (1).
The brake opens and the machine begins to turn.
7
4- Press one of the emergency stop buttons (7).
The machine stops immediately.
An siren sounds and an alarm light appears.
A critical message appears at the PCC.
The location (A) of the emergency stop button (7) is
displayed on the PCC.
1-011268-01-xx.svg
5- Release the emergency stop button (7).

6- Turn on the machine, see procedure "BCU-002.
A
7- Acknowledge the fault, see procedure "BCU-026.
8- Repeat steps 2 to 7 until you have checked all of the
emergency stop buttons.

- If any of the emergency stops do not work, contact
SIDEL.
1-011278-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BSU-005 Checking the emergency stop buttons 1
Checking the emergency stop buttons which are accessible

in JOG mode 9
Do not activate the low pressure air system in the

JOG implementation window.
9- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see
procedure "BCU-013.
10- Depress the button (9) (and keep it pressed in).
11- Press the emergency stop button (7) in the zone .
The machine stops immediately. 1-006268-03-xx.svg
SIDEL.
16- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
Checking the emergency stop buttons in the enclosure zone
17- Open the safety door .
18- Press the emergency stop button (7) in the zone .
19- Close the door.
F Check that the button (1) is disactivated.
SIDEL.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Checking the emergency stop buttons BSU-005 3/4
Inspecting the emergency stop buttons on the preform

distributor 2 4 5
The "Feeder" family appears.
1-008464-04-02.svg

The numerical keypad appears. 2 3 4 5
26- Enter the minimum setpoint value.
The numerical keypad appears.
The preform distributor starts.
32- Press one of the emergency stop buttons (7 ).
The machine stops immediately.
An alarm message appears at the PCC.
1-008848-03-02.svg
34- Press the push-button (8).

7 8
SIDEL.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
37- Make sure that all of the emergency stops are

unlocked.
38- Enter the production output rate, see
procedure "BPU-004.
The procedure is now complete. 1-008516-05-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BSU-005 Checking the emergency stop buttons 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Checking the door safeties in JOG mode BSU-006 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
In JOG mode, the acknowledgement of a fault due to

a door opening will clear when the door is closed.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
PROCEDURE
1- Connect the JOG (1) to one of the zones "Z1" to

"Z7", see procedure "BCU-013.
2- Open a machine door not corresponding to that zone. 1-006265-01-xx.svg
3- Press button (1).

The machine should not start.
The alarm message window (A) appears.
5- Make sure that the alarm message (A) corresponds to
the number of the door opened. 1
6- Close the door.
The message is cleared from the window (A).
7- Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check all of the doors.

The window (A) disappears from the screen.
9- Connect the JOG (1) to another zone.
1-006268-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BSU-006 Checking the door safeties in JOG mode 1
10- Repeat steps 2 to 7, to check all of the zones from "Z1"

to "Z7". 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
11- Stop JOG mode, see procedure "BCU-013.

1-010353-29-02.svg
A 3
1-010017-05-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
User procedure
Operating procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Turning on the power supplies to the machine ......................................................................................... BCU-001
Turning on the main machine power circuit .............................................................................................. BCU-002
Turning on the preform feeder .................................................................................................................. BCU-003
Turning on the PCC .................................................................................................................................. BCU-004
Turning on the machine utilities ................................................................................................................ BCU-005
Running the machine in "Automatic" mode .............................................................................................. BCU-006
Running an automatic greasing cycle ....................................................................................................... BCU-007
Turning off the utility supplies to the machine ........................................................................................... BCU-008
Turning off the PCC .................................................................................................................................. BCU-009
Turning off the preform feeder .................................................................................................................. BCU-010
Turning off the main machine circuit ......................................................................................................... BCU-011
Isolating the machine ................................................................................................................................ BCU-012
Using the JOG system .............................................................................................................................. BCU-013
Using manual rotation ............................................................................................................................... BCU-014
Running the machine in "Manual" mode ................................................................................................... BCU-015
Inspecting the preforms on delivery .......................................................................................................... BCU-016
Emptying the preform feeder .................................................................................................................... BCU-017
Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system ................................................................................ BCU-018
Operating the feeder in Automatic mode .................................................................................................. BCU-019
Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped ................................................................................... BCU-020
User management .................................................................................................................................... BCU-021
Alarm configuration ................................................................................................................................... BCU-022
Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms ....................................................................................... BCU-023
User login / logout ..................................................................................................................................... BCU-024
Entering numerical values ........................................................................................................................ BCU-025
Acknowledging "critical" alarms ................................................................................................................ BCU-026

Configuring access to application functions .............................................................................................. BCU-027
Entering the date ...................................................................................................................................... BCU-028
Opening and closing the hopper cowling .................................................................................................. BCU-029
Setting the dedust air pressure ................................................................................................................. BCU-030
Operating the preform feeder in manual mode ......................................................................................... BCU-034
Installing and updating documentation into the application PCC .............................................................. BCU-037
Powering up machine protection UPS cabinet ......................................................................................... BCU-048
Switching off the machine protection UPS cabinet ................................................................................... BCU-049
27/05/2013 B - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
B - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure Part B
2 Turning on the power supplies to the machine BCU-001 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure that no work is in progress on any of the

utility systems before turning on the power, air and
water supplies.
Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and

authorized personnel only.
Depending on whether the cabinet is model A or B,

the electrical components will be in different locations
1-006030-126-xx.svg
Circuit breaker A
Up-circuit transformer 230 V and cabinet cooling
Q1A
protection
Q1G 230 V transformer up-circuit protection
Q13AA Cabinet cooling system protection
PROCEDURE

2- Turn on the air and water supplies, see
procedure "BCU-005. 2 1
3- Open the doors to the main electrical cabinet .
4- Close circuit breaker "Q1A" (1). 3
The primary electrical circuit is now live.
5- Close protective devices "Q1G"(2) and "Q13AA"(3).
The plc, the PCC, the machine lighting and cabinet
cooling are now on.
6- Set the power module (5) standby switch (4) to position
"I".
When a battery is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (6) on the 1-011048-01-xx.svg
corresponding power module will light up, indicating a
battery fault. If any one of the batteries is faulty,
SIDEL recommends that you replace all of the
batteries, see procedure "BDE-001.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part B Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure
2/2 BCU-001 Turning on the power supplies to the machine 2
7- Set the main switch (7) to "RUN".

8- Turn on the main machine circuit, see B
procedure "BCU-002.
9- Turn on the PCC, see procedure "BCU-004.
10- Turn on the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-003.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check that the pneumatic circuits are secured, see
procedure "BSU-004.
1-010838-03-xx.svg
7 © SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
1-007067-08-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning on the main machine power circuit BCU-002 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Certain parts of the machine, such as the plc, the

UPS and the cabinet cooling system, are not powered
by the main machine circuit but by the primary
electrical circuit, see procedure "BCU-001.
1-006030-13-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

2- Close the door to the electrical cabinet. 1
3- Close the main section switch "Q1" (1) on the control
panel. 5
The power-on light (2) comes on.
5- Turn the key on the general switch (4) to "I".
6- Press the start button (5). 2
The button (5) lights up.
The machine and the preform feeder are now under
3
power.
1-006263-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-002 Turning on the main machine power circuit 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning on the preform feeder BCU-003 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure that no work is in progress on any of the

utility systems before turning on the power, air and 2
water supplies.

Power is supplied to the preform feeder through the

peripheral equipment circuit breaker "Q47A" located
in the main electrical cabinet . When the main 10 5
machine circuit is turned on at the main circuit breaker
"Q1" power is also supplied to the preform feeder, see 1-006030-124-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-002.
If "Q1" (main electrical cabinet) is closed and 6 5

4
"Q1KA"(4) is open, the terminal "X1" and the orange
wiring in the preform distributor cabinets is live.
This procedure applies during maintenance after a

manual shut off of the unscramler rollers and the
elevator column/hopper assembly, see
procedure "BCU-010.
The aspiration system electrical cabinet (9) is present

depending on the model and the machine
configuration 1-008520-03-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

The hopper is equipped with a type (A) or type (B)
electrical cabinet, depending on the machine model.
2- Close the doors to the electrical cabinet (3) for the
A 3 2 1
hopper *2.
The "Q1XA" circuit breaker (1) in the hopper electrical
cainet (3) is powered from the "Q1KA" circuit breaker
(4) in the unscrambler roller assembly electrical
cabinet (6).
3- Position the "Q1XA" circuit breaker (1) in the hopper

electrical cabinet (3) to position "I".
1-008518-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-003 Turning on the preform feeder 2
B 3 1 2 7
1-008516-03-xx.svg
4- Set the "Q69LD" circuit breaker (8) in the aspiration

system cabinet (9) to position "I". 10 9
5- Close the doors to the unscrambler roller assembly
electrical cabinet (6).
6- Position the "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in the 8
unscrambler roller electrical cabinet (6) to position "I".
The power-on lamps (2 ; 5 ; 10) light up.
The remote modules in the plc and the cooling system
for the cabinets are under power.
7- For a type (B) electrical cabinet, press the hopper start
button (7).
The button (7) lights up.
The hopper and elevator column assembly is ready for
operation.
8- If necessary, press the start button for each aspirator. 1-008830-05-xx.svg
The aspirators are now operational.
If there is an intermediate conveyor (optional), it is
started by pressing the button (7).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
9- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC.

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning on the PCC BCU-004 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001 .
procedure "BCU-002.
PROCEDURE
1- Open the door (1) on the control station.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
2- Turn the switch (2) on the PCC to "ON".

1
3- Close the door (1) on the control station.
1-006476-01-xx.svg

1-006278-05-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-004 Turning on the PCC 2

The UPS (4) is now under power.
The PCC and "WINDOWS" start up.
The PCC application starts. 5
1-011902-02-xx.svg
F Wait a few seconds.
The "Main page" family page appears. A
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-010388-01-02.svg
1-006403-11-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning on the machine utilities BCU-005 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
For further information, see partII "Description of the

machine" .
1-006030-112-xx.svg
Never attempt to operate the machine without water in

the hydraulic circuits.
PROCEDURE 4
Hydraulic interface panel
machine.
- If the drain valves (1) are open.
· Fill the hydraulic lines, see
procedure "BDM-004. 3
- If the drain valves (2) are open.
· Fill the hydraulic lines, see
procedure "BDM-043.
2- Open the valve (3).
3- Open the valves (4).
1 2
1-006325-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BCU-005 Turning on the machine utilities 2
A 7 5 6
1-006301-20-xx.svg
B
Depending upon the configuration, the machine is
equipped with a high pressure air circuit type (A) or
type (B).
machine. 7
F Make sure that the isolating valve (8) on the high
pressure flowmeter (9) is open.
6
1-007859-15-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning on the machine utilities BCU-005 3/4
5- Unpadlock the valve (5).

8 9
6- Gently open the valve (5).
The pressure in the circuit rises and then stabilizes.
F Check the pressure before regulation at the gauge (6).
F Check the pressure after regulation on the pressure
gauge(s) (7).
- If the pressure is not correct.
· Set the blowing pressure to , see
procedure "BPU-002.
Any intervention on the high pressure circuit is no
longer secured.
1-007440-04-xx.svg
12 10
machine.
Open the high pressure air supply, see the following
procedure.
The pressure in the circuit rises and then stabilizes. 11
F Check the pressure before regulation at the gauge
(11).
F Check the pressure after regulation at the gauge (12).
· Adjust the service pressure, see
procedure "BCU-018.
1-006026-13-xx.svg
Dedust module (option)
machine.

The pressure in the circuit rises and then stabilizes.
F Check the pressure before regulation at the gauge
(15).
F Check the pressure after regulation at the gauge (16).
· Adjust the service pressure, see
procedure "BCU-030.
13- Close the safety doors. 1-006777-16-xx.svg

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BCU-005 Turning on the machine utilities 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Running the machine in "Automatic" mode BCU-006 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
During a production cycle, do not press the key (3)

(except in emergencies). In this case, the machine will
stop automatically with the preforms still in the oven
and articles being blown. Clearing these items will be
difficult and will complicate the restart of production.
MACHINE STATUS
- the appropriate production recipe has been loaded into
the machine, see procedure "BPU-005.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
F Check that all of the options physically present on the
machine have been activated in the PCC application as 1
per your machine configuration.
For further information, please refer to
chapter ""Options" family", in the User manual.
F Check that there are no faults.
F Check the output rate value (1), see
procedure "BPU-004.
F Check the frequencies for the greasing cycles, see
procedure "BCU-007.
2- Select "Automatic" mode for the blowing machine, using
the key (2).
A confirm window appears.
3- Confirm the mode.
"Automatic" mode is reserved for starting machine
production.
3 2
For further information, see partIII "Decription of the
control station application" . 1-006403-01-02.svg
4- Select "Automatic" mode for the preform feeder, see

procedure "BCU-019.
Manual and Automatic modes for the feeder are

independent from the Manual and Automatic modes
on the blowing machine.
If there is a fault on the count sensor "D5", the

preform feeder can be operated in Manual mode, see
procedure "BCU-034.
5- Press key (3) for 2 seconds.
status.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-006 Running the machine in "Automatic" mode 2

When the temperature limit has been reached, preforms
will begin to feed into the machine. 3 5 4
Bottle production begins.
1-006706-03-xx.svg
During production, the (4) key allows preform feeding
to be suspended without stopping the machine.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
The machine is in production cycle.
8- Press the key (5) to stop production.

The machine will clear all preforms and bottles.
The machine stops but the oven ventilation system will
continue for another 2 minutes.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Running an automatic greasing cycle BCU-007 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on

the model and the configuration of the machine.
MACHINE STATUS
- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001.
PROCEDURE
1-006030-14-xx.svg
Checking the cycle frequencies
The "Options" family appears.
The (B) window appears.
4- Note the values displayed on the keys (4) before
making any modifcations.
The value displayed corresponds to the number of
wheel revolutions between each greasing cycle.
You must follow the frequencies indicated by default.
5- If necessary, press the key (4) and enter the new value
to modify the greasing cycle frequency.
· Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-015.
1 2
1-007626-08-02.svg
Requesting a voluntary greasing cycle
6- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006. A
1-010768-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-007 Running an automatic greasing cycle 2

The (B) window appears. B 4
The greasing cycle runs.
The keys (5) change status during the entire greasing
cycle.
F Wait for the end of the cycle.
11- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006. 5 5
F Check that the relevant parts have been correctly
greased .
BEFORE YOU FINISH

family.
1-010770-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning off the utility supplies to the machine BCU-008 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
For further information, see partII "Description of the

machine" .
1-006030-112-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS 2
- the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006.
PROCEDURE
Hydraulic interface panel

machine. 1
2- Close the inlet valves (1).

3- Close the outlet valves (2).
1-006325-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BCU-008 Turning off the utility supplies to the machine 2
A 4 3 5
1-006301-21-xx.svg
B
Depending upon the configuration, the machine is
equipped with a high pressure air circuit type (A) or
type (B).
4
machine.
5- Close the valve (3).
The high pressure air system is now isolated.
The high pressure air system has now been purged.
F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure
gauges (4 ; 5). 3
6- Lock out the valve (3).
5
1-007859-16-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning off the utility supplies to the machine BCU-008 3/4

7 6
machine.
The low pressure air system is now isolated.
The low pressure air system has now been purged.
gauges (7 ; 8).
8
1-006026-14-xx.svg
Dedust module (option)
machine.
The low pressure air system is now isolated.
The low pressure air system has now been purged.
gauges (11 ; 12).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The procedure is now complete. 11 12
1-006777-19-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BCU-008 Turning off the utility supplies to the machine 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning off the PCC BCU-009 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Exit the PCC application before turning off the PCC in

order to avoid any malfunctions on the PCC
application.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001.
procedure "BCU-002. 1-006030-14-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

The (A) window appears. 1

The PCC application shuts down.
1-006403-09-02.svg
3- Shut down the PCC from the "Windows" start menu.

F Wait for the PCC to shut down. A
1-006102-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BCU-009 Turning off the PCC 2

5- Turn off the UPS (4) by pressing the button (5) for (2)
second(s).
To reach the switch (6) for the PCC open the door (7)
to the control panel.
6- If required turn the PCC switch (6) to "OFF".
1-006278-03-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The procedure is now complete. 5
1-011902-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning off the PCC BCU-009 3/4
1-006476-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BCU-009 Turning off the PCC 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning off the preform feeder BCU-010 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

authorized personnel only. 2
Power is supplied to the preform feeder through the

peripheral equipment circuit breaker "Q47A" located
in the main electrical cabinet . Isolating the main
machine power circuit at the main "Q1" circuit breaker
cuts the power supply to the prefrom feeder, see
procedure "BCU-011.
10 5
If "Q1KA" (4) is open and "Q1" (main electrical
cabinet) is closed, the "X1" terminal and the orange 1-006030-124-xx.svg
wiring in the preform distributor electrical cabinets are

still live.
The aspiration system electrical cabinet (10) is

present depending on the model and the machine
configuration
PROCEDURE
1- Set the "Q69LD" circuit breaker (9) in the aspiration

system cabinet (10) to position "0". 11 10
The lamp (11) goes out.
The aspirators stop.
The hopper is equipped with a type (A) or type (B) 9
electrical cabinet, depending on the machine model.
1-008830-06-xx.svg
The "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in the unscrambler A 2 3 1

roller electrical cabinet (5) also isolates the hopper

electrical cabinet (2).
2- For a type (B) electrical cabinet, press the hopper stop
button (7).
The light on the hopper start button (8) goes out.
1-008518-05-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-010 Turning off the preform feeder 2
3- Position the "Q1XA" circuit breaker (1) in the hopper

electrical cabinet (2) to position "0". B 2 1 3 8 7
The plc and the cabinet cooling remote modules (2) are
switched off.
1-008516-04-xx.svg
4- Position the "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in the

unscrambler roller electrical cabinet (5) to position "0". 5 4 6
The plc and the cabinet cooling remote modules (5) are
switched off.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
5- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC.

1-008520-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Turning off the main machine circuit BCU-011 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

When the main circuit breaker (4) is open, the primary

electrical circuit is still live. see procedure "BCU-012.
1-006030-13-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- PCC switched off, see procedure "BCU-009. 4
PROCEDURE
2
The lamp in the button (2) goes out.
2- Turn the key on the general switch (3) to "0".
3- Open the main circuit breaker Q1 (4). 5
The power lamp (5) goes out.
The machine and preform feeder primary circuit is now 1
isolated.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
4- Lock out the main switch (4).

1-006263-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-011 Turning off the main machine circuit 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Isolating the machine BCU-012 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Depending on whether the cabinet is model A or B,

the electrical components will be in different locations
The PLC is designed to cope with power failures,

however SIDEL recommends that you follow the
procedure below.
1-006030-126-xx.svg
Circuit breaker
1
Up-circuit transformer 230 V and cabinet cooling
Q1A
protection
Q1G 230 V transformer up-circuit protection
Q13AA Cabinet cooling system protection
4
MACHINE STATUS
3
PROCEDURE
1- Turn off the utility supplies to the machine, see

procedure "BCU-008.
2- Turn off the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-010. 2
3- Turn off the PCC, see procedure "BCU-009.
4- Isolate the main machine power circuit, see
procedure "BCU-011.
5- Open the doors to the main electrical cabinet . 1-007067-09-xx.svg
When a battery is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (1) on the

battery fault. If any one of the batteries is faulty,
SIDEL recommends that you replace all of the
batteries, see procedure "BDE-001.
6- Set the main switch (2) to "STOP".

"OFF".
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-012 Isolating the machine 2
5 7
1-011048-02-xx.svg
8- Open protective devices "Q1G"(5) and "Q13AA"(6).

B
9- Open the isolating switch "Q1A" (7).
The primary electrical circuit is now isolated.
The plc, the PCC, the machine lighting and cabinet
cooling are now isolated.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
10- Close the door to the electrical cabinet.

1-010838-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Using the JOG system BCU-013 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never rotate the blow wheel by pushing or pulling it.
To activate the JOG mode, the JOG unit (1) must be

connected to the stowage zone "Z0" at the control station
(2).
Activating the JOG mode will automatically block use of the
manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014.
A thermal safety device prevents misuse of the JOG.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MAchine production cannot be restarted until the JOG

mode has been disactivated.
The filler transmission system rotates the bottle

outfeed wheel .
Before using the JOG, make sure that the bottle

transfer wheel is cleared of articles (except in specific
cases). 1
MACHINE STATUS
2
procedure "BCU-001,
- main electrical circuit under power, see 1-006266-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-002,
PROCEDURE

F Make sure that there are no current faults on the band
(A) at the PCC.
· If necessary, reset fault on the PCC. see
procedure "BCU-026,
2- Connect the JOG unit (1) to the stowage zone "Z0" at
the control station (2).
The "Settings" family appears.
1-006265-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BCU-013 Using the JOG system 2

The secure low pressure air system of the machine is A
supplied.
The nozzle and stretch cylinders are in raised position
and do not inhibit the rotation of the machine..
F Check whether the operation requires the activation of
the low pressure air system.
- If yes.
- If not.
· Press the (5) key.
The secure low pressure air system of the
machine is no longer supplied.
6- Disconnect the JOG.
machine.
Only the doors in the relevant zone may be opened
without causing the machine to stop. 3
8- Connect the JOG unit (1) to the socket corresponding to
the work zone on the machine. 1-006403-10-02.svg
9- Depress the button (6) (and keep it pressed in).

The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. 9
The button (7) is a secure stop button, it functions in

the same way as the door open safety features. The
button (7) can be held in stop position.
The machine stops and the brake engages.
The machine is in the desired position.
4
1-010353-03-02.svg
11- Repeat steps 109 to 10. to set the machine to the

required positions. B 5 8
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-010349-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Using the JOG system BCU-013 3/4
14- Connect the JOG unit (1) to the stowage zone "Z0" at
the control station (2). 6 7
F If necessary, press button (5) to deactivate the supply of
the secure low pressure air system.
The window (B) disappears from the screen.
The "Main page" family page appears.
1-006268-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BCU-013 Using the JOG system 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Using manual rotation BCU-014 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Before rotating the machine, always make sure that

there are no personnel located at positions not visible
from the cranking point.
For interventions involving 2 technicians and using the

manual rotation system, the 2 technicians must
communicate clearly with each other to coordinate
their actions during any procedures.
1-006030-17-xx.svg
When rotating manually, always turn the machine in

the normal direction of production (except when
following specific SIDEL instructions). 1
Never rotate the machine by more than half a

complete revolution in the opposite direction to normal
production.
For safety reasons when manual rotation is activated,

an alarm siren sounds when the braking system of the
blow wheel opens using the manual device (3).
The filler transmission system rotates the bottle

outfeed wheel .
Before using the manual rotation system, check that

the bottle transfer wheel is clear of articles (except n
specific cases).
1-010353-04-02.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,

procedure "BCU-002,
- JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013,
- manual rotation unrestricted. see procedure "BSU-002,
PROCEDURE
Raising the nozzle and stretching cylinders
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BCU-014 Using manual rotation 2

The (A) window appears. A
The secure low pressure air system of the machine is
supplied.
The nozzle and stretch cylinders stop in raised position.
2
no longer supplied.
family.
Using manual rotation
Never use a crank other than the one fitted on the

machine safety system.
1-010342-02-02.svg
Comply with the procedure that requires manual
rotation to select the electric circuits that must be
shutdown.
5- If need be, shutdown: the PCC, the main electric circuit
and the upstream electric circuit, see
procedure "BCU-004, see procedure "BCU-002, see
procedure "BCU-001.
machine.
F Make sure that the stretching and nozzle cylinders are
in the raised position.
7- Remove the crank (4) from the safety system (5).
Removing the crank (4) from the safety system (5) will
be detected by the sensor "B12.5" which will prevent
the machine from operating automatically.
Depending on the model, the machine is equipped

with either a type "A" or type "B" crank.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Using manual rotation BCU-014 3/4
8- Engage the hand crank (4) on the motor shaft .

9- Depress the button (3) (and keep it pressed in). A 5 3 4 5 4
The alarm siren sounds.
The blow wheel brake is open.
10- Turn the hand crank (4) until you reach the required
position.
Steps 9 and 10 are carried out simultaneously by the
same technician.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006603-08-xx.svg
The blow wheel brake is closed. B 3 4 5 4
12- Remove the hand crank (4).
13- Stow the crank (4) back on its safety system (5).
If the crank (4) is not correctly positioned on the safety
system (5) the machine will not operate
automatically.
1-006908-09-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BCU-014 Using manual rotation 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Running the machine in "Manual" mode BCU-015 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
"Manual" mode is reserved for production trials and

when setting up the machine.
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
1-006030-14-xx.svg
machine have been activated in the PCC application as A
F Check that the setpoint values (A) are coherent.
· If the values do not correspond to those in the
production set-up, modify them.
F Check the frequencies for the greasing cycles, see
procedure "BCU-007.
2- Select Manual mode on the blowing machine using the
key (2).
3- Select "Automatic" mode for the preform feeder, see
procedure "BCU-019.
independent from the Manual and Automatic modes 2
1-006403-12-02.svg
If there is a fault on the count sensor "D5", the
preform feeder can be operated in Manual mode, see
procedure "BCU-034.
status.

Oven heating and cooling start.
The stretching/preblowing/blowing operations are ready
for operation.
The preform feeder is operating.
The key (7) will flash until the oven has reached the
required temperature for preform feeding to begin. 3 4 5 6 7
When the temperature limit has been reached, preforms
will begin to feed into the machine. 1-006707-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-015 Running the machine in "Manual" mode 3
Bottle production trials begin.

BEFORE YOU FINISH
During a production cycle, do not press the key (3)

(except in emergencies). In this case, the machine will
stop automatically with the preforms still in the oven
and articles being blown. Clearing these items will be
difficult and will complicate the restart of production.
Preform feeding stops.
The preform feeder stops.
Wait for the last bottle to exit the machine.

The machine stops but the oven ventilation system will
continue for another 2 minutes.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspecting the preforms on delivery BCU-016 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The testing procedure will be carried out by the quality
control laboratory according to the regulations in place in
the production facility.
Chemical tests must be carried out on each batch of
preforms delivered.
When handling preforms, hands must be washed and
disinfected and gloves worn.
The sample preforms must be disposed of after

testing.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- clean, dry cloths,
- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- box cutter, (solid non-slap blade).
PROCEDURE
Inspecting the storage area

F Inspect the cleanness of the storage area.
F Make sure that the storage area is well ventilated and
that the temperature and the hygrometry are monitored
(only small variations).
F Make sure that the storage area is sealed against the
entry of moisture, insects and other nuisances.
Inspecting the packaging
Only open boxes near the preform hopper.
Always wear latex gloves when handling the

packaging or its contents.
F Make sure that the description on the label corresponds

to the references on the purchase order.
F Check the general appearance of the box, looking
especially for damage, tears or traces of external
moisture.
F Check that the plastic bag containing the preforms is
inside a clean, sealed cardboard box and does not
show any signs of moisture or mould.
F Check that the preforms have been supplied in a
complete, clean, dry, airtight plastic bag.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-016 Inspecting the preforms on delivery 2
F Make sure that the plastic bag does not contain any
foreign objects such as insects, preform debris or other
items.
Visual inspection of the preforms
Wear latex gloves.
1- Take out 10 preforms.

F Check that the preforms correspond to the contractual
drawings and dimensions.
F Make sure that the preforms do not have any kind of
deformity (curved, oval, stuck together etc.).
F Make sure there are no scratches, grooves, traces of
impact or sticking.
F Check the appearance of the seal plane (thickness, no
displacement).
F Check that the injection points are small, salient and
free from burring.
F Make sure that the thread on the neck has been
correctly injected and is fully formed.
F Make sure that the rim is perfectly smooth and flat.
Checking for preform contamination
Wear latex gloves.
2- Take out 10 preforms.

F Check the microbe load in the preforms.
F Make sure that there are no traces of chemical
products.
Inspections during loading
F When loading preforms, make sure that the packaging
has been opened cleanly (using a box cutter will
prevent the creation of packaging particles).
F Make sure that there are no foreign objects in the
packaging.
3- Discard any preforms that fall from the production line
or that have been handled.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Corrective measures
F Check the other boxes in the batch.

4- Remove any container which does not pass the
inspection procedures indicated above.
5- Contact the supplier following the contractual quality
control procedure.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Emptying the preform feeder BCU-017 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The remote hopper is an optional piece of equipment.
The buttons (18 ; 19) located on the unscrambler

roller unit frame have the same function ast the
"Preform elevator start/stop" key (17) on the lower
display bar of the PCC.
1-006030-59-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS 19 18
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
1-006375-09-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- mobile external conveyor (option),
- drain pan.
PROCEDURE
1- Position the external mobile conveyor (1) (option) or the

collectig bin under the emptying gate (2) of the hopper
(3).
1
1-006636-00-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BCU-017 Emptying the preform feeder 2
2- Pull the handle (4) to unlock the emptying gate (2) on

the hopper (3). 23 24
3- Raise the emptying gate (2) of the hopper (3).
4- Pull back the holding pin (23) and position the hole on 3
the locking rod (24) in line with the axis of the pin (23).
2
5- Release the pin (23).
The emptying gate (2) is blocked in the raised position.
6- If an external mobile conveyor is positioned under the 4
hopper clearance chute.
· Position the collectig bin under the external mobile
conveyor (1) (option).
· Start the external mobile conveyor (1) (option), refer
to the technical documentation supplied with the 1-010331-03-xx.svg
conveyor.
7- Remove the trunnion nut (5).
8- Pull on the stop pin (6).
9- Tip the emptying gate of the unscrambler rollers into
emptying position using the trunnion nut (5).
10- Tighten the lock nut (5).
6
1-008472-01-xx.svg

The "Feeder" family appears. 7 16 8

Empty the hopper
Emptying by the hopper is confirmed.
14- Enter a setpoint value of 30 % using the key (10).
1-008464-03-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Emptying the preform feeder BCU-017 3/4
Emptying the unscrambler rollers

16- Press the (12) key. A 9 B 12
Emptying by the unscrambler rollers is confirmed.
- If an information message appears in the window
(B) indicating that the inductive sensor "B127.1" (15)
does not detect the emptying gate of the
unscrambler rollers in emptying position.
· Repeat steps 7 to 10.
11 10 14 13
1-007478-02-02.svg
19- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key

(16).
The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode.
22 15
1-008471-01-xx.svg
20- Press the key (17).

The hopper, the elevator columns, the mini-hopper and 17
the unscrambler rollers begin their emptying cycles.
F Wait for the hopper, the elevator columns, the mini
hopper and the unscrambler rollers to be empty.
21- Press keys (11 ; 14).
The conveyor belts on the preforms feeder stop. 1-006704-06-xx.svg
22- If an external mobile conveyor is positioned under the

hopper clearance chute.
· Stop the external mobile conveyor (1) (option).
Emptying the infeed rail

23- Position the collecting bin under the infeed rail.
24- Slightly loosen the grip-nut (20).
25- Slide the guide rail (21).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BCU-017 Emptying the preform feeder 2
26- Remove the preforms from the infeed rail and from
below the infeed rail. 20
27- Position the guide rail (21).
28- Tighten the grip-nut (20).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

21
The preform feeder stops.
30- Press keys (9 ; 12).
31- Remove any preforms which have remained in the
system (chutes, hopper, conveyor belts etc.).
family.
33- Remove the external mobile conveyor (1) (option).
1-006271-03-xx.svg
34- Pull back the pin (23) and hold the emptying gate (2) of
the hopper (3).
35- Release the pin (23).
36- Lower the emptying gate (2) until the locking handle
engages (4).
37- Return the emptying gate of the unscrambler rollers to
its initial position.
The feeder cannot start if the inductive sensor
"B127.0" (22) does not detect the emptying gate of
the unscrambler rollers in production position.
38- Remove the collecting bin from beneath the infeed rail.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system BCU-018 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Normal machine operation requires a pressure of 7

bar.
The pressure value for the low pressure circuit (A) is

indicated in the "Wheel" family.
Some visual images may be different from your

configuration but the procedure remains the same.
1-006030-154-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BCU-018 Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system 2
MACHINE STATUS
- PCC application set to the "Wheel" family.
PROCEDURE

machine.
The low-pressure air circuit can be of different types
(B ; C ; D).
- Type (B ; C) : operating pressure value = 7 bar.
Low pressure air circuit: Type (B)

2- Check the pressure at the gauge (1). A
3- Lift the button (2).

1-007565-02-02.svg
The button (2) is released.
4- Turn the button (2) until you reach the required
B 2
pressure.
circuit.
5- Lower the button (2).
The button (2) is locked.
Low pressure air circuit: Type (C)
6- Check the pressure at the gauge (1). 1 3
7- Loosen the check-nut (2).
The button (3) is released. 1-006273-11-xx.svg

pressure. C
circuit. 1
9- Tighten up the check nuts (2).
1-006832-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system BCU-018 3/4
Low pressure air circuit: Type (D) ; Pressure reduction air

40 / 7 bar: Type (E) D
- Type (D) : operating pressure value = 7 bar.

- Type (E) : operating pressure value = 8 bar.
2
10- Check the pressure at the gauge (1).
1
The button (2) is released.
pressure.
circuit.
13- Lower the button (2). 1-013472-01-xx.svg
E 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the operating pressure.
· Reset the operating pressure level if required.
1-013812-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BCU-018 Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Operating the feeder in Automatic mode BCU-019 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Automatic mode on the preform feeder is the normal

operating mode. Automatic mode on the feeder allows
the speed on the elevator column to auto-adapt.
For more information on the preform feeder auto-

adapt function, see procedure "BPU-003.
The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on 1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 2
PROCEDURE
machine have been activated in the PCC application as
2- Select Automatic mode on the preform feeder, using the
key (2).
F Check the start setpoint values produced by the
production recipe loaded.
3- If necessary, search for the preform feeder start 1-008464-13-02.svg
instructions in Auutomatic mode, see

procedure "BPU-017.
4- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006 or
see procedure "BCU-015.
The plc pilots the preform feeder with the start

instruction setpoint for the elevator column, which
results from the auto-adapt calculation.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
5- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or see

procedure "BCU-015.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-019 Operating the feeder in Automatic mode 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped BCU-020 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
2 1 3
5
Apply the procedure relevant to the tripped torque

limiter.
If there is a preform decontamination module (option 6

according to the model), the torque limiter (6) is fitted
on the machine.
1-007205-07-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
- PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, 1
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005,
- JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013.
PROCEDURE
1-006344-01-xx.svg
Drive system (1) torque limiter
machine.
2- Reset the the torque limiter (1) using the manual
rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014.
The alarm message corresponding to the fault A
disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC.
Torque limiter (2) on the oven infeed wheel
1-006403-13-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BCU-020 Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped 2

machine.
5- Remove any preforms or bottles which may be
obstructing the rotation of the machine.
6- Reset the torque limiter (2) by manually turning the
oven infeed wheel in the working direction. 2
The alarm message corresponding to the fault
40 mm-pitch oven wheel drive shaft torque limiter (3)
machine.
9- Remove any preforms or bottles which may be 1-010285-02-xx.svg

Never turn the blow wheel backwards by more than
half a complete revolution (risk of mechanical
damage).
For the 40 mm pitch oven, restarting in the normal

direction will not re-synchronize. The non-
synchronized message displays at the PCC. The
machine cannot restart.

chapter "Transmission", in the User manual.
10- Reset the torque limiter (3) by turning the blow wheel
backwards using the manual rotation system, see
procedure "BCU-014.
3
50 mm-pitch oven wheel drive shaft torque limiter (3)
machine.
14- Reset the the torque limiter (3) using the manual
rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 1-006346-01-xx.svg

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped BCU-020 3/4
Bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter (5)

machine.
18- Reset the torque limiter (5) by manually turning the blow
wheel in the normal direction of production.
5
Infeed wheel torque limiter (6)
machine.
22- Reset the torque limiter (6) by manually turning the
infeed wheel in the normal direction of operation. 1-008652-01-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH
24- Check the synchronization of the machine before

starting production, see procedure "BNM-012.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BCU-020 Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 User management BCU-021 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Each user level must include at least 1 user.
Delete the SIDEL user levels after having created the

users for each level.
User passwords must not be divulged. SIDEL accepts

no resonsibiity for incorrect use of the user levels.
The "User management" window allows the

administrator to:
- display user accounts, their levels and their 1-006030-14-xx.svg
passwords,
- modify user levels and their passwords,
- create and delete user accounts.
MACHINE STATUS
- PCC application connected in the name of an
administrator, see procedure "BCU-024.
PROCEDURE

Creating a new user account
The (C) window appears.
1 2
1-007626-02-02.svg
5- Press on the window (5).

The keyboard appears.
A
6- Key in the name of the user using the keyboard, then
confirm. 3
8- Key in the password using the keyboard, then confirm.
If the entries into the password fields (6 ; 7) are not 1-010389-02-02.svg
the same the password will not be accepted.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-021 User management 3
10- Key in again the password using the keyboard, then

confirm. B
11- Authorize or not a user to modify their password using
the key (8).
12- Authorize or not the automatic delogin of a user account
using the key (9).
13- Define the level of a user using the keys (10).
14- Press the (11) key. 4
The new account has now been created.
The window (C) disappears from the screen.
Modify an existing user account
15- Press on the user name.
The (D) window appears. 1-010385-02-02.svg
Modify the password and the automatic delogin

17- Key in the new password using the ketyboard, then
confirm. C 5 6
If the entries into the password fields (12 ; 13) are not
the same the password will not be accepted.
19- Key in again the password using the keyboard, then
confirm.
20- Authorize or not a user to modify their password using
the key (14).
7 8 9 10 11
21- Authorize or not the automatic delogin of a user account
using the key (15).
1-006561-01-02.svg
Modify the level of a user
22- Define the level of a user using the keys (16).
The modifcations have now been saved.
The window (D) disappears from the screen.
Delete a user account
24- Press on the user name. D 12 18
The (D) window appears.
The user account has been deleted.

BEFORE YOU FINISH
26- If necessary, close the session to prohibit access to

non-administrator users.
The procedure is now complete. 13 14 15 16 17
1-006562-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Alarm configuration BCU-022 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Pressing the key (1) will increment the corresponding

alarm level.
The keys (2 ; 3 ; 4) select the alarm tone associated

with the corresponding "Information" alarm:
- (2) no alarm tone.
- (3) alarm tone for 8 s.
- (4) continuous alarm tone.
1-006030-14-xx.svg

7
chapter ""Alarms" family", in the User manual.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002, 8
- PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004.
PROCEDURE
A 2 3 4 1
1-008989-02-02.svg

The "Alarms" family appears.
The (A) window displays the top of the alarm list.
F Check the alarm configuration.
4- If necessary, change the configuration of the alarms
using the keys (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4).
5- Scroll down the list using the key (8).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6- Repeat as above from stage 4 until you have completed

the settings for all of the alarms.
5 6
1-006948-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-022 Alarm configuration 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms BCU-023 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
For more details on the definitions for the "Critical"

and "Alert" alarms and critical and progessive
shutdowns which result from them, please refer to
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
1-006030-14-xx.svg
1- If the application PCC is not at the "Main page" family,

press key (2) to identify the cause of the alarm. 2 3
"Information" alarms
F Acknowledge the fault.
2- Press the acknowledge key (1).
The messages on the scrolling band (3) in the window
(A) disappear.
"Alert" alarms
F Acknowledge the fault.
The alarm siren and lamps will stop.
The alarm remains on the display.
F Correct the fault.
The key (2) returns to its original state.
4 1
(A) disappear.
1-006403-02-02.svg
The machine starts.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6- Close the window (A).

1-010017-03-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-023 Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 User login / logout BCU-024 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Only authorized personnel are permitted to operate

the machine.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE 1

The keyboard (B) appears.
3- Enter the user name using the keyboard (B).
The keyboard (B) appears.
6- Enter the password using the keyboard (B).
1-006077-10-02.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH A 2

The start of the user shift has been confirmed.
5 6
At the end of the shift press the key (6) to close the 1-006563-01-02.svg
user session.
B 3
1-006564-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-024 User login / logout 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Entering numerical values BCU-025 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Values can be modifed using the numerical keypad.
PROCEDURE
1 Minimum value selection key

2 Maximum value selection key
3 Key to delete value shown one figure at a time
4 Key to delete entire value shown
1-006030-14-xx.svg
5 Key to display the last confirmed value
Key to confirm the value displayed and close the
6
keypad
1- Press any key or display zone on the PCC.

The numerical keypad (A) appears. A 2
The value entered must fall between the minimum (1) 1

3
and maximum (2) values.
4
2- Enter the required value through the keypad (A) or
press keys (1) or (2) to select the minimum and 5
maximum values.
6
The value displayed is confirmed and the keypad
disappears from the screen.
1-006398-04-02.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the value shown on the PCC.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-025 Entering numerical values 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Acknowledging "critical" alarms BCU-026 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
For more details on the definitions for the "Critical"

and "Alert" alarms and critical and progessive
shutdowns which result from them, please refer to
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
1-006030-14-xx.svg
1- If the application PCC is not at the "Main page" family,

press key (2) to identify the cause of the alarm. 2 3
The alarm siren and lamps will stop.
The alarm remains on the display.
F Correct the fault.
The key (2) returns to its original state.
(A) disappear.
(4).
The machine starts.
The bottles and preforms will be ejected from the
transfer arms until the machine is completely clear. 5 4 1
1-006403-03-02.svg
F Check the meeting points and make sure that the
machine is running correctly. A
- No incidents have been detected.
The machine stops.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006.

1-010017-03-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-026 Acknowledging "critical" alarms 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Configuring access to application functions BCU-027 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Access to functions which change the status of the

machine can only be set by a user with administrator-
level access.

control station application" .
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
1
Consumables
None 1-006288-02-xx.svg
Specific tools
- mouse with "USB" type connection.
PROCEDURE
1- Open the cover flap (1) at the PCC.

2- Connect the mouse to the "USB" port on the front of the
PCC.
3- Position the cursor over the button you wish to
configure.
4- Right click on the mouse.

The pop-up menu (A) appears.
5- Modify the access level to this function as required.
A
6- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have completed
all access configurations.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
7- Disconnect the moouse.

1-007071-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-027 Configuring access to application functions 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Entering the date BCU-028 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Dates can be entered and modified using the

keyboard.
PROCEDURE
1 Current date displayed in window (A)

2 Go to previous month
3 Go to previous year
4 Go to following year
5 Go to following month
1-006030-14-xx.svg
6 Day selection keys
1- Press any key or display zone on the PCC.

A
2- Select the year using the keys (3 ; 4).
The calendar (B) updates. 2 5
3- Select the month using the keys (2 ; 5).
3 4
The calendar (B) updates.
4- Select the day using the keys (6).
The date has been modified and the window (A) B
disappears. 6
BEFORE YOU FINISH
F Check the date displayed at the PCC.
The procedure is now complete. 1-008213-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-028 Entering the date 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Opening and closing the hopper cowling BCU-029 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never place any objects on the hopper cowling (1).
In the case of a blockage whilst opening or closing the

cover, an alarm message appears on the information
panel and the cover function is stopped. Once the
cause of the malfunction is repaired and the fault is
reset on the touch screen, the cover function
reactivates.
1-006030-98-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
1
PROCEDURE
Opening the cover (1)

F Control the absence of elements on the mobile cover
(1).
1- If present and if necessary, select Manual mode using
the button (2).
2- Depress the button (4) until the cover (1) is fully open.
The cover (1) is now open.
1-013442-01-xx.svg
Closing the cover (1)
3- Depress the button (3) until the cover (1) is fully closed. 3
The cover (1) is now closed.
BEFORE YOU FINISH 4
F Make sure that the cover (1) is fully closed.

4- If present and if necessary, select Automatic mode 2
using the button (2).

1-013444-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-029 Opening and closing the hopper cowling 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the dedust air pressure BCU-030 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The pressure gauge (1) on the pressure reduction line

must be the only means used for checking the setting
value of the dedust air pressure. The pressure value
(4) indicated on the PCC is systematically different to
that indicated on the pressure gauge (1). The
pressure value (4) indicated on the PCC only
indicates correct dedusting operation.
The pressure in the air circuit, on the pressure gauge

(1), should between 1,5 and 3 bar. The pressure
1-006030-10-xx.svg
varies according to the type of preform.
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Check the pressure at the gauge (1).
The button (2) is released. 2
pressure. 1
circuit.
5- Lower the button (2).
1-006777-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-030 Setting the dedust air pressure 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The "Wheel" family appears.
F Check that a pressure value (4) is displayed, in
operation.
This pressure value (4), indicated on the PCC, is
different from the actual pressure value, without
having an effect on the dedusting operation.
6 3
1-010354-03-02.svg
A 4 5
1-008397-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Operating the preform feeder in manual mode BCU-034 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

"Manual mode" is a downgraded operating mode for

the preform feeder which allows production to
continue when there is a fault at the "D5" count
sensor.
When "Manual" mode for the feeder has been

selected, the automated regulation system (auto-
adapt) is no longer in operation. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

1 2
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
2- Select Manual mode on the preform feeder using the
key (2).
F Check the start setpoint values produced by the
production recipe loaded.
1-008848-08-02.svg
3- If necessary, search for the preform feeder start
instruction setpoints in Manual mode, see
procedure "BPU-017.

control station application" .
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Correct the sensor "D5" fault quickly in order to return

to full Automatic mode operation, see
procedure "BCU-019.
procedure "BCU-015.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-034 Operating the preform feeder in manual mode 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Installing and updating documentation into the application PCC BCU-037 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Document installation is available from version

V3.07R0 in the PCC application.
The installation procedure is accessed by pressing

the key (6).
MACHINE STATUS
- Machine power on, see procedure "BCU-001.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 1-006030-14-xx.svg
Parts
- PCC application CD-ROM installation
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

1 6 2
1-007626-11-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-037 Installing and updating documentation into the application PCC 1

The (B) window appears. A
5- Select the drive you require using the keys (5).
The appplication updates the documentation.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6- Close the window(s) and return to the "Main page" 3

family.
1-011735-02-02.svg
1-011748-01-02.svg
C 5
1-011749-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Powering up machine protection UPS cabinet BCU-048 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Make sure that no work is in progress on the electrical

circuits of the machine before turning on the power.
There may be dangerous battery voltages present

even when the equipment is disconnected from the
1-011678-01-xx.svg
operating power.
MACHINE STATUS
- customer electrical power network present,
- all machine power and utilities turned off.
PROCEDURE
1- Position the isolating switch (F) in the "On" position.

The isolating switch (F) is closed.
Lights (A ; E) are off. A B
2- Powering up machine upline circuit, see
procedure "BCU-001.
Lights (A ; E) come on.
F C
The UPS 230V is now under power.
E D
1-011672-02-xx.svg
3- Position the isolating switch (C) in the "On" position.

The isolating switch (C) is closed. A B
Lights (B ; D) are off.
4- Turning on the main machine power circuit, see
procedure "BCU-002.
F C
Lights (B ; D) come on.
The UPS 400V is now under power.
The machine protection UPS cabinet is powered.
The machine is protected should there be an electrical
power network failure.
E D
1-011677-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-048 Powering up machine protection UPS cabinet 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog /
2 Switching off the machine protection UPS cabinet BCU-049 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Make sure that no work is in progress on the electrical

circuits of the machine before turning on the power.
There may be dangerous battery voltages present

even when the equipment is disconnected from the
1-011678-01-xx.svg
operating power.
MACHINE STATUS
- machine energized,
PROCEDURE
1- Turning off the main machine circuit, see

procedure "BCU-011. A B
2- Position the isolating switch (C) in the "Off" position.
The circuit breaker (C) is open.
The lamps (B ; D) go out.
F C
The UPS 400V switches off.
E D
1-011677-02-xx.svg
3- Swtiching off the machine up-line circuit, see

procedure "BCU-012.
A B
4- Position the isolating switch (F) in the "Off" position.
The circuit breaker (F) is open.
The lamps (A ; E) go out.
The UPS 230V switches off.
F C
The power to the UPS cabinet is switched off.
E D
1-011672-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BCU-049 Switching off the machine protection UPS cabinet 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
User procedure
Production process procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting points "P0" and "P10" ................................................................................................................... BPU-001
Setting the blowing pressure ..................................................................................................................... BPU-002
Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder ........................................................................................ BPU-003
Output rate setpoint .................................................................................................................................. BPU-004
Recipe management ................................................................................................................................. BPU-005
Solenoid valve test .................................................................................................................................... BPU-006
Oven test ................................................................................................................................................... BPU-007
Preform feeder test ................................................................................................................................... BPU-008
Setting the parameters of the process ...................................................................................................... BPU-009
Carrying out a trial on a new production process ...................................................................................... BPU-010
Setting the preblowing pressure ............................................................................................................... BPU-012
Checking the preblow flow setting ............................................................................................................ BPU-013
Checking the feeder preform count ........................................................................................................... BPU-014
Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors ...................................................................... BPU-015
Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints ....................................................................................... BPU-017
Initializing the preform feeder production start .......................................................................................... BPU-027
27/05/2013 B - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
B - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure Part B
3 Setting points "P0" and "P10" BPU-001 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
In order to set points "P0" and "P10" the lower

stretching thrusts must first be set, see
procedure "BRM-009.
This procedure requires the presence of 2

technicians:
- The first technician rotates the machine using the
manual rotation system,
- the first technician activates and disactivates the
controls at the PCC, 1-006030-33-xx.svg
- the second technician check the position of the

roller (1) on the stretching cam (2).
MACHINE STATUS 1
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
2
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- certified standard preforms for the type of production
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part B Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure
2/4 BPU-001 Setting points "P0" and "P10" 3
Setting point "P0"

1- Set the pressure of the low pressure supply to 3 3
bar, see procedure "BCU-018.
machine.
3- Insert a preform into the grip corresponding to the
selected mold.
4- Bring the roller (1) forward onto the horizontal part of
the stretching cam (2) using the manual rotation
system, see procedure "BCU-014.
1-007565-04-02.svg

The (B) window appears. A
9- Enter the number of the mold using the keys (6).
The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is
now active.
The stretching cylinder is forced downwards.
12- Bring the roller (1) gently along the stretching cam (2)
using the manual rotation system, see
1-007570-02-02.svg
procedure "BCU-014.
13- As soon as the roller (1) is no longer in contact with the
stretching cam (2) stop rotating the machine. 6 B
The stretching rod has now reached the bottom of the
preform, this is point "P0".
Point "P0" is set.
The stretching cylinder stops at the up-position.
Setting point "P10" 8 7 9 10

16- Bring the roller (1) forward onto the horizontal part of
the stretching cam (2) using the manual rotation 1-007574-02-02.svg

The preform will be ejected at the bottle transfer.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting points "P0" and "P10" BPU-001 3/4

The stretching cylinder is forced downwards. 2
18- Bring the roller (1) gently along the stretching cam (2)
1
procedure "BCU-014.
19- As soon as the roller (1) is no longer in contact with the
stretching cam (2) stop rotating the machine.
Point "P10" is reached when the stretching slide is in
lower limit stop.
1-006514-01-xx.svg

Point "P10" is set.
now cut off.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
23- Set the pressure of the low pressure supply to 7

bar, see procedure "BCU-018.
P0
P10
1-006510-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BPU-001 Setting points "P0" and "P10" 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the blowing pressure BPU-002 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The synoptic may differ depending on the machine

model and its configuration but the setting procedure
is always the same.
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE

The "Wheel" family appears. 1-006030-14-xx.svg
If necessary, press on button (2) to display the air

synoptic (A).
3- Enter the required pressure and confirm.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

family.
1 3 2 A
1-010356-03-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-002 Setting the blowing pressure 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder BPU-003 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The auto-adapt system adjusts the speed of the

elevator column located immediately upstream from
the unscrambler rollers in order to achieve a
continuous flow of preforms along the infeed rail and
therefore not disrupting production.
The auto-adapt function can be started when creating

a new production set up, modifying the the output rate
of the blowing machine or at any time during
production.
The procedure is carried out only in "Automatic" 1-006030-14-xx.svg
mode, from the "Feeder" family.
The parameters determined by the auto-adaptation

process are recorded in the production recipe if the
operator saves the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.

MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
Before starting the auto-adapt cycle:

- enter the preform feeder start-up setpoints, see
procedure "BPU-017,
- load the appropriate recipe into the
application, see procedure "BPU-005,
- enter the production rate setpoint, see
procedure "BPU-004.
The key (1) is characterised by a symbol "-" or "+"

2 1
depending on whether the low or high speed has
been selected.
1-008464-11-02.svg
1- Select the low speed for the elevator column, using the
key(s) (1).
The blowing machine start cycle can be carried out in
Automatic or Manual mode. If the blowing machine
productoin set-up has not been defined in the PCC
application, start the machine in forced loading with
preform ejection activated.
The procedure below is described in Manual mode for

the blowing machine.
2- Start the blowing machine and the preform feeder, see
procedure "BCU-015.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-003 Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder 3
The start percentage for the elevator column (3) 4

A
corresponds to its speed at the start of the auto-adapt
cycle.
4- Enter a start-up setpoint for the elevator column (3) of
60 %.
B
The preform feeder speed auto-adaptation cycle may 1-007549-04-02.svg
take several minutes.
The auto-adapt cycle stops when the feeder has

operated over a time pre-defined by the plc and at a
sufficient level of preforms in the stabilization rail with
the blowing machine stop pin open.
6- Press the appropriate key to confirm the start of the
auto-adaptation cycle.
The key (4) flashes during the auto-adapt phase.
The preform feeder is operating.
7- Authorize preform loading into the blowing machine
using the key (5). 6 5
The reference speed calculated is shown in the
window (B).
F Check that the reference value calculated is below 90 1-006704-14-xx.svg
%.
- If yes.
- If not.
· Stop the preform loading using the key (5).
· Stop the preform feeder using the key (6).
· Select high speed for the elevator column(s)
using the key(s) (1).
· Repeat as above from step 4.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

9- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-015.
10- Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Output rate setpoint BPU-004 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Caution: modifying the "Output rate" will automatically

generate a recalculation of the production timings by
the plc. The quality of the production may be altered.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 3
- PCC application set to the "Main page" family.
PROCEDURE

2- Enter the setpoint.
The setpoint has now been modifed.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
F Check the output rate value (3).
1-006403-16-02.svg
A
1-006398-03-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-004 Output rate setpoint 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Recipe management BPU-005 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE

The "Recipe" family appears.
Drive selection
2- Press the key (2) corresponding to the source drive you
require.
The key changes status.
The recipes present on the drive will be displayed in the 1-006030-14-xx.svg
recipe list (A).

Load a recipe into the machine
3- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (A).
The key (3) is no longer masked. 1 12 11 3 A
The recipe is now loaded into the machine.
Deleting a recipe or recipes
5- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A).
7- Press the key corresponding to the required operation.
Printing a recipe or recipes
The entire content of a recipe will be printed by

default.
14 9 8 13 4 5 2
1-007760-02-02.svg

The (B) window appears. B 7
10- Press the key (6) to activate or disactivate the print out
of the page(s).
11- Turn the recipe pages using the keys in zone (C).
The window (B) disappears from the screen.
13- Repeat as above, from step 8, to configurate the
printouts for the other recipes.
14- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A).
The recipes selected from the recipe list (A) will print
out.
Copying a recipe or recipes
16- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A). C 6 C
1-010421-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-005 Recipe management 3
The recipes will be copied to the selected drive.
Saving a recipe
Saving a new recipe
20- Enter the name of the new recipe using the keyboard.
The new recipe is created and saved. D
Saving an existing recipe
The new recipe overwrites the existing recipe in the list
(A).
1-010410-01-02.svg
Recovering a deleted recipe
The (E) window appears.
23- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (F).
The key (15) is no longer masked.
The recipe is reloaded into the list of recipes (A).
The window (E) disappears from the screen.
Exporting a recipe
The recipe is exported to the selected reader. E 15 F 16
Importing a recipe 1-007602-02-02.svg
29- Press the key (2) corresponding to the source drive you
require.
The key changes status.
The recipes present on the drive will be displayed in the
recipe list (A).

The recipe is now loaded into the machine.
Clearing deleted recipes
The (E) window appears.
The recipe has been deleted.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

family.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Solenoid valve test BPU-006 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never attempt any work on the machine during a

"Fixed or mobile solenoid valve test":
- doors open, the machine is energised (water,
electricity, air etc.).

chapter ""Settings" family", in the User manual.
The test windows in the "Settings" family are only

accessible if all of the machine safety doors are
1-006030-14-xx.svg
closed.
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
Blowing test
1- Position the blowing station to be tested at the rear of
the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
The blowing station to be tested will be in the
machine’s white zone (B).
3- Enter the number of the blowing station using the keys
(2).
The number of the blowing station selected appears in
the zone (C). 1 10
1-006057-14-02.svg
now active.
The high pressure air supply to the blowing station is 7 9 A
now on.
6 8
Activating the preblow and blow solenoid valves will
15
cause a lot of noise if the mold is empty. You can
place a small metal plate (make sure that it is clean 14
and smooth) on the mold for the nozzle to rest 5 B
on. This will reduce the noise when testing the valves 3
on an empty mold.
Briefly activate the preblow and blow solenoids C 4

causing the noise.
The nozzle tip drops down. 2
1-007621-07-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-006 Solenoid valve test 3
The lamps (13) will light up when the corresponding 13

solenoid is active.
The blowing station is now at preblowing pressure.
The blowing station is no longer at preblow pressure.
The blowing station is at blowing pressure.
The blowing station is no longer at blowing pressure.
11- Press the (8) key, (option).
The blowing air is recoverd in the recovery circuit.
The recovery solenoid is deactivated.
The blowing air is cleared through the exhaust .
1-006409-01-xx.svg
The exhaust solenoid is disactivated.
The blowing station is at compensation pressure.
The blowing station is no longer at compensation
pressure.
If all of the solenoids are not disactivated, press key
"Oui" on the window that appears.
Testing the solenoids on the fixed section
D
The (D) window appears. 12
The machine is now supplied with low pressure air.
20- Test the solenoids one after the other by pressing the E
corresponding keys in the zone (E).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

If all of the solenoids are not disactivated, press key

"Oui" on the window that appears.
The window (D) disappears from the screen. 1-007759-08-16.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Oven test BPU-007 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The "Oven test" window allows you to check the oven

lamps.


closed.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001 ,
PROCEDURE

2- Select the half of the oven to be tested using key (2).
The key (2) indicates the half of the oven selected.
3- Select the zone to be activated using the keys (3).
5- Enter the heating percentage for the zone to be tested.
It is possible to check the ventilation system by
modifying the setpoint using the key (5). The minimum 1
default value is 30 %.
1-010353-06-02.svg

The heating zone selected lights up (Yellow). A
7
7- Select the next test zone using the keys (3).
The zone changes to yellow. 3
8- If necessary, modify the heating percentage in the zone
using the key (4).

9- Repeat as above from steps 3 until you have tested all
of the oven zones. 2 4
The heating zone selected goes out.
6 5
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-006421-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-007 Oven test 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Preform feeder test BPU-008 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

closed.
The "Feeder test" window (A) allows the user to

activate the controls for the various components of the
preform feeder separately in order to test and adjust
each of them.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
Opening any of the safety doors will stop the

operation of the elements selected in the "Feeder
test" window (A).

The minimum default value for the preform feeder

speed setpoints is 30%.

MACHINE STATUS
- PCC application in "Manual" mode,
1
PROCEDURE
1-010353-07-02.svg
The low pressure air supply to the preform feeder is
now active.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BPU-008 Preform feeder test 3
Unscrambler roller operating test

3- Press the (3) key. B A 14
4- Key in the value of the rotation order for the
unscrambler rollers, then confirm.
5- Press the button (4) and release.
The unscrambler rollers are selected. 2
Selected elements will only start if the "Preform

elevator start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar
PCC is activated. 8
3 11 13 12 10
1-010351-03-02.svg

The unscrambler rollers are in operation. 5
The buttons (6 ; 7) located on the unscrambler roller

unit frame have the same function ast the "Preform
elevator start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar of
the PCC. The keys (6 ; 7) allow the user to start and
1-006704-02-xx.svg
stop the various components of the unscrambler
rollers selected in the "Feeder test" window in order to
observe their performance in contact with the
preforms.
F Check the performance of the various components.
The unscrambler rollers are stopped.
Elevator column operation test 7 6
9- Enter the elevator motor setpoint.
PCC is activated.

The conveyor belt on the elevator is now in operation.
1-006375-07-xx.svg
The conveyor belt on the elevator column is stopped.
Performance test on the elevator column of the mini-hopper
(option according to model)
13- Enter the setpoint instruction for the mini-hopper motor.
PCC is activated.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Preform feeder test BPU-008 3/4
The mini-hopper (option) elevator belt is now

operational.
The mini-hopper (option) elevator belt is now stopped.
Hopper conveyor belt operating test
17- Enter the setpoint for the hopper motor.
PCC is activated.
The hopper belt is functioning.
The hopper belt is now stopped.
Other operating tests

PCC is activated.
20- Test the functions one after the other by pressing the
corresponding key in the zone (B), please refer to
chapter The "Feeder test" window in the "Settings"
window in the User manual.
21- Test the UV lamps on the feeder rail, see
procedure "BPU-036,
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The selected elements are stopped.
- If all of the functions are not deactivated a
confirmation window appears.
· Press the key corresponding to the required
operation.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BPU-008 Preform feeder test 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the parameters of the process BPU-009 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE

1-006030-14-xx.svg
3- Activate "Manual" mode using button (3).

Manual mode active. 1 2
4- Select the type of production in Zone (B).

5- Enter the article’s capacity (4).
The parameters (5) may then be refined.
These parameters may be refined in order to improve
regulation performance.
As a general rule, these parameters can be set to
obtain:
- a preblow start up with a minimum of 0/10 and a
maximum of +1/10 relative to the baseline
process,
- and a pressure with a minimum limit of -2 bar and
a maximum of +2 bars relative to the baseline
process.
6- Enter a weight setpoint (6) for the article bases.
7- Enter a weight setpoint tolerance (7) for the article
bases of +/-0.10 g.
1-007565-09-02.svg
The tolerance must be less than the article

specifications. A
5
8- Enter a correction (8) coefficient for individual regulation
of +0,8. B
9- Enter a correctio coefficient (9) for overall regulation of 4
-0,3.
7
These parameters should subsequently be refined in
13
order to adapt the regulation performance to the type 9
of article. 6 3
10- Enter a correction frequency (10) for production start up
8 12
of 10.
11- Enter a correction frequency for individual regulation 10 11
(11).
12- Enter a correction frequency for overall regulation (12). 1-007576-02-02.svg
The correction frequencies for individual and overall

regulation must all be the same and be greater than
the production start up correction frequency.
These parameters may be refined in order to improve

regulation performance.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-009 Setting the parameters of the process 3
13- Enter the top of the weight measurement (13) for the
article bases.
This value is a reminder and is not part of the
regulation calculation.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
14- Activate "Automatic" mode using button (3).

"Automatic" mode selected.
family.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Carrying out a trial on a new production process BPU-010 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure is not intended to train users in the

creation of a production set-up, it is designed to allow
technicians to set the machine up for the production of
a single item. This article may well serve for the initial
mechanical settings of the machine.
To be able to use this procedure you will need to be

highly familiar with the User manual and in particular
with the "Methodology for production set-up" chapter.
For all developments and additional training, please

contact SIDEL. 1-006030-53-xx.svg
This list of preliminary checks is intended for the initial

machine start-up.
To carry out this procedure you will require the

Service Procedure Catalogue.
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- protective gloves (thermal),
- box cutter.
PROCEDURE
Preliminary checks
1- Check the user profiles, see procedure "BCU-021.
2- Make sure that the options required for the production
set-up have been activated, please refer to chapter

""Options" family" in the User manual.
3- Check the machine parameter settings and
PCC, please refer to chapter ""Options" family " in the
User manual.
4- Make sure that the custom parts corresponding to the
preforms and items being produced are fitted on the
machine, please refer to chapter "Production item
changes" in the User manual.
5- Check the alarm configuration, see
procedure "BCU-022.
6- Checking the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.
7- Check the preblow flow limiter settings, see
procedure "BPU-013.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BPU-010 Carrying out a trial on a new production process 3
8- Check the alarm levels for the fluid temperatures and

flows, please refer to chapter ""Wheel" family" in the
User manual.
9- Check the settings of the inductive and photo-electric
sensors, see procedure "BRE-001.
10- Solenoid valve tests, see procedure "BPU-006.
11- Heating tests, see procedure "BPU-007.
12- Enter the production output rate, see
procedure "BPU-004.
14- Set the preform feeder, see procedure "BPU-027.
Preliminary settings
Blow wheel
16- Set points "0" and "10", see procedure "BPU-001.
Oven
17- Set the number of lamps required to heat the preforms
according to their height.
18- Set the position of the lamps for all of the oven heating
modules, see procedure "BPU-011.
19- Set the interior and exterior cooling shields, see
procedure "BRM-010.
20- Set the focal point of the infrared camera(s), see
procedure "BRE-003.
21- Set the positions of the oven cooling dampers to the
middle position.
22- If the "black bars" option is present, set them outside
the heating zone for this first approach.
Setting up the production process

chapter "Setting up the machine for production", in the
User manual.
Preblowing configuration
23- Set the preblow pressure to 8 bar, see
procedure "BPU-012. 1
The start of preblowing is expressed in tenths of the
stretching phase, with zero being the start of active

stretching.
24- Position the cursor (1) at "1/10" to set the start of
preblowing to point "0" + 1/10.
Blowing configuration
25- Set the blow pressure to 30 bar, see
procedure "BPU-002. 1-007570-03-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

The end of preblowing at point "10" is active.
- For items whose volume is less than 0,5 L,
exhaust time is set at 0,2 s.
- For items whose volume is less than 1,5 L,
- For items whose volume is greater than 1,5 L,
27- Key in a value for the exhaust time (3). 3
Heating setpoints
28- Balance the number of penetration and distribution
2
ovens using the keys (4).
29- Activation of lamps necessary on 40 % penetration
oven modules.
1-010341-02-02.svg
30- Activate the required lamps on 50 % distribution oven
modules.
31- Enter 100 % as a setpoint value for zone 1(A).
32- Enter a value of between 80 and 100 % for the other
zones (B). C 4 B A 4
To achieve better penetration, the "overall heating %"

values should be between 80 and 100 %.
Oven configuration
33- Enter a "Go to standby" setpoint (5) of 40 %.
34- Enter a "Loading temperature" setpoint (6) of 120 °C.
Lower the "Loading temperature" setpoint if the time
taken to reach this level is too long.
35- Enter a "Cooling" setpoint (7) of 70 %.
37- Activate "Manual" mode using button (13).
6 5 7 8 12 11
1-010338-03-02.svg
If the "Preform neck" and "Preform base" options are

validated, repeat the previous steps, from step 36 for
the windows "Preform neck temperature" (12) and
"Preform base temperature" (11).
Production set-up trials (in "Manual" mode)
Warning - risk of burns
Wear heat protection gloves.
38- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-015. 13

F Wait for the oven to reach the loading temperature.
1-007559-02-02.svg
39- Send around ten preforms through the oven and eject
them at the oven outfeed.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
The preforms should be completely supple, even the

domes.
F Check the general temperature of the preforms by
holding them. E
- If the preforms are supple and not crystallized (E).
· Go to step 41.
- If the preforms are almost supple.
· Increase the overall heating percentage 10 %.
- If the preforms are hard.
· Increase the number of lamps in operation on
the hard areas.
- If the preforms are completely crystallized.
· Reduce the number of lamps.
- If the preforms are partially crystallized (D). D
· Reduce the overall heating percentage by 10
%. 1-006855-01-xx.svg
40- Repeat the previous steps, from step 39, until the
required result is obtained.
41- Test the preblowing on 1 wheel rotation and eject the
blown items at the bottle outfeed.
F Check the general appearance of the preblown balloon.
- If the preblown balloon is too small (F).
· Increase the preblow pressure by 2 bar and if
the phenomenon continues bring the start of
preblowing forward.
- If the preblown balloon is satisfactory (G).
· Go to step 43.
- If the preblown balloon is to big (H).
· Reduce preblowing pressure.
42- Repeat the previous steps, from step 41, until the
required result is obtained. F
43- Test the blowing on 1 wheel rotation and eject the
blown items at the bottle transfer.
F Check the shape of the bottles (I).
44- If necessary, adjust the various parts of the bottle
outfeed (gaps, height and synchronization).
Refining the production set-up
45- Note the positions of the heating zones on a preform
using a box cutter or a permanent marker.
The marked preform will serve as template.
1-006856-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
F Check the temperature of the various preform sections

with regard to the heating zones using the template. G
· If necessary, adjust the heating profile by modifying
the heating percentages and the number of lamps
active.
46- Note the position of the heating zones on the preforms
using a box cutter or a permanent marker.
47- Test the blowing process on 1 wheel rotation.
F Make sure that the plastic material has been evenly
distributed between the shoulder and the base of the
bottle.
- If the material is not evenly distributed.
· Correct the preblow pressure.
1-006857-01-xx.svg
F Use marked articles to check the distribution of the
material with regard to the heating zones.
· If necessary, correct the heating profile.
48- Send in a number of preforms corresponding to half of
the oven’s full capacity. H
49- Raise the ambient oven temperature.
50- Refine the "Loading temperature" setpoint.
51- Note the temperature of the preforms at the oven
outfeed.
52- Refine the "Preform temperature" setpoint.
53- Note the output percentage value.
54- Refine the "Production start-up" setpoint.
F Make sure that the blown bottles conform to the
production specifications.
· If they do not conform, start over the adjustments.
1-006858-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

I
chapter "Setting up the machine for production", in the
User manual.
F Check the stability of the set-up in production.
1-006859-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the preblowing pressure BPU-012 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE

BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-006030-14-xx.svg
3- Enter the required pressure and confirm.
1 2
1-007565-06-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-012 Setting the preblowing pressure 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the preblow flow setting BPU-013 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
PROCEDURE
1-006030-01-xx.svg
The value 150 is a default value. The value may be

changed when the final process set-up is effected.

procedure "BCU-013.
F Check that the display (1) reads 150. 1
- If yes.
· Go to step 2.
- If not 3
· Continue with the procedure.
3- Loosen the bolt (2).
4- Set the display (1) to 150 using the knob (3). 2
5- Tighten the bolt (2).
6- Repeat stages 2 to 5 until the preblow flow has been set
on all of the blowing stations. 1-010704-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-013 Checking the preblow flow setting 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

9- If necessary, press on button (5) to display the air
synoptic (A).
11- Enter the value "150".
The preblow flow entered at the PCC is an indicator
which has no incidence on the actual preblow flow
setting.
4 5 A 6
1-010355-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Checking the feeder preform count BPU-014 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Sensor
D3 Unscrambler roller exit B102.0
Unscrambler roller anticipated start
D4 B103.3
sensor 3
D5 Upper count cell B105.0
1 Detection of preforms at top of rail B10.5 2
2 Detection of preforms at bottom of rail B10.6
3 Detection of preforms at machine infeed B32.1 1
D4
The sensor cells (D3 ; D4 ; D5 ; 1 ; 2 ; 3) must be first D5 D3
adjusted and set according to the production to be
done, see procedure "BRE-002, see 1-006030-122-xx.svg
procedure "BRE-014, see procedure "BRE-015, see
procedure "BPU-015.
Updating the infeed rail missing preform count (A)

may take several seconds.
The screen display(s) may differ depending on the 4 A

model and the configuration of the machine.
MACHINE STATUS
- unscrambler roller assembly clear of preforms,
- infeed rail clear of preforms.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
1-008464-12-02.svg
being carried out.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BPU-014 Checking the feeder preform count 3

machine.
Initializing the missing preform counter
Masks can be made out of pieces of cardboard affixed

with adhesive tape.
3- Place a mask on the sensors (D3 ; D4 ; 1 ; 2).
F Wait for 1 minute(s).
F Check that the missing preform counter (A) on the
infeed rail is at "0".
4- Remove the mask from the sensors (D3 ; D4).
Checking the feeder preform count
Checking the count manually
5- Pass your hand 3 time in front of the (3) cell.
6- Pass your hand 1 time in front of the (D5) cell.
- If yes.
- If not.
· Start the sensor adjustments and settings
again, see procedure "BRE-002, see
procedure "BPU-015.
· Repeat as above from step 3 until the missing
preform count is correct.
Checking the sensor (D5)
F Check the operation of the sensor (D5), see
procedure "BRE-015.
Checking the count under production conditions
7- " and ", see above.
The procedure is carried out only in "Automatic"
mode, from the "Feeder" family.
8- Pass your hand 11 time in front of the (3) cell.
9- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers .

preform ejection activated.
- If yes.
- If not.
· Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or
see procedure "BCU015.
· Start the sensor adjustments and settings
again, see procedure "BRE-002, see
procedure "BRE-015, see procedure "BPU-015.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Checking the feeder preform count BPU-014 3/4
· Repeat as above from step 3 until the missing

preform count is correct.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BCU015.
12- Remove the preforms.
13- Remove the mask from the sensors (1 ; 2).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BPU-014 Checking the feeder preform count 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors BPU-015 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The values below are recommended for testing a new

production set-up. These values can be refined after
studying the performance of the preforms in
production.
1-006030-14-xx.svg
The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on 1 2

MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
PROCEDURE

Setting the parameters for the unscrambler roller sensor
cells 1-008464-10-02.svg
3- Set the parameters of the leading edge of the cell "D1"
of the unscrambler rollers to 2 s using the button (3).
4- Set the parameters of the leading edge of the cell "D2"
of the unscrambler rollers to 1 s using the button (4)
(option according to model).
5- Set the leading edges on cells "D3 ; D4 " for the

unscrambler rollers at 0,5 s using the keys (5).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-015 Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors 3
Setting the parameters for the hopper sensor cells

(depending on the machine configuration) A 3 7 8 6
6- Set the leading and trailing edges for the hopper cells at
3 s using the keys (6).
7- Set the the leading and trailing edges of the sensor at
the outlet chute to 3 s using the keys (7).
8- Set the leading and the trailing edges for the blockage
sensor on the elevator column to 1 s using the keys (8).
Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper (depending on
the machine configuration)
9- Set the leading edges for the sensors on the mini-
hopper to 3 s using the keys (9).
10- Set the trailing edges for the sensors on the mini- 4 5 11 12 10 9
hopper to 1 s using the keys (10).
11- Set the leading edge for the blockage sensor on the 1-007555-03-02.svg
elevator column to 2 s using the key (11).

12- Set the trailing edge for the blockage sensor on the
elevator column to 1 s using the key (12).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

14- Start an auto-adapt cycle, see procedure "BPU-003.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints BPU-017 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION
You search for a start up setpoint when testing a new

production set-up or when the current production set-
up is not satisfactory.
Setpoints can be searched in the Feeder family in

either Automatic and Manual mode. Searching for
setpoints in Manual mode requires in-depth
knowledge of the articles being produced.
Depending on the machine configuration, only one of

the two screens (A ; B) is visible in the application 1-006030-14-xx.svg
PCC. For this procedure, only consider the setpoints

visible on the screens (A) or (B).
Designations and functions for the relevant sensor cells
D4 D3 D2 D1
Unscrambler rollers and elevator column
D1 B102.1
stoppage
Unscrambler roller regulation sensor
D2 B126.0
D4 B103.3
sensor
1-010560-01-xx.svg
The aim of this procedure is to determine the 1 3 11 2

A
setpoints (3 ; 4 ; 5) and the setpoint (6) (if it is present)
to obtain the appropriate level and the flow of
preforms in the unscrambler roller assembly and the
infeed rail. the rapid improvement in th level and flow
of preforms in the feeder is principally obtained by
modifying:
- the start setpoint for the elevator column (5)
according to the quantity of preforms dropped into
the unscrambler rollers,
- hopper belt setpoint (3) according to the quantity of

preforms supplying the hopper outlet chute,
- for the configuration (B), the "Small hopper supply"
(6) setpoint (motors for the elevator column/
intermediate conveyor assembly according to the
quantity of preforms tipped into the mini-hopper.
D F 5 E 4 10 9
1-010420-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BPU-017 Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints 3
Initial values for the start setpoints

B 1 6 3 11 2
The values on the table are the base values. These
values are present in the PCC application during the
first start-up. These values are replaced when the
recipe is loaded.
Element Reference Start setpoint

Hopper belt (3) 50 %
80 %
Orienting roller (Steel)
(fixed value)
(4)
Orienting 60 %
roller (Aluminium) (fixed value)
Elevator column (5) 60 %
Elevator column* (6) 30 %
* for the configuration (B)
If there is a production process set-up and a rate

close to the new production, it is possible to recover
the values of the setpoints for the corresponding D F 5 E 4 10 9
recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.
Initial values for the speed increase and decrease 1-008848-07-02.svg
percentages
Elevator column Orienting roller

Setpoint instructions
Window (B) Window (C)
With presence at D2 10 % 10 %*
With presence at D3 10 % 10 %
By missing preforms 1% None
With non-presence at D4 15 %* 15 %*
* Accessible only in Manual mode
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- Grade 00 abrasive paper.
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

C
7
The characteristics of the preforms entered into the
application PCC influence the operation of the
preform feeder :
- If the value entered (7) for the interior diameter of 8
the preform is greater than 38 mm, the speed
setpoint for the elevator column (5) is automatically
limited to 81 %,
- If the value entered (8) for the total preform length
is less than 100 mm, the speed setpoint for the
elevator column (5) is automatically limited to 85
%. 1-008844-03-02.svg
3- Enter the characteristics of the preforms for the
production to be carried out.
4- Close the window (C).
The preform characteristics for the production are
saved.
Monitoring the preform flow time on the unscrambler rollers
This procedure is made easier with the assistance of

a second technician.
machine.
6- Make 2 marks 2 m apart on the unscrambler rollers
using a marker pen.
7- Position a preform in front of the second mark.
Enter the unscrambler roller rotation setpoint (see the
table above) in the "Feeder Test" window , see
procedure "BPU-008.
9- Start the unscrambler rollers , see
procedure "BPU-008.
The speed of the preform flow on the unscrambler
rollers is around 2 m in 3 s.
F Check the preform flow time between the 2 marks.

- If the flow time is not correct.
· Stop the rollers , see procedure "BPU-008.
· Check the gap between the rollers , see
procedure "BRM-013.
· Clean the unscrambler rollers using grade 00
abrasive paper.
- If the flow time is incorrect.
10- Stop the rollers , see procedure "BPU-008.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Search the setpoints in the Automatic mode

11- Activate "Automatic" mode using button (9). A 1 3 11 2
The setpoint value (5) must be entered into the auto-

adapt window, see procedure "BPU-003.
12- Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform feeder, see
the table above.
13- Enter the the speed increase and decrease percentage
in the windows (D ; E), see the table above.
been selected.
key(s) (10).
15- Start an auto-adapt cycle, see procedure "BPU-003.
F Check that the level and the flow of the preforms in the
preform feeder is appropriate.
16- If necessary, refine the speed increase and decrease
percentages in the windows (D ; E). D F 5 E 4 10 9
Search the setpoints in Manual mode
17- Activate "Manual" mode using button (9). 1-010420-01-02.svg
18- Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform feeder, see
the table above.
19- Enter the the speed increase and decrease percentage
in the windows (D ; E), see the table above.
been selected.
key(s) (10).
preform ejection activated. © SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
The procedure below is described in Manual mode for 1 6 3 11 2

B
the blowing machine.
A satisfactory flow of preforms in the feeder is
characterized by a fluctuation in the level of preforms
around the "D3" cell without that extending to the "D4"
and "D1" cells.
F Check that the unscrambler rollers and the upstream
components are sufficiently supplied with preforms.
In the configuration (B), the setpoint (6) represents the
speed percentage for the elevator column and remote
hopper (option)/intermediate conveyor assembly.
F Observe the level and the flow of preforms using the
indicators (11) on the sensors "D4 ; D3 ; D1" as well as
the levels measured at the elevator column (F).
- If no sensor cells are occulted and if the speed
measured (F) is above the setpoint (5).
Lack of preforms in the unscrambler rollers .
· Increase the setpoint (5). D F 5 E 4 10 9
· If necessary, increase the setpoints (3) and (6)
(if present). 1-008848-07-02.svg
- If the sensor cell "D1" is often occulted and causes
frequent preform feeder stoppages .
Too many preforms in the unscrambler rollers .
· Reduce the setpoint (5).
· If necessary, reduce the setpoints (3) and (6) (if
present).
F Check that the reference value calculated is below 90
%. 13 12
- If yes.
- If not.
· Stop the preform loading using the key (12).
· Stop the preform feeder using the key (13). 1-006704-13-xx.svg
· Select high speed for the elevator column(s)

using the key(s) (10).
· Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform
feeder, see the table above.

22- Continue adjusting the setpoints until you obtain a
satisfactory level and flow of preforms in the feeder.
23- If necessary, refine the speed increase and decrease
percentages in the windows (D ; E).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BCU-015.
The speed setpoints, obtained with this procedure can
be transfered into the other operating mode
(automatic or manual)for the feeder, before saving the
recipe.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Initializing the preform feeder production start BPU-027 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure is designed to provide instructions for

all of the operations required for preparing the feeder
before starting production.
For all developments and additional training, please

contact SIDEL.
To carry out this procedure you will require the

Service Procedure Catalogue.
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-123-xx.svg
- hopper cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
Preliminary settings
1- Set the unscrambler rollers, see procedure "BRM-013.
2- Set the stabilization rail assembly, see
procedure "BRM-017.
3- Set the unscrambler, see procedure "BRM-016.
4- Set the infeed rail , see procedure "BRM-011.

5- Check the tensions on the conveyor belts, see
procedure "BRM-015.
6- Set the infeed rail sensor cells, see
procedure "BRE-014.
7- Set the stabilization rail sensor cells, see
procedure "BRE-015.
8- Set the unscrambler rollers sensor cells, see
procedure "BRE-016.
9- Set the sensor cells on the mini-hopper, see
procedure "BRE-017.
10- Set the sensors cells on the hopper, see
procedure "BRE-018.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BPU-027 Initializing the preform feeder production start 3
11- Set the time-delays on the prefrom feeder sensors, see

procedure "BPU-015.
12- Adjust the detection system at the machine infeed, see
procedure "BRE-002.
13- Check the count function on the preform feeder, see
procedure "BPU-014.
14- Feeder tests, see procedure "BPU-008.
Setting up the production process
15- Load the preforms for production into the hopper.
16- Search the start setpoints for the preform feeder, see
procedure "BPU-017.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Part C

Part C
PROCEDURE
Part D
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSPECTING / CLEANING PROCEDURE BNM
Inspecting the torque limiters ................................................................................................................... BNM-002
Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors ......................................................................................................... BNM-003
Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices ............................................................................ BNM-004
Checking the misload safety device ......................................................................................................... BNM-005
Checking the machine levels .................................................................................................................... BNM-006
Cleaning the toothing on the drive wheels ............................................................................................... BNM-007
Cleaning the molds prior to storage ......................................................................................................... BNM-008
Inspection/cleaning - braking systems ..................................................................................................... BNM-009
Visual inspection of the reducer motor ..................................................................................................... BNM-011
Checking general synchronization ........................................................................................................... BNM-012
Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder ......................................................................................................... BNM-013
Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels ........................................................................................... BNM-014
Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam ................................................................................. BNM-015
Cleaning the extractor hood and the aspirator filters ................................................................................ BNM-018
Basic cleaning of self-lubricated parts ...................................................................................................... BNM-019
Inspection/cleaning - grease distributors .................................................................................................. BNM-020
Degreasing the self-lubricated parts ........................................................................................................ BNM-021
Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles ........................................................................................................... BNM-045
Checking the tension on the timing belt ................................................................................................... BNM-048
Taking water samples from the machine supply circuits .......................................................................... BNM-049
Analysing water samples from machine supply circuits ........................................................................... BNM-050
Cleaning the chemical analysis equipment .............................................................................................. BNM-051
Inspection/cleaning - lamp cap protective covers ..................................................................................... BNM-055
Checking the on-board air circuit filters .................................................................................................... BNM-059

Cleaning the molds on the machine ......................................................................................................... BNM-064
Inspecting a stand-alone automatic greaser ............................................................................................ BNM-074
REMOVAL/REFIT PROCEDURE BDM

Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber ..................................................................................... BDM-001
Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" .............................................................................. BDM-002
Removal/refit: transfer arms ..................................................................................................................... BDM-003
Draining the mold and oven hydraulic circuits .......................................................................................... BDM-004
Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters .............................................................................................. BDM-005
Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters ........................................................................................... BDM-006
Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters ........................................................................................................ BDM-007
Removal/refit: nozzle seals. .................................................................................................................... BDM-008
Removal/refit: spindle chain links ............................................................................................................. BDM-010
27/05/2013 C - 1/4
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents
Removal/refit: molds and mold bases ...................................................................................................... BDM-011

Removal/refit: spindle tips ........................................................................................................................ BDM-012
Removal/refit: spindle sprockets .............................................................................................................. BDM-013
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder ............................................................................................................. BDM-014
Removal/refit - mold compensation seal .................................................................................................. BDM-016
Removal/refit: shock absorber and lower stretching thrust ...................................................................... BDM-017
Removal/refit: upstream feed unit ............................................................................................................ BDM-018
Removal/refit: downstream feed unit ........................................................................................................ BDM-019
Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable .................................................................................................... BDM-020
Removal/refit: infeed guide ....................................................................................................................... BDM-021
Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide ..................................................................................................... BDM-022
Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable .............................................................................................. BDM-023
Removal/refit: transfer grips ..................................................................................................................... BDM-024
Removal/refit: nozzle tip ........................................................................................................................... BDM-025
Removal/refit: stretching rod .................................................................................................................... BDM-026
Removal/refit: stretching cam ................................................................................................................... BDM-027
Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide ............................................................................................................ BDM-028
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributor (lower command) ................................................................ BDM-029
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals .................................................................................................... BDM-030
Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts ..................................................................................................... BDM-031
Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (2 stroke) ............................................................................................... BDM-032
Removal/refit: braking system friction pads .............................................................................................. BDM-033
Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer .................................................................................................... BDM-034
Removal/refit: mold base safety pin ......................................................................................................... BDM-035
Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs ............................................................................... BDM-037
Removal/refit: transfer arm rollers ............................................................................................................ BDM-038
Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt ............................................................................................ BDM-039
Removal/refit: conveyor belts ................................................................................................................... BDM-040
Removal/refit - double filtration filters ....................................................................................................... BDM-041
Removal/refit: locking follower .................................................................................................................. BDM-042
Draining the mold body hydraulic circuit ................................................................................................... BDM-043
Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber ................................................................................ BDM-045
Removal/refit: body-guide plate assembly of bottle outfeed wheel .......................................................... BDM-046
Removal/refit - bottle outfeed ejection guide ............................................................................................ BDM-047
Removal/refit: bottle outfeed neck guides ................................................................................................ BDM-048
Removal/refit: bottle outfeed body guides ................................................................................................ BDM-049
Removal/refit - dedust filters ..................................................................................................................... BDM-051
Removal/refit - dedust cam ...................................................................................................................... BDM-052
Removal/refit - dedust module neck guides ............................................................................................. BDM-053

Removal/refit - dedust module plates ....................................................................................................... BDM-054
Removal/refit - dedust rollers ................................................................................................................... BDM-055
Removal/Refit - oven cooling system filters ............................................................................................. BDM-056
Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve ....................................................................................... BDM-063
Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters .................................................... BDM-072
Removal/refit - bottle outfeed wheel neck-guide plate assembly ............................................................. BDM-082
Reconditioning the oven spindles ............................................................................................................. BDM-095
Removal/refit: filter element on the oven cooling system ......................................................................... BDM-097
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel ......................................................................................................... BDM-105
Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve .......................................................... BDM-106
Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid ...................................................................... BDM-107
Removal/refit: tensioner wheel sectors .................................................................................................... BDM-122
Opening/closing the infrared oven support .............................................................................................. BDM-131
C - 2/4 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Removal/refit - infrared oven .................................................................................................................... BDM-132
Removal/refit - lamp cap protective covers .............................................................................................. BDM-133
Removal/refit - infrared oven reflectors .................................................................................................... BDM-134
Removal/refit - false lamps ....................................................................................................................... BDM-135
Removal/refit - stretching cylinder yoke ................................................................................................... BDM-139
Removal/refit - front and rear shell support slides .................................................................................... BDM-141
Removal/refit - nozzle cylinder distributor silencers ................................................................................. BDM-142
Removal/refit - bearings on the bottle outfeed wheel retractable guide ................................................... BDM-143
Removal/refit - stretching cylinder silencers ............................................................................................. BDM-144
Removal/refit - mold opening/closing roller .............................................................................................. BDM-145
Removal/refit - stretching cylinder roller ................................................................................................... BDM-146
Removal/refit - transfer arm springs ......................................................................................................... BDM-147
Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable cam ....................................................................... BDM-148
Reconditioning the stretching cylinder distributor ..................................................................................... BDM-149
Reconditioning a solenoid valve "Tornado" .............................................................................................. BDM-150
Removal/refit - spindle chain .................................................................................................................... BDM-151
Removal/refit - spindle chain rotation chain ............................................................................................ BDM-152
Removal/refit - stretching cylinder check valve ........................................................................................ BDM-153
Removal/refit - PUPM mold support unit locking pins .............................................................................. BDM-154
Removal/refit onboard air circuit filters ..................................................................................................... BDM-155
Removal/refit - pneumatic control circuit silencers ................................................................................... BDM-156
Removal/refit - spindle sprockets rotation chain guide ............................................................................ BDM-157
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE BRM

Setting the mold opening/closing lever ..................................................................................................... BRM-001
Setting the heights of the transfer arms ................................................................................................... BRM-002
Setting the tension of the spindle chains .................................................................................................. BRM-003
Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer ....................................................................................... BRM-005
Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer ................................................................................................... BRM-006
Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds ................................................................................................ BRM-007
Setting the tensions on the timing belts .................................................................................................... BRM-008
Setting the stretching bottom thrust .......................................................................................................... BRM-009
Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields ........................................................................................ BRM-010
Setting the infeed rail ................................................................................................................................ BRM-011
Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads ......................................................................... BRM-012
Setting the unscrambler roller assembly .................................................................................................. BRM-013
Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts ............................................................................................... BRM-015
Setting the height of the unscrambler unit ................................................................................................ BRM-016
Setting up the stabilization rail assembly ................................................................................................. BRM-017
Setting the mold compression system ...................................................................................................... BRM-021

Setting the bottle base outfeed guide ....................................................................................................... BRM-022
Setting the height of the extraction hood .................................................................................................. BRM-025
Setting the transfer arm grips ................................................................................................................... BRM-031
Setting the oven spindle drive chains ....................................................................................................... BRM-032
Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven infeed wheel ................................................................. BRM-036
Setting the heights of the dummy lamps .................................................................................................. BRM-050
GREASING PROCEDURE BGM

Greasing the transfer arm guides ............................................................................................................. BGM-001
Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring ................................................................................. BGM-006
Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring ................................................................................. BGM-007
Greasing the stretching guides ................................................................................................................ BGM-008
Greasing the mold base support assembly guides .................................................................................. BGM-009
27/05/2013 C - 3/4
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Changing the oil in the reducer motor ...................................................................................................... BGM-010

Greasing the molds (cavities) ................................................................................................................... BGM-011
Greasing the cylindrical PUPM mold support units .................................................................................. BGM-013
Greasing the coder wheel gear ................................................................................................................ BGM-014
Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings .................................................................................................. BGM-018
Greasing the mold support unit locking system ....................................................................................... BGM-019
Greasing the preform ejection cams ........................................................................................................ BGM-020
Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam ...................................................................................................... BGM-021
Greasing the dedust bearing .................................................................................................................... BGM-022
Filling the grease tanks ............................................................................................................................ BGM-023
Greasing the extractor hood bearings ...................................................................................................... BGM-028
Greasing the no-load protection cams ..................................................................................................... BGM-029
Greasing the reducer motor bearing ........................................................................................................ BGM-035
Greasing the tensioner wheel guide ......................................................................................................... BGM-041
Greasing the upper notches of the oven wheel and the forks .................................................................. BGM-050
C - 4/4 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Mechanical operation procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Inspecting the torque limiters ................................................................................................................... BNM-002
Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors ......................................................................................................... BNM-003
Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices ............................................................................ BNM-004
Checking the misload safety device ......................................................................................................... BNM-005
Checking the machine levels .................................................................................................................... BNM-006
Cleaning the toothing on the drive wheels ............................................................................................... BNM-007
Cleaning the molds prior to storage ......................................................................................................... BNM-008
Inspection/cleaning - braking systems ..................................................................................................... BNM-009
Visual inspection of the reducer motor ..................................................................................................... BNM-011
Checking general synchronization ........................................................................................................... BNM-012
Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder ......................................................................................................... BNM-013
Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels ........................................................................................... BNM-014
Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam ................................................................................. BNM-015
Cleaning the extractor hood and the aspirator filters ................................................................................ BNM-018
Basic cleaning of self-lubricated parts ...................................................................................................... BNM-019
Inspection/cleaning - grease distributors .................................................................................................. BNM-020
Degreasing the self-lubricated parts ........................................................................................................ BNM-021
Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles ........................................................................................................... BNM-045
Checking the tension on the timing belt ................................................................................................... BNM-048
Taking water samples from the machine supply circuits .......................................................................... BNM-049
Analysing water samples from machine supply circuits ........................................................................... BNM-050
Cleaning the chemical analysis equipment .............................................................................................. BNM-051
Inspection/cleaning - lamp cap protective covers ..................................................................................... BNM-055
Checking the on-board air circuit filters .................................................................................................... BNM-059
Cleaning the molds on the machine ......................................................................................................... BNM-064
Inspecting a stand-alone automatic greaser ............................................................................................ BNM-074
27/05/2013 C - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
C - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure Part C
2 Inspecting the torque limiters BNM-002 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
For all work on the torque limiters, check the

calibration values on the transmission drawings.
Never attempt to modify the torque limiter tares.
1-007205-08-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 A
procedure "BCU-001,
- hopper electrical circuit live, see procedure "BCU-003,
PROCEDURE

machine.
Checking the infeed wheel torque limiter
3- Turn the turntable (2) manually.
The torque limiter will trip.
The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.
1-006403-17-02.svg
If the corresponding fault does not appear on the

PCC, reset the torque limiter sensor, see 2
procedure "BRE-010.
4- Reset the preform infeed torque limiter, see
procedure "BCU-020.
5- Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see
procedure "BCU-026.
Inspecting the transfer wheel torque limiter
1-007175-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure
2/4 BNM-002 Inspecting the torque limiters 2

PCC, reset the torque limiter sensor, see 10
procedure "BRE-010.
7- Reset the preform infeed torque limiter, see
procedure "BCU-020.
procedure "BCU-026.
Check the bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter
1-010291-01-xx.svg
1-008651-03-xx.svg
11 12
1-007626-10-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspecting the torque limiters BNM-002 3/4

The "Options" family appears. B
F Check the status of the key (13). 14
- If the key (13) is green.
13
- If the key (13) is red.
Slaved to filler mode is activated.
PCC, reset the torque limiter sensor, see
1-010562-03-02.svg
procedure "BRE-010.
12- Reset the torque limiter, see procedure "BCU-020.
procedure "BCU-026.
Checking the reducer motor torque limiter
F Check for the gap X= 1,5 mm between the probe (4) on
the sensor (5) and the control disc (6). 8
- If the gap X is incorrect, reset the torque limiter
sensor, see procedure "BRE-010.
F Check for the gap Y between the probe (4) on the
sensor (5) and the control disc (6).
- If the gap Y is incorrect, reset the torque limiter
14- Press the probe (4) until the sensor (5) is set off.
procedure "BRE-010.
procedure "BCU-026.
The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears
7
on the message bar (A) at the PCC.
Checking the oven wheel torque limiter

F Check for the gap X = 1,5 mm between the probe (7) on
the sensor (8) and the control disc (9).
Y

F Check for the gap Y = 0,5 mm between the probe (7) on
the sensor (8) and the control disc (9)
16- Press the probe (7) until the sensor (8) is set off. 9 X
1-007118-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-002 Inspecting the torque limiters 2

4
procedure "BRE-010.
Y
procedure "BCU-026.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
18- Close the safety doors. X

1-007163-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors BNM-003 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always use recommended tools.
The vented reflectors must always retain their mirror-

effect.
Always wear clean, dry gloves.
Eye protection is obligatory.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
Breathing protection is obligatory.
When handling the reflectors (3) take the following

2
precautions:
- do not split or break them into small pieces,
1
- avoid creating dust.
If transformed into dust, the reflectors (3) may cause

temporary irritation to the skin, the eyes and
respiratory system. 1-006075-01-xx.svg
The fine coating on the surface of the standard

reflectors must not be damaged in any way.
MACHINE STATUS 3
- all machine power and utilities turned off, see
procedure "BCU-012,
- oven cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts 1-006089-01-xx.svg
None
Consumables
- cleaning agent "NET A02",

- cotton wad.
Specific tools
- soft paintbrush.
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-003 Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors 1

machine. 4
To faciltate tightening, the handles (1) can be
disengaged.
Depending on the configuration of your machine,

these elements (1) may vary visually but their
functions remain the same.
2- Loosen the handles (1). 5
3- Carefully tilt out the rack (2) from the oven.
4- Remove the standard reflectors (3) and the vented 1-006079-01-xx.svg
reflectors (4).
F Check the condition of the reflectors (3 ; 4).
5- Clean the dust off the reflectors (3 ; 4) using a soft
brush.
6- Clean the vented reflectors (4) using cotton wad dabbed
in cleaning agent "NET A02".
7- Wipe any remaining cleaning agent off the vented
reflectors (4) using a dry cotton wad.
8- Replace any damaged reflectors (3 ; 4).
9- Refit the reflectors (3 ; 4).
F Make sure that the reflector (4) is in the groove on the
support (5).
10- Carefully tilt out the rack (2) from the oven.
11- Tighten the handles (1).
12- Repeat steps 1 to 11, to check all of the reflectors (3 ; 4)
in the oven.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices BNM-004 1/4
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-80-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
- adhesive tape.
Specific tools
- 10 mm plastic thickness gauge.
PROCEDURE
Checking the safety devices
1 A
procedure "BCU-013.
3- Use the JOG system on the mold closing retractable
safety cam (2) to bring the blowing station forward, see
procedure "BCU-013.
To ensure safety, the person carrying out the
procedure must always keep the control box JOG with
them.
1-006403-17-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-004 Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices 2
4- Use a screwdriver (3) as a lever on the mold closing

retractable safety cam (2).
The mold closing safety cam is retracted.
The lamp on the detector (4) "B12.3" goes out.
The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears 10
5- Remove the screwdriver. 2 4
The mold closing retractable safety cam (2)returns to its
original position. 3
procedure "BCU-023.
7- Use the screwdriver as a lever on the mold locking
retractable safety cam (5).
The mold locking retractable safety cam (5) is now
retracted.
The lamp on the detector (6) "B31.0" goes out. 1-006080-01-xx.svg

8- Remove the screwdriver.
5 6 3
procedure "BCU-023.
Checking the safety detection systems
10- Use the JOG unit between the 2 transfer wheels to
bring the blowing station (9) around, see
procedure "BCU-013.
11- Place the (7) thickness gauge 10 mm on the left half-
mold (8) of the open blowing station (9).
12- Affix the gauge (7) using the adhesive tape.
1-006082-01-xx.svg
14- Use the manual rotation system to bring the blowing

station (9) around so that the follower (10) is in contact
with the mold closing retractable safety cam (2), see
procedure "BCU-014.
7 9
station (9) around so that the follower (11) is in contact

with the mold locking retractable safety counter-cam
(5), see procedure "BCU-014. 8
The alarm messages corresponding to the faults appear
on the message band (A) at the PCC.
16- Advance the blow unit (9) by manual rotation so that the
mold locking follower (11) is no longer in contact with 11
the cam (5).
1-006081-01-xx.svg
17- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC, see
procedure "BCU-023.
18- Remove the gauge (7).
19- Close the mold support unit manually, see
procedure "BSU-001.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices BNM-004 3/4
BEFORE YOU FINISH

station (9) around to the mold opening/closing safety
lever (12), see procedure "BCU-014.
21- If the blowing station (9) sets off the safety device (12), 10
adjust the mold opening/closing lever, see
procedure "BRM-001.
12
1-006083-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-004 Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the misload safety device BNM-005 1/4
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-10-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- thickness ring 1 mm same diameter as the preform
neck,
- 1 preforms.
PROCEDURE

The "Main page" family page appears. 1 A
machine.
1-006403-17-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-005 Checking the misload safety device 2
3- Pivot the infeed guide (2) manually.

4- Position the preform (3) on the infeed turntable (4).
5- Bring the preform up to the spindle tip (5) using the JOG
6- Position the thickness ring 1 mm(6) on the spindle tip
(5).
4 2
1-006084-01-xx.svg
7- Bring the spindle tip (5) up to the preform loading

point(3) using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
The preform (3) will present a fault on loading due to
the thickness of the ring (6).
8- Use the JOG to turn the oven wheel, see
procedure "BCU-013.
F Check the rising section on the ejection cams (7).
F Check the rise of the 3 guide followers (8) on the 5
ejection cams (7).
F Make sure that the mis-loaded preform is ejected.
F Check the safety device. 6
The lamp on the sensor (9)"B32.0" will be off when it is
inactive.
on the message bar (A) at the PCC. 3
9- Remove the preform (3) and the ring (6).
F Check the falling section of the ejection cams (7).
procedure "BCU-023.
1-006090-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006085-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the misload safety device BNM-005 3/4
1-006086-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-005 Checking the misload safety device 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the machine levels BNM-006 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure is intended to check the levels of the

machine. Levelling up procedures use other means
which take into account the position of the blow wheel
in the production area. SIDEL carries out the levelling
up.
1-006030-54-xx.svg
Check the levels according to the measurments taken

2
during the installaiton of the machine (see SIDEL
levelling up document).
If the document is not available, establish a reference

to be used for the annual inspections.
1
The arrow next to the level indicates the direction in
which it should be read.
3
MACHINE STATUS
4
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
None 1-006517-01-xx.svg
Specific tools
- precision spirit level 0,02 mm/m.
PROCEDURE
5 6 9 10
1-006825-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-006 Checking the machine levels 2
1- Take the levels of the bars (7) located as follows:

- on the left side (1) of the blow wheel,
- on the rear cross-piece (2) of the blow wheel.
1-008389-01-xx.svg
2- Take the levels of the bars (8) located as follows:

- on the transfer table (3 ; 4),
- on the front module (5 ; 6),
- on the rear module (9 ; 10).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
if these readings do not match the original levels,

contact SIDEL.
1-006685-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Cleaning the toothing on the drive wheels BNM-007 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure only applies to machines fitted with an

automated self-greasing system.
1-006030-12-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None 1
Consumables
- clean, dry cloths. 1-008402-02-xx.svg
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003.
Depending on the type of machine and accessibility,
remove the elements (1 ; 2) or (2 ; 3 ; 4).
3- Clean the cover plates (1 ; 2 ; 3) and the spray nozzles
(5) using clean and dry rags.
3 5 2
1-008404-05-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-007 Cleaning the toothing on the drive wheels 2
Do not remove grease from the toothing on the drive

rings.
4- Remove any excess grease from the drive rings (6 ; 7)
and gears using clean, dry cloths.
F Check that none of the lip seals of the drive rings (6 ; 7)
is faulty.
5- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003.
3 4
1-008423-04-xx.svg
6- Use the JOG to access the remaing sections of the

rings, see procedure "BCU-013. 5
7- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have cleaned off
all the excess and splashed grease.
1-006851-03-xx.svg
8- Install the different elements that have been removed.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
In order for the machine to start normally there should

remain enough grease on the toothing of the drive
rings. 7
1-006088-06-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Cleaning the toothing on the drive wheels BNM-007 3/4
1-006087-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-007 Cleaning the toothing on the drive wheels 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Cleaning the molds prior to storage BNM-008 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The removed molds must be cleaned prior to storage

in order to remove any humidity and prevent
corrosion.
The cleaning of molds prior to storage must be carried

out when the molds are at ambient temperature.
Never use oxygenated or chlorinated cleaning

agents.
Parts
None
Consumables
- clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth,
- bubble-wrap.
Specific tools
- sectionned pallets.
PROCEDURE
1- Clean the centering studs (1) using a clean. dry, non-

abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A05". 3 1 3
2- Clean the seal planes (2) on the half-molds and the

mold base using a clean, dry non-abrasive cloth dipped 4 4
in cleaning agent "NET A05".
3- Clean the preform centering ring (3) using a clean, dry
non-abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET
A05".
1 1
4- Clean the cavity (4) in the half-molds and the mold base
using a clean, dry non-abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning
agent "NET A05". 2 2
5- Wrap the mold and the mold base in bubble-wrap.
6- Store the molds on sectionned pallets.
BEFORE YOU FINISH 4

F Make sure there is no chlorine in the storage area.
F Monitor the humidity level in the storage area (less than 2
70%).
F Monitor the temperature in the storage area (from 20°C
1-006091-01-xx.svg
to 25°C).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-008 Cleaning the molds prior to storage 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Inspection/cleaning - braking systems BNM-009 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The machine is fitted with 2 braking systems.
The braking system opens pneumatically and is

drawn closed by a vacuum (see User manual).
Never loosen the bolts (1).
Operations 12 to 15 require the presence of 2

technicians. 1-006030-40-xx.svg
Do not inhale the dust from the brake systems.
MACHINE STATUS
- primary electrical circuit under power, see 2
procedure "BCU-001,
- main electrical circuit under power, see 3
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
None
Consumables
4
- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- set of thickness gauges.
5
PROCEDURE
Wear latex gloves.
Do not apply cleaning agents to the brake pads (2).

1-006095-01-xx.svg

machine.
2- Clean the accessible sections of the brake disc (3)
using a cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A04".
3- Use the JOG to make the other sections of the brake
disc (3) accessible, see procedure "BCU -013.
4- Clean the other sections of the brake disc (3) using a
cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A04".
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-009 Inspection/cleaning - braking systems 3
5- Check the condition of all of the parts of the brake

system visually.
6- Check the condition of the brake pads (2) visually.
· Replace the pads if they have become soiled by
grease or oil, see procedure "BDM -033.
7- Check the thickness of the brake pads (2).
· If the thickness of the brake pads (2) is less than 7
mm replace them, see procedure "BDM -033.
8- Connect the JOG to zone "0" on the PCC.
6
9- Turn off the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.
10- Fit the brace (4) on the drive ring (5).
11- Lock out the locking brace (4).
Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the
2 technicians is required for the following operations.
12- The first technician presses the button (6) and keeps it
pressed in.
The braking system is now open.
Never touch the moving parts of the brake during this
inspection.
13- The second technician checks the gap 0,5 +0,1/0 mm
between the brake pads (2) and the brake disc (3).
1-006603-01-xx.svg
Check the gap X along the entire length of the brake

2
pads (2).
14- Adjust the brake pads (2) if the measurements taken
exceed tolerance limits or are irregular, see 3
procedure "BRM -012.
After inspecting the brake pads (2) the second
technician gives a signal to the first to release the
button (6).
15- Unlock the locking brace (4).
16- Remove the brace (4). 1-006093-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

17- Check the condition of all of the parts of the brake

system visually.
18- Check the tightness of the fixing bolts (7) (tightened to a
torque of 85 N.m.
19- Press the button (6) several times to make sure that the
brake is working properly.
7
1-006096-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Visual inspection of the reducer motor BNM-011 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- reducer motor cold,
procedure "BCU-012.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Check the general condition of the reducer motor (1).
3- Make sure there are no traces of oil on the reducer
1-006030-17-xx.svg
motor (1) shafts or the floor.
If you detect any oil carry out a closer inspection, see
procedure "BGM -010.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006099-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-011 Visual inspection of the reducer motor 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Checking general synchronization BNM-012 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Determine the cause of the de-synchronization before

attemptng any work.
Check the synchronization of the machine after

carrying out any mechanical procedure on the belts,
pulleys or bearings.
Checking synchronization requires the full attention of

the technician with regard to the mechanical parts
involved as well as full control of the JOG system, see
Grips not opening symmetrically, marks around the

preform necks or problems on transfer can all be the
result of de-synchronization.
MACHINE STATUS
- correct belt tensions, see procedure "BRM-008, 2
- torque limiters in working position.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- 3 preforms,
- 3 certified acceptable items .
PROCEDURE

machine.
3- Position 3 preforms on the infeed turntable (2).
4- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see
procedure "BCU-013.
5- Make sure that the preforms load onto the spindle chain
correctly.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-012 Checking general synchronization 3
7- Place 3 preforms at the oven outfeed, up-line from the

off-load point.
procedure "BCU-013.
Checking the meeting points of the grips with the
molds is difficult and of limited efficiency when the
machine is moving. For a full inspection, see
procedure "BRM-006, see procedure "BRM-007.
F Make sure that the preforms move freely right up to the
bottle transfer wheel.
F Check all aspects of preform movement as well as that
of the parts around them.
9- Note any abnormal stress or asymmetry on preform
transfer.
Preform movement and transfer should be fluid and
unobstructed.
10- Remove the preforms from the grips on the bottle
transfer wheel.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
De-synchrnonization at one meeting point often

indicates de-synchronization at another meeting
point.
If synchronization problems are found at any 1 point,

check all of the transfer points.
A
11- If necessary, re-synchronize the various parts in the D
following order.
- De-synchronization at meeting point A? B
Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds, see
procedure "BRM-007.
Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer, see
procedure "BRM-005.
Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven E C
infeed wheel, see procedure "BRM-036.
- De-synchronization at meeting point B? 1-006690-01-xx.svg
Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer, see

procedure "BRM-005.
Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven

- De-synchronization at meeting point C?
Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven
- De-synchronization at meeting point D?
Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer, see
procedure "BRM-006.
- De-synchronization at meeting point E?
The synchronization between the blowing machine
(master)and the filling machine (slave) is carried out
by the filling machine plc. The synchronization
between the connecting module Combi bottle
outfeed and the bottle transfer wheel is carried out
automatically at reduced speed, every time the
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Checking general synchronization BNM-012 3/4
machine starts up, refer to the User Manual

supplied with the filling machine.
For synchronizations of the wheels after the bottle
outfeed wheel, refer to the User Manual supplied with
the filling machine.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-012 Checking general synchronization 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder BNM-013 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never use objects which may damage the parts that

need to be cleaned.
Discard any preforms that fall from the production line

or that have been handled.
Check the parts for wear and tear during cleaning.
Certain operations described in this chapter refer to

optional equipment. 1-007021-11-xx.svg
Parts to be cleaned:
Hopper and elevator column
- the hopper (1),
- the conveyor belt (2) and the fall cushioner (3) for the 14
hopper (1),
- the ribbed belt (4), the flaps (5) and the upper cover of
the elevator column (6).
Intermediate conveyor (option)
- the internal walls of the intermediate conveyor ,
- the conveyor belt of the intermediate conveyor . 13
Mini-hopper (option according to model)
- the internal walls of the mini hopper (7),
- the ribbed belt (8), the flaps (9) and the upper cover of
the elevator column (10),
- the conveyor belt (11) of the intermediary belt (12).
1-006110-03-xx.svg
Orienting roller assembly

16
- the preform recovery conveyor belt (13),
- the rollers, the wire-guides (14) and the rails (15) on the
unscrambler roller assembly,
- the 45° unscrambler paddles (16),
- the waste recovery area (17), 15
- the flaps,
- the internal walls of the unscrambler roller assembly,

- the access gantry.
1-006105-03-xx.svg
Infeed rail
- the infeed rail cowling (option),
- all the guides.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-013 Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder 1
MACHINE STATUS
- feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017,
procedure "BCU-012.
1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts 3
None
Consumables
- cleaning agent "NET A03". 2
Specific tools
- long-necked industrial vacuum cleaner (check the filters 1-006485-02-xx.svg
of the vacuum cleaner),

- long-handled rubber scraper,
- raised platform for workng at heights,
- ladder and footplate supplied with the machine.
PROCEDURE
1- Remove any preforms present on the surfaces.

2- Remove all dust and plastic debris using the vacuum
cleaner.
3- Clean the parts using a clean cloth and cleaning agent
"NET A03".
· If required. wipe the parts down.
Cleaning the hopper (1) and the hopper fall cushioner (3)
The machine ladder is designed to be fitted to the

6 1
edge of the hopper.
4- Clean the hopper (1) and the fall cushioner (3) using the
rubber scraper, a cloth and "NET A03" cleaner.
Cleaning the conveyor belts (2 ; 4 ; 8 ; 10 ; 13 ; 15)
This procedure describes the simple cleaning of the

conveyor belts. For more complete cleaning, remove
the belts and clean them in a bath or with a jet of 4
water, see procedure "BDM-040.

5- Open or remove the casings providing access to the 5
conveyor belts.
1-008538-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder BNM-013 3/4
6- Clean all accessible sections of the conveyor belts.

7- Clean all sections of the conveyor belts by physically 17
pulling them along.
8- Close or install the casings.
Cleaning the waste recovery area (17)
9- Open the gate (23).
10- Clean the recovery area (17).
11- Close the gate (23).
23
1-008526-01-xx.svg
Cleaning the anti-UV cabin (UV rail option)
12- Open the bottom cover (18) using the butterfly nut (19). 8
10
13- Remove the top cover (20).
14- Remove the rear panel (21) by releasing the 1/4 turn
fixings .
15- Remove the side panel (22) by releasing the 1/4 turn 9 7
fixings .
Never obstruct the upper ventilation grill as this may
reduce the bactericidal effects of the lamps.
12
Never touch the lamps with your fingers.
Never clean the UV lamps .
11
1-006675-06-xx.svg
If a lamp is broken, clean the whole area thoroughly

with an aspirator. Dispose of any articles present and
make sure any electrical components are disposed of
according to specific procedures.
16- Clean the internal walls, the rear panel (21) and the side
panel (22).
17- Clean all of the parts oin the infeed rail and the
upstream block .
18- Refit the top cover (20).
19- Refit the rear panel (21) and secure it using the 1/4 turn
fixings .
20- Refit the side panel (22) and secure it using the 1/4 turn
fixings . 19 18 21
21- Close and lock the lower cover (18) using the butterfly
1-006807-03-xx.svg
nut (19).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-013 Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder 1
General checks
22 20
F Check all of the rubber and plastic parts to make sure
they are free from:
- stretching or shrinking,
- hardening or softening,
- cracking, porosity or roughness.
22- Replace faulty or damaged parts.
F Check that all of the nuts and fixtures are tightened up
properly.
F Control the adjustment of the conveyor belts, see
procedure "BRM-015.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006808-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels BNM-014 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never start the machine without lubrication on the

toothing of the drive rings.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002, 1-006030-12-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- clean, dry cloths.
Specific tools
- clean, dry paintbrush.
PROCEDURE
Degreasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring (1)

procedure "BCU-013.
3- Remove excess grease from the drive ring (1) using a
clean, dry cloth.
4- Clean the toothing on the drive ring (1) using a brush
dipped in degreasing agent "NET A04".

5- Clean the drive gear. 1
7- Make accessible the other parts of the ring (1) using the
JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
8- Repeat the previous steps, from step 2, until degreasing 1-006088-01-xx.svg
is complete on the teeth of the drive ring (1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-014 Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels 2
9- Clean the spray nozzles (2) and the area around them
using the clean dry cloth. 2
10- Grease the toothing on the drive ring (1), see
procedure "BGM-007.
Degreasing the toothing on the oven drive ring (3)

1-006851-02-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-013.
1-008402-01-xx.svg
13- Clean the different disassembled parts using a cloth

moistened with "NET A04" cleaner.
14- Clean the spray nozzles (8) and the area around them
using the clean dry cloth.
6 7
1-008423-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels BNM-014 3/4
15- Remove excess grease from the drive ring (3) using a
clean, dry cloth.
16- Clean the toothing on the drive ring (3) using a brush
dipped in degreasing agent "NET A04".
6 8 5
1-008404-06-xx.svg
17- Clean the drive gear.

19- Make accessible the other parts of the ring (3) using the
20- Repeat the previous steps, from step 12, until
degreasing is complete on the teeth of the drive ring
(3).
21- Grease the toothing on the drive ring (3), see
procedure "BGM-006.
22- Install the different elements that have been removed. 3
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006087-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-014 Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam BNM-015 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Sensor
2 Stretching cam safety B14.4
When the safety device is set off a critical alarm will

be generated and the fault will be shown on the PCC
display.
Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment

fitted on the machine and always follow current safety
regulations.
1-006030-18-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
- PCC switched onsee procedure "BCU-004. 1
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Press on the retractable cam sector (1) for the
stretching safety cam.
The cam sector (1) retracts.
The lamp on the sensor "B14.4"(2) will be off when it is
inactive. 1-006667-01-xx.svg

3- Release the pressure on the retractable cam sector (1).
The sensor lamp "B14.4" (2) is lit when the sensor is A
active.
procedure "BCU-026

BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006403-04-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-015 Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Cleaning the extractor hood and the aspirator filters BNM-018 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Compressed air is used to clean the clogged filters.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
- PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, 1-007166-02-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- Methylated spirit,
- soft brush.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Cleaning the aspirator filters (1)

F Check that the fan inside the aspirator is stopped. 5 1
1- Close the purge valve (5).
2- Connect the hose (2) to the quick connector (3). 11
The quick connector (3) is located near the brake on

the blowing machine or near the aspirator (1),
depending on the machine configuration.
3- Set the pressure to 5 bar at the knob (4). 4
4- Open the purge valve (5).

6
2
8
1-010649-00-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-018 Cleaning the extractor hood and the aspirator filters 1
F Wait 2 seconds.
The filters are cleaned.
5- Close the purge valve (5).
Dust and other residue will be deposited in the waste
collector (6).
3
6- Close the isolator valve (7) on the waste collector (6).
7- Tilt the locking handle (8).
The waste collector (6) is released.
8- Remove the collection bin (6).
1-010286-01-xx.svg
9- Empty the waste collector (6).

6
10- Fit the waste collector (6).
11- Tilt the locking handle (8).
The waste collector (6) is locked on.
12- Open the isolator valve (7) on the waste collector (6).
13- Close the air supply at the knob (4). 7
14- Open the purge valve (5).
Leave the purge valve open (5) while the aspirator is
in operation (1).
15- Disconnect the hose (2) from the quick connector (3).
Check the saturation level of the filters (1)
1-010289-01-xx.svg
Inspecting the saturation level of the filters on the
aspirator (1) requires that the differential pressure
switch (11) be correctly calibrated, see
procedure "BRE-013.

The aspirator (1) starts.
The pressure switch (11) displays the pressure
differential.
1-010353-08-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Cleaning the extractor hood and the aspirator filters BNM-018 3/4
F Check the pressure differential .

- If the differential is less than or equal to 40 daPa. A 10
· Go to step 24.
- If the differential is greater than 40 daPa.
The aspirator (1) stops.
For more information, see the technical documents
delivered with this equipment.
19- Remove the filters from the aspirator.
20- Clean the aspirator filters using the soft brush.
21- Fit the filters on the aspirator.
The aspirator (1) starts.
1-010348-04-02.svg
- If the differential is less than or equal to 100 daPa.
· Go to step 24.
· Repeat the procedure every 10 daPa until the
value of 100 daPa is reached
· Replace the filters.
23- Repeat as above from step 17.
The aspirator (1) stops.
family.
Cleaning the aspirator hood

procedure "BCU-013. 12
27- Hold the carriages (12) in the raised position using the
rings . 15
Use the (12) to bring the other carriages JOG into an
accessible position, see procedure "BCU-013. 14
28- Remove the bolts (13).
The upper part of the aspirator hood (15) comes away
13
from the lower part .
29- Remove the 3 bolts (14). 1-010287-01-xx.svg
30- Lift the upper part of the aspirator hood (15).

31- Hold the upper part of the hood (15) in the raised
position.
32- Clean the extraction hood (15) using a clean cloth
dipped in methylated spirit.
33- Release the carriages (12).
34- Fit the 3 bolts (14).
35- Fit the bolts (13).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-018 Cleaning the extractor hood and the aspirator filters 1
37- Set the height of the aspiration hood (15), see

procedure "BRM-025.
38- Sign off the operation on the machine’s worksheet.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Basic cleaning of self-lubricated parts BNM-019 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
- mold opening/closing cam (1),
- Mold base raise/lower cam (2),
- stretching cam (3),
- loading/offloading cams (4),
- turnover cams (5),
- guide rails (6 ; 7), 1-006030-140-xx.svg
- slides (8),
- the cams of the preform transfer wheel (9),
- the cams of the bottle transfer wheel (10).
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1
Parts
None 1-006853-01-xx.svg
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-019 Basic cleaning of self-lubricated parts 2

procedure "BCU-013.
Area greased automatically
1-006379-02-xx.svg
Do not remove grease from the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3 ;

4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10) and the followers in contact
with them.
3- Remove excess and splashed grease from the parts (1 ;
2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10) and the areas around them
using clean dry cloths.
1-006380-02-xx.svg
F Check for the presence of grease leaks at the inlet
connectors . © SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
1-006378-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Basic cleaning of self-lubricated parts BNM-019 3/4

5
1-006383-02-xx.svg
5- Use the JOG system to access the other parts (1 ; 2 ;

3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10) of the system, see
6- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have cleaned off
all the excess and splashed grease.
1-012860-01-xx.svg
8
1-012861-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-019 Basic cleaning of self-lubricated parts 2
In order to be able to start the machine normally, ther

must be sufficient grease on the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3 ;
4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10) and the followers in contact.
1-008406-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspection/cleaning - grease distributors BNM-020 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
For further information on the greasing circuit(s), refer

to the drawing file delivered with the machine.
The main grease distributor (1) is connected to the

grease tank and distributes grease to the secondary
distributors (2). A sensor (3) to monitor the grease
flow equips the main grease distributor (1).
The secondary grease distributor (2) is supplied by

the main distributor (1) and distributes grease to the
machine parts to be greased .
1-006030-33-xx.svg
When a fault is indicated at the PCC check and clean

the grease distributors within 2 h.
The number and type of grease distributors vary

according to the configuration of the machine.
If the damage cannot be repaired replace the faulty

distributor with an identical one. Check the references
of the distributors in order not to confuse them with
other distributors fitted around the machine.
When replacing a pipe or a distributor:

- check the type of grease used in the circuit
concerned,
- fill the new part with grease .
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- grease.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
Cleaning
2- Clean the distributors and the areas around them using
a clean, dry cloth.
F Inspect the pipes (4 ; 5 ; 6) on the grease lines.
· If any of the pipes has been pinched or split, replace
it.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-020 Inspection/cleaning - grease distributors 2
Fill the new pipe with grease before connecting it.
Inspecting a distributor
This procedure is identical for each secondary

distributor (2) connected to the main distributor (1).
3- Disconnect the pipe (5) from the main distributor unit
(1).
5- Start the greasing cycle, see procedure "BCU-007.
F Wait for the end of the cycle. 5 5
F Make sure there are no faults at the PCC.
- The fault is no longer indicated.
The distributor (2) is faulty.
· Replace the distributor (2). (see above)
· Go to step 6.
- The fault is indicated. 3
· Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006. 1
· Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on
4
the machine.
· Connect the feed pipe (5) of the distributor being
checked.
1-008413-02-xx.svg
· Repeat the previous steps, from step 3, until all
the distributors (2) supplied by the main Main grease distributor (example)
distributor (1) have been checked.
7- Start the greasing cycle, see procedure "BCU-007.
F Make sure there are no faults at the PCC. 5
- The fault is no longer indicated.
· Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on
the machine. 2
· Go to step 14.
- The fault is indicated.
The main distributor (1) is faulty.
6 6
· Replace the main distributor (1). (see above)
Replacement of a distributor
machine.
1-006861-03-xx.svg
10- Note the positions of the pipes on the distributor in order Secondary grease distributor (example)
to correctly refit them.
11- Disconnect the pipes .
Fill the new distributor with grease before fitting it.
12- Replace the distributor .

13- Connect the pipes according to their original position.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
14- Wipe off any excess grease from the main distributor (1)
using clean, dry cloths.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspection/cleaning - grease distributors BNM-020 3/4
F Check that all of the pipes (4 ; 5 ; 6) on the greasing line

are connected.
F Make sure that all of the parts which are greased
automatically are sufficiently lubricated.
17- Stop the machine after several wheel revolutions, see
procedure "BCU-006.
machine.
F Make sure that the grease is correctly distributed to all
of the relevant parts.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-020 Inspection/cleaning - grease distributors 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Degreasing the self-lubricated parts BNM-021 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-006030-140-xx.svg
Any abnormal wear will require a full diagnostic

inspection.
- mold opening/closing cam (1),
- Mold base raise/lower cam (2),
- stretching cam (3),
- loading/offloading cams (4),
- turnover cams (5),
- guide rails (6 ; 7), 1
- slides (8),
- the cams of the preform transfer wheel (9), 1-006853-01-xx.svg
- the cams of the bottle transfer wheel (10).
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

2
Parts
None 1-006379-02-xx.svg
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
- "LUB A18" grease,
Specific tools
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-021 Degreasing the self-lubricated parts 2
PROCEDURE
Degreasing the self-lubricated parts

procedure "BCU-013.
3- Remove excess and splashed grease from the parts (1 ;
2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10) and the areas around them
using clean dry cloths.
4- Remove all grease from the parts (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ;
8 ; 9 ; 10) using a paintbrush dipped in degreasing
agent "NET A04". 3
F Check for the presence of grease leaks at the inlet
connectors .
1-006380-02-xx.svg

6- Use the JOG system to access the other parts (1 ; 2 ;
3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10) of the system, see
procedure "BCU-013.
7- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have degreased
4
all of the parts to be cleaned (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ;
9 ; 10).
Never restart the machine without ensuring that the
cam races are sufficiently lubricated.
Manually greasing the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 1-006378-02-xx.svg
9 ; 10)
5
Area to be greased © SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
9- Grease the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4) using a paintbrush

and the "LUB 29" grease.
10- Grease the cam races (5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10) using a
paintbrush and the "LUB A18" grease.
12- Use the JOG to access the remaining sections of the
cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10) , see
procedure "BCU-013.
13- Repeat as above from step 8 until you have greased all
of the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10).
1-006383-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Degreasing the self-lubricated parts BNM-021 3/4
1-012860-01-xx.svg
1-012861-01-xx.svg
14- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG

Do not wipe the cam races (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ;
9 ; 10).
15- Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth.
1-008406-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-021 Degreasing the self-lubricated parts 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles BNM-045 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never use solvents as they may affect the lubrication

of the bearings and the self-lubricating bushings.
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
1-006030-21-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- alcohol at 70 % does not need to be rinsed (non-
residual).
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Do not activate the low pressure air system in the 2

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Wipe off any excess or splashed grease from around
the spindle chain using a clean, dry cloth.

3- Remove the ejectors (1) manually.
4- Clean the parts of the spindle chain using a clean, dry
cloth. 1
Only use alcohol at 70 % and no other cleaning
product as this may damage the parts.
5- Disinfect the spindle tips (2) and the ejectors (1) using a
cloth dipped in 70 % alcohol.
6- Clip the ejectors (1).
7- Use the JOG system to access the other parts of the
spindle chain . 1-010317-01-xx.svg
8- Repeat as above, from step 3 until you have fully

cleaned the spindle chain.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-045 Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the tension on the timing belt BNM-048 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION A C D E
The number of timing belts varies according to the

configuration of the machine.
The tension values of belts are indicated in the set of

drawings supplied with the machine:
- Transmission kinematics of blow wheel (A).
- Transmission kinematics of oven front module (C).
- Cam box for the quick offload system (D) (option). I H G F
- Oven (E) extraction hood (option).
1-006030-146-xx.svg
- Transmission kinematics of preform feeder (F).
- Transmission kinematics of preform internal
decontamination module (G) (option).
- Transmission kinematics of preform dedust
module (H) (option).
- Transmission kinematics of bottle outfeed on 2
lines (I) (option).
Check new belts after several hours of production.
If the belts lose their tension regularly after the

commissioning period check the settings and
conditions of the various mechanical parts and
replace the belt if necessary.
MACHINE STATUS A 2
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None B
Specific tools
- frequency meter (3) and instructions for use. 1-013027-01-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-048 Checking the tension on the timing belt 2
Identifying the belt tension values

Example 1 B
1- Remove the "transmission kinematics" drawing (A) from
the drawing file delivered with the machine.
X X
2- Identify the various belts according to the machine
configuration, using the "transmission kinematics"
X X
drawing (A).
The references (1) indicate the inspection pointsXand X
the tension reference (Tx) of each belt.
X X
3- Note the belt tension values (2) according to the
configuration of the machine, using the "transmission
X X
kinematics" drawing (A).
4
4- Identify the tensioner (4) of each belt, using the
"transmission kinematics" drawing (A).
Checking the tension on the timing belt 1-011073-01-xx.svg
To check the belt tensions with the frequency meter,

make the belts vibrate by tapping them with a flat
wrench.

machine.
procedure "BCU-013.
F Check the belt tensions using the frequency meter (3) at
the position indicated.
- If the tension is correct.
· Go to step 12. 3
- If the tension is incorrect.
· Go to the next step. 1-006530-01-xx.svg
8- Adjust the tension of the belt concerned, see

procedure "BRM-008.
procedure "BCU-013.

the position indicated.
12- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 5
After each belt tension adjustment, operate the
machine without any articles and check the belt
tension values.
1-011243-06-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the tension on the timing belt BNM-048 3/4
Depending on the feeder model, the unsrambler roller

assembly is fitted with either an automatic or a
manual tensioner. The automatic tensioners do not
require any particular adjustments.
If there is a manual tensioner , check the tension of

the unscrambler roller belt .
BEFORE YOU FINISH

14- Close the safety doors to the working zone.
· Press the button (5) of the reclosed door to
acknowledge the fault.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-048 Checking the tension on the timing belt 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Taking water samples from the machine supply circuits BNM-049 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The period between the sample and the analysis must

be as short as possible and in all cases less than 5
days. The characteristics of the water will evolve over
time and this may affect the results of the analyses.
The samples to be analized must be stored in a

closed and temperate room.

1-006030-04-xx.svg
Thermoregulators installed upstream from the
machine provide thermal conditioning of the fluids that
circulate in the blow wheel..
For more information on how the thermoregulator

works, consult the technical documentation delivered
with this equipment..
Sample points
1 sample of 500 ml must be taken at each sample

point.
For each of the analyses carried out by SIDEL, take 1

extra sample at each sample point:
- Every 500 h, between 2 and 6 months.
Samples taken for SIDEL must be received within 5

days maximum. The characteristics of the water will
evolve over time and this may affect the results of the
analyses.
The samples must be labelled and indicate the date

and location of the sample.
Samples should be taken at the following locations:
- purges between the inlet (1 ; 3) and the outlet (2 ; 4)
from the machine’s hydraulic interface panel.
Take samples from each of the machine distribution

circuits.
Intervention on hot hydraulic circuits
Please read carefully all the safety instructions before
carrying out any works on the hot hydraulic systems.
There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high 1 2 3 4

1-011249-01-xx.svg
Wear safety equipment for body, hands and face.
MACHINE STATUS
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-049 Taking water samples from the machine supply circuits 3
- cold hydraulic inteface panel,

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- latex gloves,
- Protective glasses,
- apron.
Specific tools
- sample bottle(s).
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Clean the nozzles on the drain valves (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4)
using a clean dry cloth.
3- Let 1l of water run at the drain valve (1).
5 1
4- Position the sample bottle (5) under the drain valve (1).
5- Open the drain valve (1).
6- Fill the sample bottle (5) completely.
If there is a seal ring, check its condition and position.
7- Close the sample bottle (5).

8- Note the date and location of the sample on each
sample bottle (5).
9- Repeat the procedures above, from step 4 to take water
samples from each of the drain valves (2 ; 3 ; 4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-011250-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Analysing water samples from machine supply circuits BNM-050 1/8
GENERAL INFORMATION
The period between the sample and the analysis must

be as short as possible and in all cases less than 5
days. The characteristics of the water will evolve over
time and this may affect the results of the analyses.
The samples to be analized must be stored in a

closed and temperate room.
The following operations must be carried out in the

laboratory.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
Follow the hygiene precautions.
Only use recommended products.
Always observe the safety recommendations for the

products being used.
Always seal the reactive agents immediately after

use.
Repeat the above procedures for each sample taken.
For further information regarding the characteristics of

the water to be followed, please refer to
chapter "Quality of water and water distribution
circuits", in the Presentation Manual.
After water treatment, follow the appropriate water

specifications, please refer to chapter "Water
characteristics and treatment", in the User manual.
Multi-parameter tester
For further information regarding the multi-parameter

1 2 3 4 5
tester (3) refer to the documentation supplied with the
equipment.
If there is a problem with the display or the reading on

the tester (3):
- Replace the battery kit .
- Replace the sensor (2).
Recalibrate the tester (3) afer replacing the sensor

(2), see procedure "BRE-019.
The tester (3) must be recalibrated after every 4

analysis rounds, see procedure "BRE-019.
1-011217-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/8 BNM-050 Analysing water samples from machine supply circuits 3
After every analysis round, the sensor (2) must be

cleaned using the supplied cleaning solution, see
procedure "BNM-051.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- latex gloves,
- apron,
- water samples , see procedure "BNM-049.
- "indicateur ECAL",
- "liqueur complexométrique N/25",
- "réactif A/G",
- "indicateur NET",
- "tampon K10",
- "réactif TAC virage franc",
- "liqueur alcalimétrique N/25",
- "acide nitrique N/5",
- "nitrate mercurique N/25",
- "indicateur mixte pour chlorures".
Specific tools
- multi-parameter tester ,
- receptacle ,
- graduated plastic tubes 20 ml,
- syringue ,
- gauge .
PROCEDURE
Check the calibration date on the tester (3). If

necessary, recalibrate the tester (3), see
procedure "BRE-019.
Check the cleaning date on the tester (3). If

necessary, clean the tester (3), see
procedure "BNM-051.
Before using the tester (3), immerse the sensor (2) in

a container filled with tap water for 30 min.
Never use de-ionized water.
The equipment required for the analysis must be

cleaned using distilled water, see
procedure "BNM-051.
Ryznar index
Water analysis temperature
1- Press the key "ON_/_OFF"(7).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
The tester (3) lights up.

2- Remove the cap (1).
3- Insert the tester (3) into the sample to be tested (5).
The sensor (2) is immersed by 2 to 3 cm.
4- Shake and then wait for the sample to stabilize.
The reading is displayed.
The temperature of the samples must read between
20 and 25°C. 3
F Check the readings of the measurements.

- If yes.
Go to the next step.
- If not.
Set the sample to the correct temperature before
continuing with the rest of the procedure.
pH 5
7- Select "pH" mode using the "MODE_/_ENT" (6) button.
1-011219-01-xx.svg
8- Note down the reading and the reference of the
corresponding sample.
Conductivity
The sensor (2) is immersed by 2 to 3 cm. 3

11- Select "cond" mode using the "MODE_/_ENT" (6)
button.
12- Note down the reading and the reference of the
The tester (3) goes out.
14- Clean the tester (3), see procedure "BNM-051.
15- Refit the cap (1).
7 6
1-011251-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
TH (Total Hardness)
TH Water hardness 9
16- Take 12,5 ml as a water sample using the syringe.
17- Empty the syringe into the plastic tube (12). 8 10
18- Add 20 drops of reactive agent "réactif A/G" (8).
19- Mix the solution.
20- Add 1 gauge(s) (11) of the indicator "indicateur
ECAL"(9).
11
22- Add while mixing and counting each drop of the
complexometric dye "liqueur complexométrique"(10)
until: 1-011220-01-xx.svg
The solution changes from red (13) through violet (14)
to bright blue (15).
The TH water hardness, as expressed in French
12 13 14 15
degrees (°f) is equal to the number of drops added.
23- Note down the result and the reference of the
24- Empty the plastic tube (12) into the container (4).
25- Clean the equipment, see procedure "BNM-051.
1-011235-01-xx.svg
Total TH
16 17 10
26- Take 12,5 ml as a water sample using the syringe.
27- Empty the syringe into the plastic tube (12).
28- Add 4 drops of reactive agent "tampon K10" (16).
29- Add 2 drops of reactive agent "indicateur NET" (17).
complexometric dye "liqueur complexométrique"(10)
until:
The solution changes from a wine-red (18) to bright blue

(19).
1-011223-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
The total hardness TH, as expressed in French

12 18 19
degress (°f) equals the number of drops added.
1-011236-01-xx.svg
TAC (Total Alkalinity)

35- Take 12,5 ml as a water sample using the syringe. 20 21
37- Add 5 drops of reactive agent "réactif TAC" (20).
complexometric dye "liqueur alcalimétrique"(21) until:
The solution changes from blue-green (22) through gray
(23) to pink (24).
1-011226-01-xx.svg
The TAC (total alkalinity), as expressed in French

12 22 23 24
degrees (°f) is equal to the number of drops added.
1-011237-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Calculating the Ryznar stability index

43- Enter all of the results obtained for each sample on the A
calculation sheet (A) provided by SIDEL.
44- Note the results obtained on an information sheet.
1-011248-01-xx.svg
Chloride levels
45- Take 12,5 ml as a water sample using the syringe. 25 26 27
47- Add 4 drops of reactive agent "indicateur mixte pour
chlorures" (25).
The coloration is violet pink (28).
49- Add nitric acid "acide nitrique"(26) to the solution until
you obtain a greeny yellow color.
50- Add 2 drops of reactive agent "acide nitrique" (26).
1-011230-01-xx.svg

mercuric nitrate "nitrate mercurique"(27) until: 12 28 29 30
The solution changes from yellow (29) through orange
to violet (30).
The chloride ion concentration, as expressed in
French degrees (°f), is equal to the number of drops
added. The chloride ion concentration, as expressed
in mg/l, is equal to the number of drops added
multiplied by 7,1.
55- Clean the equipment, see procedure "BNM-051. 1-011238-01-xx.svg
56- Repeat the procedure above, from step 1, until you

have analyzed all of the samples (5).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Empty the receptacle according to current legislation.
F Check that the results correspond to the levels indicated

in the water characteristics table.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
If any of the characteristics do not correspond, the

water must be treated in order to ensure that the
machine functions properly. SIDEL will recommend a
suitable water treatment.
57- If necessary, contact SIDEL.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Cleaning the chemical analysis equipment BNM-051 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

laboratory.

1-006757-01-xx.svg

The sensor (3) on the tester (2) must be cleaned in

distilled water: 1 2 3 4 5
- before and after analysis of each sample,

- before and after calibration.
The measuring equipment must be cleaned using

distilled water:
- before and after analysis of each sample,
- after each analysis result.

cleaned using the supplied cleaning solution.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
None
Consumables
- latex gloves,
- apron,
- distilled water,
- cleaning solution for electrodes (7).
- buffer solution for electrode storage: potassium chloride

(8).
Specific tools
- complete wash bottle ,
- receptacle ,
- beaker .
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-051 Cleaning the chemical analysis equipment 3
Cleaning the tester (2) using distilled water

1- Fill the wash bottle (5) with distilled water.
8
3- Rinse the sensor (3) 3 times using the wash bottle (5)
over the receptacle (4).
1-011274-01-xx.svg
Cleaning the measurement equipment
5- Fill the wash bottle (5) with distilled water. 5
6- Rinse the plastic tube or beaker (6) using the wash
bottle (5) over the receptacle (4).
6
· Turn the plastic tube or the beaker (6) one full turn
while cleaning.
· Repeat this operation 3 times.
7- Empty the plastic tube or beaker (6) into the container
(4).
1-011218-01-xx.svg
Cleaning the tester (2) with cleaning solution
8- Fill the plastic tube or the beaker (6) with cleaning 7 2
solution (7).
10- Position the tester (2) in the plastic tube or beaker (6).
3
11- Remove the tester (2) from the plastic tube or beaker
(6).
12- Refit the cap (1). 6
(4).
14- Note down the date of cleaning on the information
sheet.
1-011253-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspection/cleaning - lamp cap protective covers BNM-055 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Handle with care so as not to damage the part(s) .
Remove the covers from the lamp caps (1) in order to

clean them without damage to parts around them.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
The lamp cap covers (1) must conserve their mirror-

like appearance.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- cotton wad,
- cleaning agent "NET A02".
Specific tools
- latex gloves.
PROCEDURE

machine.
A
2- Open the infrared oven support , see
procedure "BDM-131.
3- Remove the infrared oven (A). see
procedure "BDM-132.
F Check the condition of the protections (1).
- If the protections (1) are clean and without damage.
- If the protections (1) are dirty.
· Remove the protections (1), see
procedure "BDM-133.
· Clean the covers (1) using cotton wool dipped in 1
"NET 02" cleaning agent.
· Wipe off any excess cleaning agent using clean
1-011976-01-xx.svg
dry cotton wool.
· Fit the protections (1), see
procedure "BDM-133.
- If the protections (1) are damaged.
· Refit the covers (1), see procedure "BDM-133.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-055 Inspection/cleaning - lamp cap protective covers 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
4- Install the infrared oven (A), see procedure "BDM-132.

5- Close the infrared oven support , see
procedure "BDM-131.
6- Repeat steps 2 to 5 until you have inspected/cleaned all
of the lamp cap covers (1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Checking the on-board air circuit filters BNM-059 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-006030-18-xx.svg

A
regulations.
The number of filters (4) varies depending on the

machine model and configuration.
The plastic bowls (2) are ceaned with soapy water or

other similar neutral products (non residual).
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
2 1
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- soap product.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-059 Checking the on-board air circuit filters 2

procedure "BCU-013.
3- Bring the on-board air circuit (A) around to your working
4- Turn off the power and utility supplies to the
machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 4
machine.
F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure 2
gauges (1).
F Make sure there is no liquid inside the bowl (2).
- If there is liquid.
3
· Unscrew the cap (3).
The liquid drains out.
· Tighten the cap (3).
F Make sure there are no foreign bodies in the bowl (2). 1-011613-01-xx.svg
- If there are foreign bodies present.

· Remove the bowl (2), see
procedure "BDM-155.
· Clean the bowl (2) using the soapy water and a
clean dry cloth.
· Refit the bowl (2), see procedure "BDM-155.
F Check the condition of the filter (4).
· If the filter (4) is deteriorated or over-saturated,
replace it, see procedure "BDM-155.
6- Repeat as aboveabove, from step 5, until all of the parts
(4) have been checked.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
7- Turn on the power supplies to the machine, see

procedure "BCU-001.
F Check for leaks.
F Check the pressure at the gauges(1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Cleaning the molds on the machine BNM-064 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-006030-01-xx.svg
Never use oxygenated or chlorinated cleaning

agents.
Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the

open position before attempting any work on it, see 1
procedure "BSU-001.

stipulated risks.
1-011866-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
None
Consumables
- clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth.
Specific tools
- locking system holding brace .
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNM-064 Cleaning the molds on the machine 1
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see
procedure "BSU-001.
3- Insert the locking system holding brace, see
procedure "BSU-001.
4- Clean the cavity (1) in the half-molds and the mold base
using a clean, dry non-abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning
agent "NET A05" .
5- Remove the locking system holding brace , see
procedure "BSU-001. 1

procedure "BSU-001.
7- Bring the next blow station around to your working
position using the JOG system, see
procedure "BCU-013.
8- Repeat as above, from step 2, until all of the machine
molds have been cleaned.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-011868-01-xx.svg
If the "Kohlox TM" option is present, do not grease the
mold cavities.
9- Grease the mold cavities, see procedure "BGM-011.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspecting a stand-alone automatic greaser BNM-074 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION A
C
The number of lubrication points for each stand-alone
automatic greaser (5) varies with the machine
configuration.
The machine may be provided with stand-alone automatic
greasers (5) at the following locations:
- on the turnover cams and races of the spindle rollers B
(A),
- on the opening/closing cams of the transfer arm (B) A
grips (Option) ,
1-006030-145-xx.svg
- on the cams of the transfer wheel on the double bottle
outfeed (C) (Option) .
The replacement frequency for the grease tank (4) 3 5 1 2 9

A
varies according to the lubrication point .

chapter "Greasing schedule", in the User manual.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools 1-006613-02-xx.svg
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
F Check that the races (1) and rollers (2) are correctly
greased.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNM-074 Inspecting a stand-alone automatic greaser 2
2- Clean excess grease off the greasing blocks (9) using a

clean dry cloth. 3
3- Clean excess grease off the races (1) and rollers (2).
B 1 2 5
1-013304-01-xx.svg
F Check the replacement date on the grease tank (4) and
the greasing unit (5). 1 2 1 2
- If the replacement date has passed.
· Replace the grease tank (4), see
procedure "BGM-036.
F Check the condition of the greasing unit (5) on the
indicators (6).
- If the red lamp flashes every 8 seconds.
3
The system is faulty.
· Replace the control unit (7), see 5
procedure "BGM-036.
- If a red lamp remains lit continuously.
The battery kit (8) has run down.
· Replace the battery kit (8), see
procedure "BGM-036.
- If the red and green lamps flash simultaneously C 3
every 3 seconds.
The grease tank (4) is empty.
1-013312-01-xx.svg
· Replace the grease tank (4) and the battery kit
(8), see procedure "BGM-036.
- If a green lamp flashes every 15 seconds.
The system is functioning correctly.
· Go to the next step. © SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspecting a stand-alone automatic greaser BNM-074 3/4
4- Repeat as above, from step 3 until you have checked all

of the automatic greasing units (5) on the machine.
1-006497-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006498-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNM-074 Inspecting a stand-alone automatic greaser 2
1-006499-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber ..................................................................................... BDM-001
Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" .............................................................................. BDM-002
Removal/refit: transfer arms ..................................................................................................................... BDM-003
Draining the mold and oven hydraulic circuits .......................................................................................... BDM-004
Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters .............................................................................................. BDM-005
Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters ........................................................................................... BDM-006
Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters ........................................................................................................ BDM-007
Removal/refit: nozzle seals. .................................................................................................................... BDM-008
Removal/refit: spindle chain links ............................................................................................................. BDM-010
Removal/refit: molds and mold bases ...................................................................................................... BDM-011
Removal/refit: spindle tips ........................................................................................................................ BDM-012
Removal/refit: spindle sprockets .............................................................................................................. BDM-013
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder ............................................................................................................. BDM-014
Removal/refit - mold compensation seal .................................................................................................. BDM-016
Removal/refit: shock absorber and lower stretching thrust ...................................................................... BDM-017
Removal/refit: upstream feed unit ............................................................................................................ BDM-018
Removal/refit: downstream feed unit ........................................................................................................ BDM-019
Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable .................................................................................................... BDM-020
Removal/refit: infeed guide ....................................................................................................................... BDM-021
Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide ..................................................................................................... BDM-022
Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable .............................................................................................. BDM-023
Removal/refit: transfer grips ..................................................................................................................... BDM-024
Removal/refit: nozzle tip ........................................................................................................................... BDM-025
Removal/refit: stretching rod .................................................................................................................... BDM-026
Removal/refit: stretching cam ................................................................................................................... BDM-027
Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide ............................................................................................................ BDM-028

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributor (lower command) ................................................................ BDM-029
Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals .................................................................................................... BDM-030
Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts ..................................................................................................... BDM-031
Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (2 stroke) ............................................................................................... BDM-032
Removal/refit: braking system friction pads .............................................................................................. BDM-033
Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer .................................................................................................... BDM-034
Removal/refit: mold base safety pin ......................................................................................................... BDM-035
Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs ............................................................................... BDM-037
Removal/refit: transfer arm rollers ............................................................................................................ BDM-038
Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt ............................................................................................ BDM-039
Removal/refit: conveyor belts ................................................................................................................... BDM-040
Removal/refit - double filtration filters ....................................................................................................... BDM-041
Removal/refit: locking follower .................................................................................................................. BDM-042
27/05/2013 C - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Draining the mold body hydraulic circuit ................................................................................................... BDM-043

Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber ................................................................................ BDM-045
Removal/refit: body-guide plate assembly of bottle outfeed wheel .......................................................... BDM-046
Removal/refit - bottle outfeed ejection guide ............................................................................................ BDM-047
Removal/refit: bottle outfeed neck guides ................................................................................................ BDM-048
Removal/refit: bottle outfeed body guides ................................................................................................ BDM-049
Removal/refit - dedust filters ..................................................................................................................... BDM-051
Removal/refit - dedust cam ...................................................................................................................... BDM-052
Removal/refit - dedust module neck guides ............................................................................................. BDM-053
Removal/refit - dedust module plates ....................................................................................................... BDM-054
Removal/refit - dedust rollers ................................................................................................................... BDM-055
Removal/Refit - oven cooling system filters ............................................................................................. BDM-056
Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve ....................................................................................... BDM-063
Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters .................................................... BDM-072
Removal/refit - bottle outfeed wheel neck-guide plate assembly ............................................................. BDM-082
Reconditioning the oven spindles ............................................................................................................. BDM-095
Removal/refit: filter element on the oven cooling system ......................................................................... BDM-097
Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel ......................................................................................................... BDM-105
Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve .......................................................... BDM-106
Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid ...................................................................... BDM-107
Removal/refit: tensioner wheel sectors .................................................................................................... BDM-122
Opening/closing the infrared oven support .............................................................................................. BDM-131
Removal/refit - infrared oven .................................................................................................................... BDM-132
Removal/refit - lamp cap protective covers .............................................................................................. BDM-133
Removal/refit - infrared oven reflectors .................................................................................................... BDM-134
Removal/refit - false lamps ....................................................................................................................... BDM-135
Removal/refit - stretching cylinder yoke ................................................................................................... BDM-139
Removal/refit - front and rear shell support slides .................................................................................... BDM-141
Removal/refit - nozzle cylinder distributor silencers ................................................................................. BDM-142
Removal/refit - bearings on the bottle outfeed wheel retractable guide ................................................... BDM-143
Removal/refit - stretching cylinder silencers ............................................................................................. BDM-144
Removal/refit - mold opening/closing roller .............................................................................................. BDM-145
Removal/refit - stretching cylinder roller ................................................................................................... BDM-146
Removal/refit - transfer arm springs ......................................................................................................... BDM-147
Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable cam ....................................................................... BDM-148
Reconditioning the stretching cylinder distributor ..................................................................................... BDM-149
Reconditioning a solenoid valve "Tornado" .............................................................................................. BDM-150
Removal/refit - spindle chain .................................................................................................................... BDM-151
Removal/refit - spindle chain rotation chain ............................................................................................ BDM-152

Removal/refit - stretching cylinder check valve ........................................................................................ BDM-153
Removal/refit - PUPM mold support unit locking pins .............................................................................. BDM-154
Removal/refit onboard air circuit filters ..................................................................................................... BDM-155
Removal/refit - pneumatic control circuit silencers ................................................................................... BDM-156
Removal/refit - spindle sprockets rotation chain guide ............................................................................ BDM-157
C - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal/Refit procedure Part C
2 Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber BDM-001 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replace the shock absorber (1) with an identical

shock absorber. Check the references on the
absorbers so as not to confuse them with other
absorbers on the machine.

open position before attempting any work on it, see
procedure "BSU -001.
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-01-xx.svg
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- Shock absorber (1),
- thrust kit (A).
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal/Refit procedure
2/4 BDM-001 Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber 2

machine.
procedure "BCU-013.
position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.
Carry out this procedure with the mold closed and
locked.
3
Removal
4- Remove the nut (2). 1
5- Unscrew the shock absorber (1).
6- Loosen the thrust kit (A) from the shock absorber (1).
2
7- Remove the thrust kit (A).
8- Remove the shock absorber (1). 5
1-012095-01-xx.svg
Refit
9- Screw in the shock absorber (1) fully into the right
support block (3) on the mold support unit. A 5 4
10- Insert the pad (4) into the lock nut (5).
11- Tighten up the thrust kit (A) onto the shock absorber
(1).
1-010099-02-xx.svg
12- Screw the shock absorber (1) such that the pad (4) is in
contact with the lock screw (6).

13- Screw the shock absorber (1) by an additional half turn.
The pad (4) is compressed.
14- Screw the lock nut (2) on the shock absorber (1).
15- Hold the shock absorber (1) in position and tighten the
lock nut (2).
6 4 5 3 1 2
1-012096-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber BDM-001 3/4
16- Repeat as above, from step 3, until you have replaced

all of the elements (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Dispose of used parts according to current

legislation.
6 4 5 3 2 1
1-012097-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-001 Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" BDM-002 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The stretching rod and the process air both pass

through the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the
nozzle cylinder. The "TORNADO" solenoid valve
assembly and the nozzle cylinder are potential
sources of both biological and chemical
contamination.
Do not remove the nozzle cylinder.
Follow the hygiene precautions. 1-006030-01-xx.svg
The solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" is

delivered equipped according to the customer
configuration.
8 9
Ensure that no foreign bodies are allowed to enter the
"TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly or the nozzle 8
cylinder.
1
MACHINE STATUS 14 10

11
procedure "BCU-001,
3
procedure "BCU-002,
12 5
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
12
- solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" on base.
Consumables
6
- light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock,

Specific tools
- torque wrench 10 to 20 N.m. 4
PROCEDURE
16
Removal
machine.
2- Bring the blowing station around to your working 1-007128-01-xx.svg
Turn off the power and utility supplies to the
machine, see procedure "BCU-012.
3- Remove the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM -026.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-002 Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" 2
4- Block the orifice (1).

5- Disconnect the hose (2).
9- Disconnect the hose (6) (from the mold support unit).
For the piloted compensation option, disconnect the
circuit control solenoid valve hose.
11- Remove the electrical connectors (8).
12- Remove the electrical connector (9) from the sensor
(10). 7
13- Remove the 4 fixing bolts (11).
8
14- Remove the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly
(12).
15- Block the orifice (13). 2
12
Refit
17- Connect the hose (6) onto the opening "DC" on the
16
solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO"(12) for direct
compensation.
For the piloted compensation option, connect the
hose (6) to the connector on the "CC" opening.
1-007127-01-xx.svg
18- Unplug the orifice (13).

19- Clean and check the seals (14 ; 15).
· If the seal (14) is worn replace it, see
procedure "BDM -032. 13
· If the seal (15) is worn replace it, see
procedure "BDM -032. 15 16
20- Use a clean dry cloth to clean the "TORNADO" solenoid
valve assembly (12).
21- Clean the nozzle cylinder (16) using a clean dry cloth.
22- Position the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly (12)
1-006058-03-xx.svg
on the nozzle cylinder (16).
23- Apply a little light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock on the
bolts (11).
24- First tightening; tighten the bolts (11) crosswise to a
torque of 10 N.m.
25- Second tightening; tighten the bolts (11) crosswise to a
torque of 20 N.m.
26- Reconnect the electrical connector (9) to the sensor
(10).
Always follow the references when connecting the
electrical connectors (8) to the corresponding solenoid
valve functions.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" BDM-002 3/4
The electrical connector references (8) commence

with:
- "PB" for the preblow solenoid.
- "E" for the exhaust solenoid.
- "B" for the blowing solenoid.
- "R" for the recovery solenoid valve.
Make sure the seals are on the electrical connectors

(8).
27- Fit the electrical connectors (8). 12
28- Tighten the bolts (7).
29- Reconnect the hose (4).
31- Reconnect the hose (2). 1-007129-01-xx.svg

33- Reconnect the hose (6) to the mold support unit.
For the piloted compensation option, connect the
hose to the circuit control solenoid valve.
34- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM -026.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
36- Test the "TORNADO" solenoid valves (12) and the

nozzle cylinder (16), see procedure "BPU-006.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-002 Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: transfer arms BDM-003 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The transfer arm removal/refit procedure may vary

depending on the type of arm (A) and / or (B).
The tooling (1) or (2) for the type (A) transfer arm
removal/refit varies depending upon the machine
configuration.
For type (B) transfer arms, there is no transfer arm

removal/refit tooling.
1-006030-02-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
Machine isolated except for: 1
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables 1-011163-01-xx.svg
None
Specific tools
2
- transfer arm removal/refit tooling (1) or (2) (available
depending on the configuration).
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Bring the transfer arm around to your working position
using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
Type (A) arm with tool (1)

1-011176-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-003 Removal/refit: transfer arms 2
3- Position the base (3) on the screw (13).

4- Tighten the screw (14) into contact with the screw (13). 3 4 5;6
Hold the fork (4) upwards.
5- Turn the crank (15) clockwise to lift the roller (12) away
from the cam (11). A
Never tighten the tooling (1) fully.
Mark the position of the tooling (1).
6- Remove the bolts (5) and the washers (6).

7- Depending upon the machine configuration, remove the
flange (9).
8- Remove the transfer arms .
9- Turn the crank (15) anti-clockwise until the springs (10)
are completely extended.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
11- Remove the base (3).
The tooling (1) is removed.
Refit 1-011170-01-xx.svg
12- Position the base (3) on the screw (13).

13- Tighten the screw (14) into contact with the screw (13).
Hold the fork (4) upwards.
14- Turn the crank (15) clowkwise up to the marker made

when removing.
Never tighten the tooling (1) fully.
15- Position the transfer arm .

16- Depending upon the machine configuration, position the
flange (9).
17- Position the washers (6).
The transfer arm is fitted.
19- Turn the crank (15) anti-clockwise until the roller (12)
comes into contact with the cam (11).

The tooling (1) is removed.
F Check the height of the transfer arm , see
procedure "BRM-002.
F Check the positions of the followers (12 ; 8) on the
cams (11 ; 7), see procedure "BDM-038.
Type (A) arm with tool (2)
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: transfer arms BDM-003 3/4
Removal
22- Follow the assembly direction indicated on the tooling A 2 16 ; 17
(2).
23- Pull the grip supports (21) and position the tooling (2).
flange (19).
27- Remove the wrench (2).
Refit
28- Pull the grip supports (21) and position the tooling (2).
flange (19).
procedure "BRM-002.
F Check the positions of the followers (18 ; 20) on the 21 20 19 18
cams , see procedure "BDM-038.
Type (B) arm
1-010318-02-xx.svg
Removal
34- Remove the transfer arm head (27), see 22 ; 23
procedure "BDM-073.
spring (25).
36- Remove the springs (26).
flange (24).
Refit
flange (24).
44- Fit the springs (26).
45- Depending upon the machine configuration, fit the 27 B 26 25 24
spring (25).
46- Fit the transfer arm head (27), see 1-008700-02-xx.svg
procedure "BDM-073.
procedure "BRM-002.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-003 Removal/refit: transfer arms 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Draining the mold and oven hydraulic circuits BDM-004 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold,
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-005,
procedure "BCU-001,
PROCEDURE
Drainage
machine.
2- Close the valves (1 ; 2).
3- Connect the drain valves (3 ; 4) to the drain using the 2
specially designed hoses.
4- Open the drain valves (3 ; 4).
The mold base water circuit is open.
9
3 4
1-006062-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-004 Draining the mold and oven hydraulic circuits 2

The oven water circuit is open.
F Wait until the water has completely drained out.
machine.
12- Disconnect the drain valve (3).
13- Connect the drain valve (3) to an low pressure air hose.
14- Turn on the low pressure air circuit.
15- Switch off the low pressure air supply.
The mold base water circuit is now closed.
5 6
1-010353-09-02.svg

The oven water circuit is closed. A
The drainage is now complete.
8
Work can now be carried out on the circuit.
7
Filling
The mold base water circuit is open.
The oven water circuit is open.
machine.
1-010348-05-02.svg
24- Close the drain valve (3).
F Make sure that the drain valve (4) is open.
25- Open the valve (1) by a 1/3.
26- As soon as the lined has drained close the drain valve
(4).
27- Open the valve (1) fully.

BEFORE YOU FINISH

The oven water circuit is closed.
family.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters BDM-005 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- filter 40 µm(1),
- filter 5 µm(2),
- filter 0,01 µm(only when the preform ionisation options
are fitted on the 3M UV rail and the infeed rail).
- vaseline,
- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- strap wrench.
PROCEDURE
Removal
3
machine.
F Check that the valve (3) is closed and padlocked.
circuit.
2- Remove the automatic purge (5).
3- Remove the bowl (6). 4
4- Unscrew and remove the support (7).
5- Remove the filter 40 µm(1).
7- Loosen and remove the filter 5 µm(2). 6
Refit
8- Clean the support (9) using a clean, dry cloth.
1-006026-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-005 Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters 2
9- Clean and check the seals (10).

· If the seals (10) are worn, replace them. 9
10- Clean the bowl (6) using a clean, dry cloth.
11- Clean the supports (7 ; 8) using the clean, dry cloth.
12- Fit the filter 5 µm(2).
13- Tighten the support (8). 2
14- Position the filter 40 µm(1).
15- Tighten the support (7). 8
16- Refit the bowl (6).
1
1-006027-01-xx.svg
17- Clean the automatic purge (5).

9
18- Refit the automatic purge (5).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The low pressure air circuit is now turned on.
10
circuit.
F Make sure that the circuit is airtight.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters BDM-006 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always replace all of the high pressure circuit filters

A
together. To replace filters on the double filtration
system (option), see procedure "BDM-041.
Danger - high pressure.
1-006030-136-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 4 2
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- filter(s) ,
- O-ring .
Consumables
- latex gloves.
Specific tools 3
- filter wrench (1).
PROCEDURE
Air recycling system filter 16
Removal
1- Bring the filter (A) round to your working position using
the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.
Turn off the power and utility supplies to the 14 13
1-006301-12-xx.svg
machine.

gauges (3 ; 4).
3- Loosen and remove the envelope (5) by inserting the
pin wrench into the slot (6).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-006 Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters 2
4- Remove the O-ring (7).

5- Loosen the filter element (8) from the filter block (9) and 9 A
remove.
Refit
6- Clean the envelope (5) using a clean dry cloth.
7- Clean the filter block (9) using the clean dry cloth.
Handle the filter element (8) by its edges.
Never touch the filter section of the filter element (8).

8
1-007396-02-xx.svg
Check the reference of the filter element to ensure

11 10
you do not confuse it with other filter elements fitted
on the machine.
8- Partly remove the wrapping from the threaded section
of the filter element (8).
Do not remove the packaging from the body of the
filter element (8).
9- Check the condition and the position of the 2 seals 8
(10).
10- Grease the thread (11) on the (8) filter and the seals 1-007395-02-xx.svg
(10) using vaseline.
Do not apply grease to the filter section of the filter
7 12
element (8).
11- Position the filter element (8).
12- Tighten up the filter element (8).
13- Remove all of the packaging.
14- Position the O-ring (7).
15- Lightly grease the thread (12) on the envelope (5).
16- Position the envelope (5).
17- Tighten the envelope (5) using the pin wrench inserted
in the slot (6).
Main supply interface panel filter

Removal 5 6
1-007397-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters BDM-006 3/4
18- Loosen the connector (13).

19- Remove the automatic purge (14).
20- Loosen the flow valve (15) but do not remove it.
21- Remove the bowl (16) using the filter wrench (1). 15
22- Remove the nut (17).
23- Remove the collar (18). 16
24- Remove the filter (19).
1
1-006321-02-xx.svg
25- Remove the seal (20).

Refit
26- Clean the base (21) using a clean, dry cloth.
27- Clean the bowl (16) using a clean, dry cloth. 21
F Visually check the cleanness of the filter (4).
· If the filter (4) is dirty, replace it.
28- Position the seal (20).
19
Hold the filter by its edges (19).
17 18
Never touch the filtering section of the filter unit (19).
1-006322-02-xx.svg
29- Partly remove the packaging from the upper part of the
filter (19). 16 20
Do not remove the packaging from the filter body

(19).
F Check the condition and the position of the seal (22).
30- Position the filter (19).
31- Position the collar (18).
32- Tighten the nut (17).

34- Lightly tighten the bowl (16) using the filter wrench (1).
35- Tighten up the screw (15).
36- Position the automatic purge (14).
1-006323-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-006 Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters 2
37- Tighten the connector (13).

22
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The high pressure air circuit is now turned on.
circuit. 19
40- Press the "TEST" key on the automatic purge (14).
F Check that the automatic purge functions correctly (14).
1-006324-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters BDM-007 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The hydraulic interface contains little water.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
- filter (1).
Consumables
Specific tools
- large tank.
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Close the valves (2). 2
4- Remove the coil (4).
5- Protect the solenoid valve (5) from splashing.
6- Position the tank under the filter blocks (6). 6
7- Remove the stoppers (7).

8- Wait until the water has completely drained out.
9- Remove the filters (1).
If the filters (1) are over-saturated check the quaity of
the water in the upstream circuits.
7 5
Refit
10- Clean the filters (6) using water, a brush and a clean,
dry cloth.
1-006325-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-007 Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters 2
11- Clean the stoppers (7) using a clean, dry cloth.

12- Clean and check the seals (8).
If the seals (8) are worn, replace them.
13- Position the filters (1) in the stoppers (7). 5
14- Position the stopper (7) / filter (1) assemblies in the filter
blocks (6).
15- Lightly tighten the stoppers (7).
3 4
1-006326-01-xx.svg
16- Wipe down the hydraulic interface using a clean, dry

cloth.
17- Position the coil (4).
18- Tighten the nut (3). 7
19- Open the valves (2).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
20- Close the safety doors. 8

21- Check the circuit for leaks with the machine in
operation. 1-006328-01-xx.svg
1-006327-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: nozzle seals. BDM-008 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never apply grease when fitting the nozzle seal (1).
Depending on the machine configuration, the nozzle

seal (1) will come with a flat washer (6) or a threaded
washer (7).
When changing a production article, replace the

nozzle seal (1) and the washer, (6) or (7).
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- nozzle seal (1).
Consumables
Specific tools
- nozzle tip holding tool (2),
- ring pull tool (3).
PROCEDURE
Removal

3
procedure "BCU-013.
2
1-006329-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-008 Removal/refit: nozzle seals. 2
3- Hold the nozzle tip (4) using the nozzle tip holding tool
(2) and remove the ring (5) using the ring pull tool (3). 4
If there is a threaded washer (7), do not replace it.
4- Remove the washer (6).

Do not damage the thread on the ring (5).
5- Remove the nozzle seal (1).

Refit
6- Clean the nozzle tip (4), the ring (5) and the washer (6)
using a clean, dry cloth.
7- Replace the nozzle seal (1).
2 5 3
1-007790-01-xx.svg
1-006331-01-xx.svg
If there is a threaded washer (7), make sure that it is 4

fully tightened.
8- Position the washer (6).
9- Position the ring (5) on the nozzle tip (4).
10- Hold the nozzle tip (4) using the tooling (2) and tighten
the ring (5) using the ring pull (3). 7

12- Repeat as above, from step 3 until you have replaced
all of the nozzle seals (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check all of the nozzle seals (1) with the machine in
production.
1-010393-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: spindle chain links BDM-010 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always use original parts to ensure that they have

been commissioned and self-lubricated (except when
fitting new parts).
MACHINE STATUS
- no articles in machine,
- oven cold.

procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- torque wrench 10 to 50 Nm,
- light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock.
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
Removal
If there is a measurement kit, note the value indicated

on the ruler (1) of the tensioner wheel .
2- Slightly loosen the spindle chain to free the spindle tips
(2), see procedure "BRM-003.
1-010779-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-010 Removal/refit: spindle chain links 2
3- Note the respective positions of the spindle sprockets

(2) and the sheaths (8) on the links (9, 10, 11).
4- Depending on the machine configuration, remove the
ejectors (3) and the spindle tips (4), see
5- Remove the sprocket (2)/shaft (5) assemblies, see 4
procedure "BDM-013.
6- Remove the nut (6)/ring (7) assemblies.
7- Remove the sheaths (8). 5
The spindle chain may come away.
Do not degrease the sheaths (8).
8- Remove the H link (9).

9- Repeat steps 3 to 8, to remove the required number of
H links (9).
1-0012161-02-xx.svg
Refit
F Check the condition of the rings (7).
F Check the condition and cleanness of the H links (9).
F Check the condition and cleanness of the articulated
links (10 ; 11).
F Check the condition and the cleanness of the bushings
8
(12).
F Check the orientation of the seal plane (13) on the 14
bushings (12).
10- If necessary, replace the following parts. 9
Always follow the orientation of the articulated links 13 12

(10 ; 11) and the H links (9) with regard to the original
setting.
11- Position the articulated links (10 ; 11) in the H links (9). 10
12- Position the sheaths (8) in the links (9 ; 10 ; 11).

11
13- Apply a light threadlock "LOCTITE 222" to the threaded
part (14).
14- Position the nut (6)/ring (7) assemblies on the sheaths
(8). 12 7 6
15- Tighten the nuts (6) to a torque of 40 Nm.
16- Repeat steps 11 to 15. 1-0012162-01-xx.svg
The spindle chain is now secure.
17- Fit the spindle sprockets (2), see procedure "BDM-013.
18- Install the spindle tips (4), see procedure "BDM-012.
19- Set the spindle chain tension, see
procedure "BRM-003.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: spindle chain links BDM-010 3/4
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-010 Removal/refit: spindle chain links 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases BDM-011 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never unscrew the fixing bolts holding the mold base

onto the spacer as this may affect their precise
positioning.

procedure "BSU-001.
Working on hot molds or hot mold bases:
mold. In these cases always follow the following safety 1-006030-01-xx.svg
instructions:

stipulated risks.

MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
- locking system holding brace ,
- Mold base removal/refit assistance (1),
- torque wrench 10 to 50 N.m,
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-011 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases 2
Wear protective glasses.

5

procedure "BCU-013.
position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3 4
procedure "BSU-001.
Insert the locking system holding brace, see
procedure "BSU-001.
F Working on hot molds or hot mold bases.
- If yes.
2 1
· Stop the thermoregulator(s).
4- Shut off the supply to the hydraulic circuit, see 1-006195-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-008.
The mold body water circuit is closed.
5- Purge the circuit of a few centiliters, see
procedure "BDM-043.
Mold base
Removal
6- Disconnect the hoses (2).
7- Connect the mold base removal/refit assistance (1) to
the carriage (3) via the connector (4).
The carriage (3) is no longer carrying the mold base
(5).
Never unscrew the fixing bolts holding the mold base
onto the spacer as this may affect their precise
positioning.
8- Remove the mold base (5).
Refit
6
9- Clean the carriage (3) using a clean, dry cloth.
10- Grease the carriage (3) using the "LUB A15" grease
and a paintbrush. 1
11- Position the mold base (5).
12- Disconnect the mold base removal/refit assistance (1).
13- Reconnect the mold base removal/refit assistance (1) to

its support (6).
14- Reconnect the hoses (2).
1-006196-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases BDM-011 3/4
Mold
Removal
15- Loosen the screws (7) but do not remove them.
16- Remove the flange (8). 10
17- Tilt out and remove the mold shell (9).
18- Repeat steps 15 to 17, to remove the opposite mold 8
(9).
Refit 7
19- Clean all of the contact surfaces of the mold shell (10)
20- Grease the contact surfaces of the mold shell supports
(10) applying the "LUB A15" grease with a paintbrush.
1-006197-01-xx.svg
21- Position the mold shell (9) on its support (10).

22- Position the flange (8) so that it rests on the mold shell
(9).
Tighten the bolts (7) to a torque of 16,7 N.m. Make 10
sure that you use the right class of bolt (7) if you are
replacing them. The bolt (7) class is 12-9.
24- Repeat steps 21 to 23, to fit the opposite mold shell (9). 9
If the right mold shell is fitted with a heat sensor,

reconnect it during this procedure.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-006198-01-xx.svg
25- Grease the mold cavities, see procedure "BGM-011.

If the "Kohlox TM" option is present, do not grease the
mold cavities.
10
procedure "BSU-001.
27- Close the mold support unit manually, see 8
procedure "BSU-001.
F Make sure there is no excess stress when the mold 9

support unit closes.
F Make sure that the mold shells (9) do not come into
contact with the mold base (5).
28- Turn on the air and water supplies, see
procedure "BCU-005.
The mold body water circuit is open.
The mold base water circuit is open. 1-006199-01-xx.svg
F Working on hot molds or hot mold bases.

- If yes.
· Start the related thermoregulator(s)..
F Check for leaks.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-011 Removal/refit: molds and mold bases 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: spindle tips BDM-012 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

fitting new parts).
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
- primary electrical circuit under power, see 1-006030-119-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- spindle tip.
Consumables
- alcohol at 70 % does not need to be rinsed (non-
residual),
Specific tools
- spindle holding tool (1).
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-012 Removal/refit: spindle tips 1

machine.
2
3- Use the JOG system to bring the spindle up to your
6
working position, see procedure "BCU-013.
5
1-0012161-01-xx.svg
Type (A)
Removal
4- Remove the ejector (2) manually (depending on the
machine configuration) .
5- Hold the sprocket (3) using the tool (1).
Position an appropriate wrench fully home in the body
of the spindle tip (4).
6- Unscrew the spindle (4) using the appropriate wrench.
The spindle tips (4) are fitted with a light threadlock
"LOCTITE 222". Unscrewing the spindle tips (4) may 4
prove difficult at first.
7- Remove the spindle tip (4).
1-0012211-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: spindle tips BDM-012 3/4
Refit
8- Clean the end of the spindle shaft (5) and the new
spindle tip (4) using a clean, dry cloth.
9- Apply a light threadlock "LOCTITE 222" to the threaded
part (6).
10- Position the new spindle tip (4).
1
11- Hold the sprocket (3) using the tool (1).
Position an appropriate wrench fully home in the body 1-0012202-01-xx.svg
of the spindle tip (4).
12- Tighten the spindle tip (4) using an appropriate wrench.
F Make sure that the spindle tip (4) is securely fitted.
Do not degrease the other parts by applying an

excessive amount of disinfectant.
13- Disinfect the spindle tip(s) (4) with a cloth dipped in
alcohol 70%.
F Check the condition and the position of the seal
(7) (depending on the machine configuration) .
14- Clip the ejector (2) (depending on the machine
configuration) .
15- Disinfect the spindle tip (4) and the ejector (2) using a
paintbrush dipped in alcohol at 70 %.
Type (B)
Removal
16- Remove the ejector (2) manually (depending on the
machine configuration) .
17- Turn the spindle tip (4) counter-clockwise.
18- Remove the spindle tip (4) by hand.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-012 Removal/refit: spindle tips 1
Refit
19- Clean the end of the spindle shaft (8 ; 9) and the new
spindle tip (4) using a clean, dry cloth. B
20- Position the new spindle tip (4).
21- Turn the spindle tip (4) clockwise.
The spindle tip (4) is clipped. 4
F Make sure that the spindle tip (4) is securely fitted.
Do not degrease the other parts by applying an

excessive amount of disinfectant.
8
22- Disinfect the spindle tip(s) (4) with a cloth dipped in
alcohol 70%.
F Check the condition and the position of the seal
(7) (depending on the machine configuration) .
23- Clip the ejector (2) (depending on the machine
configuration) .
24- Disinfect the spindle tip (4) and the ejector (2) using a 9
paintbrush dipped in alcohol at 70 %.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-0012203-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: spindle sprockets BDM-013 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The denominations "upper" and "lower" sprockets

designate the sprockets at the oven wheel with the
spindle tip pointing downwards.

fitting new parts).
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold, 1-006030-119-xx.svg
- no articles in machine.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- spindle sprocket.
Consumables
Specific tools
- external elastic ring grip.
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-013 Removal/refit: spindle sprockets 2

machine.
4
3- Position the spindle sprocket you need to remove
6 1
opposite your working position using the JOG
system, see procedure "BCU-013. 7
Removal
4- Remove the spindle tip (1), see procedure "BDM-012. 9
To remove the lower sprocket (2), first remove the 2

adjacent upper sprockets (3).
5- Remove the elastic ring (4), (depending on the machine
configuration).
6- Remove the bayonet ring (5), spring (6) and support
ring (7). 8 2
7- Remove the sprocket (2 ;3) / shaft (8) assembly.

Refit
Do not grease the shaft (8).

3
8- Clean the shaft (8) using a clean dry cloth.
Always install the lower sprockets (2) before the upper
sprockets (3). 1-0012163-01-xx.svg
9- Position the sprocket (2 ; 3) / shaft (8) assembly in the

sheath (9).
10- Position the support ring (7).
11- Position the spring (6).
12- Position the bayonet ring (5).
13- Position the elastic ring (4), (depending on the machine
configuration).
14- Install the spindle tips (1), see procedure "BDM-012.
BEFORE YOU FINISH


27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder BDM-014 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.
1-006030-18-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 14 9 1 11
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
J
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables 21 2 13 20 10
None
- set of thickness gauges,

- flare-nut wrench 42-22 x 24.
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Advance the stretching cylinder (1) in question on the
horizontal part of the stretching cam (2), using manual
rotation, see procedure "BCU-014. 4
2- Switch off the low pressure air supply, see
procedure "BCU-011.
machine.
5- Disconnect the hoses (3).
The control block (4) is now isolated from the low
pressure air circuit. 1-006502-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-014 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder 2

8- Purge the stretching cylinder (1) using the button (7).
The stretching cylinder (1) is no longer blocked in the
up-position and the rod can slide freely.
The indicator (8) shows the level of residual pressure
in the cylinder. 5
9- Remove the fixing bolts (9).
Do not lose the fixing bolt washers.
10- Loosen the nut (10). 6

11- Unscrew the rod (11) on the stretching cylinder (1)
using the pipe wrench .
12- Remove the stretching cylinder (1).
1-006505-01-xx.svg
The slide (13) rests on the stretching cam (2).
Refit
Carry out the procedure on the horizontal part of the

stretching cam (2), the slide (13) in the up-position.
7
13- Position the stretching cylinder (1) on the support (14).
14- Screw the rod (11) into the ball-joint (20). 8
16- Position the fastening bolt (9) and the washers of the
stretch cylinder (1).
17- Tighten the fixing bolts (9).
18- Reconnect the hoses (3).
19- Fit the coil (6). 1-006371-02-xx.svg
20- Turn on the low pressure air supply to the machine, see
procedure "BCU-005.
22- Turn on the main machine circuit, see
procedure "BCU-002.

now active.
The stretching cylinder (1) stops at the up-position.
F Make sure that there are no leaks on the pneumatic
circuit.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder BDM-014 3/4

machine.
27- Loosen the nut (10).
"J" represents the gap between the cam follower (21)
and the stretching cam (2).
28- Tighten or loosen the stretching cylinder (1) rod (11) to
set the gap J = 0,2 ±0,1 mm, using a thickness gauge to
measure it.
29- Hold the rod (11) using the pipe wrench and tighten the
nut (10).
now cut off.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
15 16
1-006057-09-02.svg
32- Position the stretching cylinder (1) at the rear of the
machine using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU
-013.
B
machine.
35- Purge the stretching cylinder (1) using the button (7). 18
F Check the slide guide (13).
37- Enter the number of the blowing station using the keys
(19). 17
The number of the blowing station selected appears in
the zone (C).
19
now active. C
39- Press the (18) key. 1-007621-04-02.svg
The stretching cylinder stops at the down-position.


now cut off.
family.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-014 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - mold compensation seal BDM-016 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

procedure "BSU-001.
Do not damage the mold shells.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
3
procedure "BCU-002,
7
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, 5
- cold molds.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A

4
Parts
- compensation seal (12), 1-011882-03-xx.svg
Consumables
A
- cleaning agent "NET A04", 1
- "LOCTITE 243" threadlock. 2
Specific tools
9 5
- set of thickness gauges, 10 6
- 2 slings (13) supplied with the set of molds. 11
PROCEDURE

1-011881-03-xx.svg
machine.
procedure "BCU-013.
4- Depending upon the machine configuration, disconnect
the neck cooling lines on the mold (3).
5- Depending upon the machine configuration, disconnect
the shell support cooling lines (4).
6- Disconnect the compensation line (7).
procedure "BSU-001.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-016 Removal/refit - mold compensation seal 2

9- Remove the mold from blowing station , see 8 12
procedure "BDM-011.
10- Remove the mold base on the station concerned , see
procedure "BDM-011.
Removal
11- Hold the nut (5) and unscrew the lock bolt (6).
12- Remove the counter-bolts (6). 9
14- Repeat steps 11 to 13 until all of the parts (5) have
been removed.
1-006458-03-xx.svg
15- Remove the left shell support assembly (9).
16- Remove the compensation seal (12). 5 12
17- Remove the plugs (1). 2
Refit
18- Clean the contact surfaces using a clean cloth sprayed 7 8
with cleaning agent "NET A04".
Never apply grease when fitting the compensation
seal (12). 1
19- Position the compensation seal (12) in the shell support
(9).
20- Hold the left shell support (9), the compensation seal
9
(12) using slings (13).
21- Insert the plugs (1) in the shell support (9). 6
22- Apply threadlock "LOCTITE 243" on the thread on the 4
pin (8).
Make sure that you do not lose the plugs (1) when 1-011883-02-xx.svg
positioning the left shell (9) on the left support block
(2).
23- Position the left shell support (9) on the left support
block (2).
24- Fit the nuts (5) on the pins (8).
25- Remove the slings (13).
26- Set the gap X = 0,05 mm +/- 0,02 between the holding
bars (10; 11), see procedure "BRM-021.
9 12 10 X 11
27- Set gap Y = 1,2 mm +/- 0,05, see
procedure "BRM-021.
1-011884-03-xx.svg
28- Apply threadlock "LOCTITE 243" to the lock bolt (6).
29- Screw the lock bolt (6) into the nut (5).
30- Hold the nut (5) and tighten the lock bolt (6) to a torque
of 30 Nm.
31- Repeat steps 28 to 30 until all of the elements (6) have
been installed
32- Fit the mold base , see procedure "BDM-011.
33- Fit the mold , see procedure "BDM-011.
34- Grease the molds, see procedure "BGM-011.
procedure "BSU-001.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - mold compensation seal BDM-016 3/4

procedure "BSU-001.
37- Connect the compensation line (7).
38- Depending upon the machine configuration, connect the
shell support lines (4).
39- Depending upon the machine configuration, connect the
neck cooling lines on the mold (3).
40- Bring the next station around to your working position
41- Repeat steps 4 to 40 until all of the components have 5
been replaced (12). Y
BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-011885-02-xx.svg

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-016 Removal/refit - mold compensation seal 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: shock absorber and lower stretching thrust BDM-017 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

Replace the stretching thrust (8) with an identical

stretching thrust, with the same reference.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
- Shock absorber (1),
- lower stretching thrust (8).
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
Removing shock absorber (1)
2- Bring the blowing station around to your working 2

3- Purge the stretching cylinder using the button (2). 3
The stretching cylinder is no longer blocked in the up-
position and the rod can slide freely.
The indicator (3) indicates the pressure remaining in
the cyclinder.
4- Lower the slide (4) manually.
5- Remove the counter-nut (5). 1-006371-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-017 Removal/refit: shock absorber and lower stretching thrust 1
7- Remove the absorber (1) on the slide (4).

Refitting shock absorber (1)
8- Clean the contact surfaces of the slide (4), the nut (6)
and the counter nut (5) using a clean, dry cloth.
9- Screw the new absorber (1) fully into the nut (6).
10- Screw the absorber (1)/nut (6) assembly fully into the
slide (4).
11- Tighten the lock-nut (5). 1
12- Connect the JOG to zone "0" on the PCC, see
1-006506-01-xx.svg

supplied.
no longer supplied.
15- If necessary, repeat the previous steps from step 1 until
the complete replacement of the shock absorbers (1) of
the lower stretching thrust
Removing stretching thrust (8) 1-010349-03-02.svg

The stretching thrust (8) is installed free of constraint
in the thrust support (9).
17- Remove the thrust (8) by lifting it.
18- Note dimension H.
10
1-011544-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: shock absorber and lower stretching thrust BDM-017 3/4
Refitting stretching thrust (8)

19- Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths.
20- Check dimension H.
8
· If the gap is correct.
Go to the next step. H
· If the gap is not correct.
Adjust the height of the thrust (8) using the nut (10)
until dimension H is obtained.
21- Position the thrust (8) in the thrust support (9).
22- If necessary, repeat steps 16 to 21 until all the lower
stretching thrusts (8) have been replaced.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-011545-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-017 Removal/refit: shock absorber and lower stretching thrust 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: upstream feed unit BDM-018 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- infeed rail (1) and feed block (2) cleared of preforms,
procedure "BCU -012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Loosen the 2 cross-nuts (3). 1
4
3- Remove the 2 locking nuts (4).
5- Remove the feed block (2). 3
Refit
6- Clean the contact surfaces on the feed block (2) using a
clean, dry cloth.
7- Position the feed block (2).
8- Tighten the bolts (5). 2
9- Tighten the cross-nuts (3 ; 4).
1-006216-01-xx.svg
10- Check the gap at the roller (6), stabilizer rails (7), infeed
rail (1) assembly using a preform.
· Set the gap between the rails (6), see
· Set the gap at the stabilizer rails (7), see

· Set the infeed rail (1), see procedure "BRM -011. 5
1-006215-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-018 Removal/refit: upstream feed unit 1

1-006217-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: downstream feed unit BDM-019 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- rail and infeed wheel cleared of preforms.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
1-006030-10-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
1-006218-02-xx.svg
The visual may be different depending on the

3
machine model ad configuration.
2- Remove the pipe (1).
4- Remove the feed block (3).

If necessary change the infeed wheel, see
procedure "BDM-020, before refitting. 1
Refit
5- Clean the contact surfaces on the feed block (3) using a
clean, dry cloth.
6- Clean the infeed block (3).
Position the infeed block (3) using the guide studs.
2
7- Fit the infeed block (3).
8- Tighten the bolts (2). 1-010468-01-xx.svg
9- Fit the pipe (1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-019 Removal/refit: downstream feed unit 1
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable BDM-020 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
- infeed wheel cleared of preforms.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Remove the feed block (1), see procedure "BDM -019.
If the "vision system" option is installed, disengage the
camera, see procedure "BCU -036.
3- Loosen the grip nut (2).
4- Remove the infeed wheel (3). 3 2 1
Refit
5- Clean the infeed wheel (3) and its support using a
clean, dry cloth.
position the wheel (3) using the guide studs.
6- Fit the infeed wheel (3).

7- Fit the nut (2) and tighten.
8- Fit the infeed block (1), see procedure "BDM -019.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-020 Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: infeed guide BDM-021 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
3- Remove the infeed guide (2).
Refit
4- Clean the infeed guide (2) and its support using a clean,
dry cloth.
Position the infeed guide (2) using the guide studs.
5- Fit the infeed guide (2).

BEFORE YOU FINISH

1 2
1-006084-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-021 Removal/refit: infeed guide 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide BDM-022 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Pivot out the retractable infeed guide (1) manually.
Refit
4- Clean the retractable infeed guide (1) and the mobile
support (3) using a clean, dry cloth.
Position the retractable infeed guide (1) using the
guide studs.
5- Fit the retractable infeed guide (1) on the mobile
support (3).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
7- Close the safety doors. 1 2 3

1-006084-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-022 Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable BDM-023 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The oven wheel infeed wheel is composed of 3

sectors each of the same dimension. Each sector is
carries a reference at its edge.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
- infeed and oven cleared of preforms.
1-006030-10-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
2
machine.
2- Remove the feed block , see procedure "BDM -019. 3
3- Remove the infeed wheel , see procedure "BDM -020.
4- Remove the infeed guide , see procedure "BDM -021.
Note the order in which the infeed wheel (1) is
assembled. 1
5- Position the first sector on the oven wheel (2) infeed
wheel (1) opposite the working position using the JOG 1-006220-01-xx.svg
system, see procedure "BCU -013.

6- Remove the bolts (3) from the first sector on the infeed
wheel (1).
7- Remove the first sector of the infeed wheel (1).
Refit
8- Clean the 3 sectors on the infeed wheel (1) using a
clean, dry cloth.
9- Clean the mountings on the first sector of the infeed 4
wheel (1) using a clean, dry cloth.
10- Position the first sector on the infeed wheel (1) on the 2
oven wheel (2) using the centering pins (4).
11- Insert the bolts (3) into the first sector on the infeed
wheel (1) and tighten up.
12- Position the next sector opposite the working position 1-006219-01-xx.svg
using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU -013.
13- Repeat steps 6 and 12 to replace the second and third
sectors on the infeed wheel.
14- Fit the infeed guides, see procedure "BDM -021.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-023 Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable 1
15- Fit the preform infeed wheel, see procedure "BDM

-020.
16- Fit the infeed block , see procedure "BDM -019.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: transfer grips BDM-024 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The transfer arm type (A ; B ; C ; D) may be different

for the preform transfer wheel and the bottle transfer
wheel.
The preform and bottle transfer grips are different; the

preform transfer grips are spread further apart than
the bottle transfer grips.
1-006030-02-xx.svg
Do not invert the preform and bottle grips when
refitting them.
Certain parts have been fitted using threadlock . They

may be difficult to disassemble.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001, A C D
B
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- transfer grips.

Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
procedure "BCU-013.
F If the machine is fitted with the vision system (Option) .
3- Open the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036.
4- Bring the transfer arm around to your working position
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-024 Removal/refit: transfer grips 1
4 5
1-010324-02-xx.svg
Grip (1 ; 4) of transfer arm type (A ; B ; C)
Removal
5- Hold the right grip (1).
6- Loosen the bolt (2). 5 4
7- Remove the grip (1)/screw (2)/washer (3) assembly.
8- Hold the left grip (4). 6 1
2
10- Remove the grip (4)/screw (5)/washer (6) assembly.
F Make sure that no washers remain stuck on the grip
support . 3
Refit
11- Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths. 1-010323-01-xx.svg
12- If necessary, fit the screw (2 ; 5) and the washer (3 ; 6)

on the grip (1 ; 4).
bolts (2 ; 5).
14- Position the right grip and hold it (1).

16- Position the left grip and hold it (4).
18- Repeat steps 5 to 17, to replace all of the transfer grips
(1 ; 4).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: transfer grips BDM-024 3/4
Grip (10 ; 14) of transfer arm type (D)
Do not adjust the setting of the thrust screw (16).
Removal
19- Hold the head (7) of the transfer arm . 7
21- Remove the bolt (8) and the washer (9). 8
22- Remove the transfer grip (10).
9
23- Hold the head (7) of the transfer arm .
24- Loosen the bolt (12). 11
25- Remove the bolt (12) and the washer (13). 10 12
13
Refit
27- Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths. 15
28- Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock to the bolts (8 ; 12). 16 14
29- Position the transfer grip (10) in the grip support (11).
30- Position the washer (9). 1-013657-01-xx.svg
31- Insert the fixing screws (8) and tighten up.

32- Position the transfer grip (14) in the grip support (15).
34- Insert the fixing screws (12) and tighten up.
35- Repeat steps 19 to 34, to replace all of the transfer
grips (10 ; 14).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

36- Close the vision system, see procedure "BCU-36.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-024 Removal/refit: transfer grips 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: nozzle tip BDM-025 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

procedure "BSU-001.
You do not always need to open and close the mold

support unit; that will depend on the height of the
nozzle tip (4).
When changing a production article, replace the rim

support (10).
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 3
- primary electrical circuit under power, see 1 2
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None 1-010139-01-xx.svg
Consumables
Specific tools
- nozzle tip holding tool (1),
- nozzle cylinder piston rod holding tool (2),
- spanner wrench (3).
PROCEDURE
Removal
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-025 Removal/refit: nozzle tip 2

procedure "BSU-001. 3 5
procedure "BSU-001.
5- Hold the piston rod (6) using the nozzle cylinder piston
rod holding tool (2).
6- Loosen the nut (5) using the spanner wrench (3).
1-010380-01-xx.svg
7- Loosen the nozzle tip (4) using the nozzle tip holding
tool (1).
8- Remove the nozzle tip (4).
9- Remove the O-ring (7) using a small screwdriver. 2 6
10- Remove the spring thrust (8).
11- Remove the spring (9).
12- Remove the rim support (10).
13- Remove the nozzle ring and the washer , see 1 4
procedure "BDM-008.
1-010379-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: nozzle tip BDM-025 3/4
Refit
14- Clean the nozzle tip (4), the spring thrust (8), the spring 7
(9) and the rim support (10) using a clean, dry cloth.
15- Position the washer (13)/nozzle seal /washer *3 8 9
assembly on the nozzle tip (4), see
procedure "BDM-008.
10
F Check the O-ring (7).
· If the seal (7) is worn replace it.
16- Position the rim support (10). 11 12
18- Position the spring thrust (8).
19- Position the O-ring (7) in the groove. 4
F Make sure that the safety ring is in the correct position
on the nozzle (12).
F Make sure that the spacer is in the correct position
(11).
The chamfer on the spacer (11) should be facing 13
upwards.
1-010378-01-xx.svg
20- Clean the piston rod (6) using a clean, dry cloth.
11
21- Fit the nozzle tip (4).
22- Tighten the nozzle tip (4) by hand.
23- Hold the piston rod (6) using the nozzle cylinder piston 12
rod holding tool (2).
24- Tighten the nozzle tip (4) using the holding tool (1).
25- Tighten the nut (5) using the spanner wrench (3).
26- Remove the locking system holding brace , see 4
procedure "BSU-001.
27- Close the mold support unit manually.
position using the JOG system, see 1-010381-02-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-013.
29- Repeat as above, from step 3 for each nozzle tip (4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-025 Removal/refit: nozzle tip 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: stretching rod BDM-026 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.

contamination.
1-006030-18-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- stretching station in the raised position.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None 1
Consumables
Specific tools
- clean, dry paintbrush. 1-006225-01-xx.svg
PROCEDURE 5
Removal

1
3- Clean the lip seal (5) using a clean, dry brush.
4- Pull the indexing pin (2).
The stretching rod (1) is no longer locked on the shaft.
Turn and raise the stretching rod manually (1) to 1-006698-01-xx.svg
extract it from the casing (3).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-026 Removal/refit: stretching rod 1
5- Remove the stretching rod (1).

Refit 2 4
6- Clean the stretching rod (1) using a clean, dry cloth.
7- Carefully insert the stretching rod (1) into the casing
(3).
8- Pull the indexing the pin (2) and insert the stretching rod
(1) fully into the casing (3).
9- Release the indexing pin (2).
10- Manually turn the stretching rod (1) until the indexing 3
pin clicks in (2).
The stretching rod (1) is now locked.
F Check that the indexing pin (2) is up against the nut (4).
F Make sure that the stretching rod (1) is securely fitted.
11- Repeat as above from stage 2 until you have replaced
all of the stretching rods (1). 1-007371-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH
12- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: stretching cam BDM-027 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.

technicians.
1-006030-33-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None 1-010353-04-02.svg
PROCEDURE A


The stretching cylinders stop in raised position. 2
1-010342-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-027 Removal/refit: stretching cam 2
Removal
machine.
5- Disassemble the bracket (11).
regulations.
machine.
11 10
technicians: 1-007974-01-xx.svg
- 1 technician(s), situated on the upper part of the

frame, remove(s) and refit(s) the component (20).
- 1 technician(s), situated in the machine, handle(s)
the components (20).
8- Slide the cover plate (20) to the edge of the frame (13).
9- Remove the cover plate (20).
technicians:
F Check the sensor (6) support (5) is present on the new B 12 C D 13 7 12
stretching cam (7).
- If yes. 1-007976-01-xx.svg
· Disconnect the "B13.0" sensor (6).
- If not.
· Remove the nut (3) and the washer (4).
· Disassemble the support (5) / "B13.0" sensor
(6).
· Disconnect the "B13.0" sensor (6).
· Install the support (5) on the new cam (7).
· Fit the nut (3) and the washer (4).
· Tighten the nut (3).
20 21 C
11- Remove the fixing bolts (8). 1-009007-01-xx.svg
12- Slide the stretching cam (7) to the edge of the chassis
(13). 6
13- Remove the stretching cam (7).
Refit
14- Clean the bearing surfaces of the chassis (13) and the
stretching cam (7). 3
D
technicians:
- 2 technician(s), situated on the upper part of the 4
5
15- Position the cam (7) on the machine frame (13).
1-007975-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: stretching cam BDM-027 3/4

technicians:
- 1 technician(s), situated in the machine, handle(s)
the components (20).
18- Position the cover plate (20).
19- Fit and tighten the bolts (21).
20- Connect the "B13.0" sensor (6).
technicians.
21- Position the bracket (11).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
23- Load the required production recipe, see

procedure "BPU-005.
24- Set points "P0" and "P10", see procedure "BPU-001.
family.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-027 Removal/refit: stretching cam 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide BDM-028 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- oven outfeed cleared of preforms.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None 1-006030-05-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Bring the transfer grips around using the JOG system to
free the oven outfeed guide (1), see procedure "BCU
-013.
4- Remove the oven outfeed guide (1).
Refit
5- Clean the oven outfeed guide (1) and the contact
surfaces using a clean, dry cloth.
6- Position the oven outfeed guide (1) using the guide
pins.
8- Make sure that the oven outfeed guide (1) is securely
fitted.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-028 Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributor (lower command) BDM-029 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure applies to equipped cylinders, with

lower controls.
Removing the stretching cylinder will make removing

and refitting the distributor easier, see
procedure "BDM-014.

regulations.
1-006030-18-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
1
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
2
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-014535-01-xx.svg
Parts
- stretching distributor seal (3), 1
- stretching distributor (1).

Consumables
- "LUB 28" grease, supplied with the set of seals.
Specific tools 3
- clean, dry paintbrush,
4
- torque wrench 1 to 5 N.m.
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Advance the desired blowing station until it is opposite
1-014536-01-xx.svg
the work station using manual rotation, see 7
procedure "BCU-014.
machine.
4- Remove the stretching cylinder (1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-029 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributor (lower command) 2
Refit
6- Clean the base (4) using a clean, dry cloth. 1
7- Grease the groove (5) for the stretching distributor seal
(3) and the stretching distributor (1) using the "LUB 28"
grease.
8- Position the stretching distributor seal (3) in the groove
5
(5) on the stretching distributor (1).
9- Grease the surface of the stretching distributor (3) using
the "LUB 28". 3
10- Position the new distributor (1) on the base (4).
1-014537-01-xx.svg
11- Tighten the fixing bolts (2) crosswise to a torque of 4
N.m.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

13- Control the performance of the stretching cyclinder , see
procedure "BPU-006.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals BDM-030 1/8
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure applies to equipped cylinders, with

lower controls.
To carry out this operation, remove the cylinder from

the machine, see procedure "BDM-014.
If you are using a vice, make sure that the jaws are
shaped to the cylinder body so as not to damage it.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- set of seals. 1
Consumables
- grease, supplied with the set of seals.
Specific tools
- clean, dry paintbrush,
- thin, non-metallic spatula.
- grips for inner elastic rings.
PROCEDURE 1-006257-01-xx.svg
Removing the cylinder rod

1- Remove the stretching cylinder , see
procedure "BDM-029.
2- Disconnect the hose connecting the top and bottom
sections of the cylinder.
4- Loosen the bolts (2).
1-006260-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/8 BDM-030 Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals 3

Do not remove the non-return valve and the silencers
from the base (3).
3
25
1-006258-01-xx.svg
6- Remove the counter-nut (4).
1-006101-01-xx.svg
1-006259-01-xx.svg
8- Remove the holding plate (6) and the end-piece from

the cylinder body (7).
6 7
1-006253-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

8
1-006249-01-xx.svg
10- Remove the base block (9).

Do not scratch the rod or the cylinder body.
1-006254-01-xx.svg
11- Remove the cylinder rod (10).
10
1-006250-01-xx.svg
Removing the seals
12- Clean the cylinder rod (10) using a clean, dry brush.
Never use objects that may damage these parts,
especially their ridges and grooves. 13
13- Remove the supporting segment (11).
11
12
1-006251-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
14- Remove the 2 lip-seals (12 ; 13) using a fine, non-

metallic spatula.
15- Remove the O-ring (14) from the cylinder body end-
piece (7).
12
1-006255-01-xx.svg
The number of lip seals varies depending on the

27
machine configuration. 15
16- Depending on the configuration, remove the lip seal
(27) or the 2 lip seals (15 ; 16) using a thin non-metallic
16
spatula.
1-011426-01-xx.svg
17- Remove the 2 O-rings (17 ; 18) located on the cylinder

end-piece (7) on the base block (9). 9
17
1-006241-01-xx.svg
18- Remove the cusioning seal (19) from the base block (9)
using a fine, non-metallic spatula.
19
1-006245-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
19- Remove the elastic ring (20).
9 20
1-006242-01-xx.svg
20- Remove the flow valve (21).

22
21- Remove the seal (22) from the flow valve (21).
21
1-006246-01-xx.svg
Fitting the seals
Do not scratch the rod or the cylinder body.
22- Clean the cylinder rod and the seal grooves using a
clean dry cloth.
23- Grease the seal grooves, the seals and the cylinder rod
(10) applying the grease with a paintbrush supplied with
the set of seals.
1-006247-01-xx.svg
1-006243-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
24- Position the lip-seal (12) on the rod (10).

Fit the lip-seal (12) into its groove making sure that
the lipped sections are facing outwards.
12
1-006244-01-xx.svg
25- Position the supporting segment (11) on the rod (10).
10
11
1-006238-01-xx.svg
26- Insert the rod (10) into the cylinder body (23).
27- Push the rod (10) to the other side of the cylinder body
(23) to access (only) the lip-sea; groove (13).
10
23
1-006248-01-xx.svg
28- Position the lip-seal (13) in the groove.

29- Insert the cylinder rod (10) fitted with the 2 lip-seals
(12 ; 13) into the cylinder body (23).
23 10
13
1-006234-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
30- Grease the end of the cylinder rod (10) applying the
grease with clean, dry paintbrush supplied with the set 23
of seals.
31- Clean the cylinder body end-piece (7) using a clean dry
cloth.
10
1-006239-01-xx.svg
32- Grease the seal groove (24) using the grease supplied
with the set of seals.
24 7
1-006235-01-xx.svg
33- Depending on the configuration, position the lip seal(s)

(27) or (16 ; 15) in the groove (24).
- If there is one single seal in the groove (24).
· Position the seal (27) into the groove as indicated in 16 7
the illustration.
- If there are 2 seals in the groove (24).
· Position the seal (16) into the groove as shown in
the illustration.
· Position the seal (15) into the groove as indicated in
the illustration.
1-006236-01-xx.svg
34- Clean the cylinder base block (9) using a clean, dry
cloth.
35- Grease the base block supports (9) using the grease
supplied with the set of seals.
15
1-006240-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
36- Position the cushioning seal (19) in its groove as

indicated in the illustration.
37- Position the seal (22) on the flow valve (21).
38- Screw the flow valve (21) into the base block (9) without 19
tightening it..
39- Position the elastic ring (20). 9
40- Position the seals (14 ; 17 ; 18 ) on the base block (9)
on the cylinder body end-piece (7).
1-006237-01-xx.svg
Assembling the various cylinder components
41- Position the base block (9) on the cylinder body (23). 6 7
42- Tighten the bolts (8) to a torque of 10 N.m.

43- Fit the cylinder body end-piece (7) and the holding plate 23
(6) on the cylinder body (23).
The screw-holes (24) on the holding plate (6), the 5
connector (25) on the cylinder body end-piece (7) and
the pneumatic connector on the base block (9) should
all be lined up with each other.
1-006233-01-xx.svg
44- Lightly screw in the fixing bolts (5).

25
45- Screw the check nut (4) on the cylinder rod (10).
46- Position the base (3) on the connector (25).
47- Tighten the bolts (2) to a torque of 9 N.m. 24
7
50- Connect the hose (26) connecting the top and bottom
sections of the cylinder.
51- Fit the stretching cylinder , see procedure "BDM-029.
1-006231-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Operating checks
F Check the cylinder before fitting it onto the machine
- it has not been damaged,
- the air purge works properly 7 bar,
- the non-return air valve works efficiently 7 bar,
- there are no leaks.

Wipe off any excess grease from the cylinder rod 21
(10).
Adjusting the cylinder damping
52- Tighten up the flow valve (21) as far as it will go.
53- Loosen the flow valve (21) by 2½ two turns.
Reset the damping system afer the first few machine
operating cycles. 26
Fitting the equipped cylinder on the machine

54- see procedure "BDM -014.
1-006232-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts BDM-031 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never attempt to run the machine if all of the lower

stretching thrusts are not identical.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
3- Raise the lower stretching thrust (1) on the support (2) 1
manually.
The lower thrust is now removed.
Refit
4- Clean the contact surfaces on the lower thrust (1) using 2
a clean, dry cloth.
6- Grease the contact surfaces on the lower stretching
thrust (1) using the "LUB A15" grease.
1-006200-01-xx.svg
7- Position the lower strtching thrust (1) in the support (2).
8- Check the contact between the contact surfaces on the
lower stretching thrust (1) and the support (2). 1

9- If necessary, reset the lower the stretching thrust
(1), see procedure "BRM-009.
10- Repeat steps 2 to 9 until you have replaced all of the
lower stretching thrusts.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006201-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-031 Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (2 stroke) BDM-032 1 / 12
GENERAL INFORMATION
. The references used in this procedures do not apply

to the cylinder drawing.
This procedure assumes that the following units have
been removed:
- solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" on
base, see procedure "BDM-002,
- nozzle tip, see procedure "BDM-025,
- nozzle cylinder distributor, see
procedure "BDM-036,
- nozzle cylinder, see procedure "BDM-015.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
Removing the solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO"

from the machine is not obligatory but it does make
the procedure and the inspection easier.
This procedure does not cover the maintenance of the

nozzle seal, see procedure "BDM-008.
Never use oil or grease when fitting the seals of these

1-006545-01-xx.svg
parts unless it is specifically recommended.

contamination.
Never use objects that may damage these parts,

especially their ridges and grooves.
1-006548-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 / 12 BDM-032 Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (2 stroke) 3
20 21 22 23 14 15 17 18
19 13
16 12
2 10
11 30
9 31
32
A 28 29
1-007637-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT B

Parts 36
- 1 set of spare SIDEL seals (A), 38
- the cylinder drawing (see set of drawings supplied with
the machine).
Consumables 35 37
- paper towels,
- cleaning agent "NETA03".
Specific tools 33 34
- set of special SIDEL tools for the cylinder (B),
- dummy stretching rod ,
1 39
- torque wrench 10 to 20 N.m,
- grips for inner elastic rings,
- plastic mallet,
- small box-cutter.
1-006138-02-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Remove the seal (2) from the cylinder (3) using the
scriber (1).
2 3
1-006141-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

The bolts (4) are fitted with light "LOCTITE 222"
threadlock. You may find some difficulty loosening the
fixing bolts (4). 4
1-006142-01-xx.svg
3- Separate the cylinder (3)/piston (5) assembly from the

body (6) by gently tapping the piston (5) with the mallet.
5 3
1-006143-01-xx.svg
4- Remove the cylinder (3)/piston (5) assembly from the

body (6). 5
1-006144-01-xx.svg
5- Remove the piston (5).

5 3
1-006145-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
6- Remove the elastic ring (7) from the cylinder (3).

8
1-006146-01-xx.svg
7- Remove the spacer (8) and the diffuser (9) from the
cylinder (3). 3
The diffuser (9) has been tightened on, use a jet if

necessary.
1-006147-01-xx.svg
Protect the cylinder (3) during cutting of the upper

stop (10).
8- Cut the upper stopper (10) using the box-cutter.
9- Remove the upper stopper (10). 10

The presence of a scraper seal (12) depends on the
model of the nozzle cylinder.
It is recommended to leave the scraper seal (12) in

place whatever its level of wear. 11
Removal of the scraper seal (12) risks damaging its

housing and rendering the body (6) useless.
1-007670-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
11- Remove the guide belt (13) using the scriber (1).
12- Remove the rod seal (14) using the scriber (1).
13- Remove the seal (15) linked with the rod seal (14) using
the scriber (1).
12 14 ; 15 13 6
1-007672-02-xx.svg
14- Remove the guide (16) from the piston (5).

16
15- Remove the piston seal (17) using the scriber (1).
17
1-006153-01-xx.svg
16- Remove the seal (18) linked to the piston seal (17)
using the scriber (1). 18
5
1-006154-01-xx.svg
17- Remove the guide (19) from the piston (5).

5
19- Remove the seal (21) linked with the rod seal (20) using
20
the scriber (1). 21
19
22
21- Remove the seal (23) linked with the rod seal (22) using 23
the scriber (1).
Do not separate the solenoids (24) from their base
(25).
1-006155-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

23- Remove the cover (27). 24
26
25
27
1-006156-01-xx.svg
24- Remove the guide (28) from the base (25).
28
25
1-006157-01-xx.svg
25- Remove the scraper seal (32) from the cover (27).
Refit
Nozzle cylinder
26- Clean the parts (3 ; 5 ; 6 ; 8 ; 27) using the cloths and 32 27
the cleaning agent "NET A03".
Reconditioning the piston (5)
1-006159-01-xx.svg
27- Position the guides (16 ; 19) in the piston (5).
16
19
1-006160-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
28- Position the seals (21 ; 23) associated with the rod
seals (20 ; 22) in the piston (5).
29- Bend the rod seal (20) into a heart-shape.
30- Position the rod seal (20) in the piston (5). 21
5
23
20
22
1-006161-01-xx.svg

32- Position the rod seal (22) in the piston (5).
22
1-006162-01-xx.svg
33
1-006163-01-xx.svg
33- Position the drift (33) in the piston (5).

The drift (33) calibrates the piston seals (5).
33
1-006164-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Leave the drift (33) in position for the rest of the

5
procedure.
34- Position the drift (34) on the piston (5).
35- Position the seal (18) associated with the piston seal
(17) on the piston (5).
18 34
Do not damage the seal (17), position it carefully at
the end.
1-006165-01-xx.svg
36- Use the thrust (35) to position the piston seal (17).
37- Remove the chuck (34).
35
17
34
1-006166-01-xx.svg
38- Position the calibration sleeve (36) on the piston (5).

17
39- Disassemble the calibration sleeve (36).
Recondition the body (6)
36
1-006167-01-xx.svg
40- Position the seal (15) associated with the rod seal (14)
in the body (6).
42- Position the rod seal (14) in the body (6).
43- Position the guide (13) in the body (6).
6 13 14 ; 15
1-007694-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
44- Position the tool (37) so as to bear on the body (6).

The tooling (37) calibrates the body seals (6). 37
Recondition the cylinder (3)
1-007695-02-xx.svg
46- Position the upper stopper (10) on the cylinder (3) using
the tooling (37). 37
3 10
1-006172-01-xx.svg
47- Position the seal (11) in the groove on the cylinder (3).
48- Position the diffuser (9) and the spacer (8) in the
cylinder (3).
The diffuser (9) has been tightened on, use a jet if
necessary.
49- Position the elastic ring (7). 3
Assemble the nozzle cylinder
11
Position the body (6) on a cylinder (not supplied) to
facilitate these operations.
1-006174-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
50- Position the sleeve (38) on the body (6).

51- Position the piston (5) fitted with the drift (33) in the
body (6).
52- Position the cylinder (3) in the piston (5).
The cylinder (3) pushes the drift (33) out of the piston
(5).
38
1-006176-01-xx.svg
53- Remove the chuck (33).

Fit the bolts (4) having applied "LOCTITE 222" light
threadlock.
5 3
33
1-006175-01-xx.svg
54- Tighten the bolts (4) to a torque of 10 Nm.

6
55- Position the seal (2) on the cylinder (3).
1-006177-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
"TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly

56- Position the seal (31) associated with the guide seal
(30) in the guide (28).
57- Bend the guide seal (30) into a heart-shape. 30
31
58- Position the guide seal (30) in the guide (28).
59- Position the calibration drift (39) in the guide (28).
60- Position the O-ring (29).
61- Remove the calibration drift (39). 28
1-006178-01-xx.svg

39
29 28
1-007704-02-xx.svg
63- Position the scraper seal (32) in the cover (27).
32 27
1-006180-01-xx.svg
64- Position the guide (28) in the base (25).

28
25
1-006157-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
65- Position the cover (27) on the base (25).

66- Tighten the fixing bolts (26) crosswise to a torque of 10
Nm.
25 26
27
1-006181-01-xx.svg
67- Position the protective stopper (40) on the cover (27).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check that the piston slides manually. 40
If the cylinder is not being fitted on the machine
immediately, insert the stoppers into the cylinder
openings to protect it.
68- Sign off the operation on the machine’s worksheet. 27
1-006182-03-xxx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit: braking system friction pads BDM-033 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always replace all of the brake pads in a braking

system when carryng out any operation on it.
Use the safety bolt (1) supplied and fitted on the

braking system.

1-006030-40-xx.svg

3 19
Do not inhale the dust from the brake systems. 4
Wear latex gloves. 2
MACHINE STATUS
Machine isolated except for: 1-006094-02-xx.svg
7 9
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- friction pads (3 ; 4).
Consumables
- latex gloves,
Specific tools
- safety bolt (1),
- spring puller ,
- set of thickness gauges. 8
PROCEDURE
1-006096-02-xx.svg
Removal
machine.
6- Remove the silencer (10).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-033 Removal/refit: braking system friction pads 3

pressed in.
Fully tighten the safety bolt (1).
Never fit or remove the safety bolt (1) by hand; always

use a socket wrench.
1
Do not touch the mobile parts of the braking system.
10
1-006262-01-xx.svg
8- The second technician positions the safety bolt (1).

The braking system jaws are secured. 11
9- When the second technician gives the order, the first

technician releases the push-button (11).
10- Remove the spring (12) using the spring puller.
11- Loosen the counter-nut (13) but do not remove it.
13- Loosen the bolt (15) but do not remove it.
14- Loosen the nuts (16) but do not remove them.
16- Pivot the arm (18).
The friction pad (3) separates from the brake disc (19).
1-006603-04-xx.svg
17- Use a screwdriver as a lever on the metal part of the

friction pad (3). 15 12 16
18- Remove the friction pad (3).
19- Loosen the bolt (17). 13 3
The friction pad (4) separates from the brake disc (19). 14 4
21- Use a screwdriver as a lever on the metal part of the
friction pad (4). 17
22- Remove the friction pad (4).
Refit
23- Check the position of the magnet on the magnetic
support.
10 1
24- Position the friction pad (4).
25- Tighten the bolt (17). 1-006261-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit: braking system friction pads BDM-033 3/4
27- Check the position of the magnet on the magnetic

support. 18 3
28- Position the friction pad (3).
29- Set the position of the friction pads (3 ; 4), see 19
procedure "BRM-012.
30- Position the spring (12) using the spring puller.
20 4
pressed in. 1-006093-02-xx.svg
Never fit or remove the safety bolt (1) by hand; always
use a socket wrench.
32- The second technician removes the safety bolt (1).

The braking system jaws are now free to move.
33- When the second technician gives the order, the first
technician releases the push-button (11).
34- Tighten the silencer (10).
35- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have replaced all
of the friction pads (3 ; 4) on the first braking system.
36- Position the safety bolt (1) in the fixing lug on the
braking system.
F Make sure that the brake disc is clean (19).
· Clean the disc (19) if necessary, see
procedure "BNM-009.
7
40- Repeat steps 3 to 39 until you have replace all of the
friction pads on the second braking system.
41- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 8 9
BEFORE YOU FINISH
42- Check the gap between the friction pads (3 ; 4) and the
brake disc (19), see procedure "BNM-009.

43- Press the button (11) several times to make sure that
the brake is working properly.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-033 Removal/refit: braking system friction pads 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer BDM-034 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
Parts
- silencer cartridge and brake bolts.
Consumables
- teflon tape.
Specific tools
- silencer wrench (1),
- 3/8" socket wrench 3/8" (supplied).
PROCEDURE
Removal
procedure "BCU-013.
3- Remove the exhaust silencer (2) using the silencer
wrench (1).
4- Remove the brake bolts (3) using the hexagonal wrench 1
3/8".
5- Remove the support (4).
6- Remove the used teflon tape (5) from the support.
7- Removed the silencer cartridge (6).
1-006315-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-034 Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer 1
Refit
2
8- Clean using a clean, dry cloth:
- the body (7),
- the supports (4 ; 8), 4
- the grill (9).
9- Fit the new silencer cartridge (6) into the body (7).
10- Assemble the grill (4 ; 8), the supports *2 and the body
(7).
11- Tighten the new brake bolts (3) using the socket wrench
3/8".
12- Apply the teflon tape (5) on the threaded part of the
support (4).
3 5
1-006316-01-xx.svg
13- Clean the tapping on the solenoid valve assemblies

"TORNADO"(10). 6 7
14- Fit and lightly tighten the exhaust silencer (2) using the
silencer wrench (1). 4 8
BEFORE YOU FINISH

3 9
1-006317-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: mold base safety pin BDM-035 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always identify the cause of the safety pin breakage

before replacing it.
Replace the broken safety pin (1) by 1 original SIDEL

part.
Never tighten or loosen the bolt (4) as you may

weaken the safety pin (1).
1-006030-37-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- safety pin (1). 2 3 1 4
Consumables
- normal threadlock "LOCTITE 243". 1-006585-01-xx.svg
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
procedure "BCU-013.

position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013. 1
The bolt (2) should be fitted with normal threadlock
"LOCTITE 243". You may have difficulty loosening the
bolt (2).
3- Remove the bolt (2) and the washer (3).
4- Remove the safety pin (1).
Refit 1-006584-01-xx.svg
5- Fit the new safety pin (1) by positioning the flat part of
the pin against the raised section on the mold base
support (5).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-035 Removal/refit: mold base safety pin 2
Fit the bolt (2) using normal "LOCTITE 243"

threadlock
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs BDM-037 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always replace the springs (4) in pairs to avoid stress

on the guide system.
Never attempt any work on the thrust (10).
MACHINE STATUS

procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- springs (5),
- upper and lower supports (6 ; 7) as required according
to their condition.
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
procedure "BCU-013.
position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013. 4
3- Hold the mold base in the raised position.
4- Hold the nut (1). 9

5- Unscrew and remove the spring guide (2) using an 6
appropriate tool using the slot (3).
6- Remove the nut (1) and the washer (4). 5
7- Remove the following parts: 7
- spring (5) with the upper support (6),
- lower support (7). 3
8- Repeat as above, from step 4 to remove the second
spring (5). 2
Refit
8 10
9- Clean the contact surfaces on the console (8 ; 9) using
a clean, dry cloth.
1-006387-02-xx.svg
10- Position the upper support (6) in the spring (5).
11- Position the lower support (7) in the console (8).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-037 Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs 1
12- Fit the spring (5) with the upper support (6) on the lower
support (7) and the console (9).
13- Position the nut (1) and the washer (4).
14- Hold the nut (1).
15- Screw in and tighten the spring guide (2) using the
appropriate tool in the slot (3).
16- Repeat as above from step 9 to fit the second spring
(5).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
17- Make sure that the mold base assembly functions

correctly.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: transfer arm rollers BDM-038 1/8
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-006757-01-xx.svg
The transfer arm type (A; B; C; D) may be different for

the preform transfer wheel and the bottle transfer
wheel.
The following operations are carried out on the

workbench.
The number of rollers varies according to the transfer

arm type (A; B; C; D).
Replace all the rollers of the transfer arms (A; B; C; D)

A C B D
at the same time.
Replace the part(s) (5; 8; 21; 26; 39; 42; 45; 52; 48;
62) with equipment with identical technical
characteristics.
MACHINE STATUS
- transfer arm removed from the machine, see
procedure "BDM-003.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-013575-01-xx.svg
Parts
- rollers.
Consumables

- normal threadlock "LOCTITE 243",
- strong threadlock "LOCTITE 638".
Specific tools
- small vice.
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/8 BDM-038 Removal/refit: transfer arm rollers 2
Speed rollers (5) of transfer arm type (A; B; C; D)

Removal
1- Hold the shaft (7) using the appropriate wrench.
2- Loosen the brake bolt (1).
3- Remove the brake bolt (1) and the washer (2).
4- Remove the following assembly:
- shaft (7), 1
- roller(s) (5), 2
- spacer (6),
- adjusting rings (4). 3
5- Remove the adjusting rings (4) from the shaft (7).
4
6- Remove the roller (5) from the shaft (7) using a small
clamp or a mallet. 5
7- Remove the spacer (6).
6
Refit
7
8
10- Position the new roller (5) on the shaft (7) using a small
clamp.
1-013586-01-xx.svg
11- Position the spacer (6) on the shaft (7).
clamp.
Place the same number of adjusting rings (4) as
previously.
13- Position the adjusting rings (4) on the shaft (7).
14- Position the shaft (7) in the arm support (3).
15- Fit the brake bolt (1) and the washer (2).
16- Tighten the brake bolt (1).
Position rollers (8) of transfer arm type (A; C)
Removal
The shaft (9) is assembled with normal threadlock

11
shaft (9).
17- Loosen the shaft (9).

- shaft (9),
- follower (8), 10
- adjusting rings (10).
19- Remove the adjusting rings (10) from the shaft (9).
Refit
clamp.
Place the same number of adjusting rings (10) as 1-011547-02-xx.svg
previously.
23- Position the adjusting rings (10) on the shaft (9).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Apply threadlock "LOCTITE 243" to the thread of the

shaft (9).
24- Position the shaft (9) in the grip support (11).
25- Tighten the pin (9).
Position rollers (21) of transfer arm type (B)
Removal
26- Remove the spring (13), see procedure "BDM-147.
27- Hold the shaft (20) using the appropriate wrench. 12 13 14
28- Loosen the brake bolt (14). 15

29- Remove the brake bolt (14).
16
30- Insert a screw Ø8x100 as a replacement to the shaft
(20) to keep the items (15; 16; 17; 12; 19; 23; 18) 17
stacked. 18
- shaft (20), 23 19
- follower (21),
- spacer (22). 22
32- Remove the shaft (20) spacer (22).
21 20
clamp or a mallet.
1-013590-01-xx.svg
Refit
35- Position the new roller (21) on the shaft (20) using a
small clamp.
37- Insert the shaft (20) as a replacement to the screw Ø
8x100.
38- Fit the brake bolt (14).
40- Insert the spring (13), see procedure "BDM-147.
F Check that the transfer arm head pivots correctly
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Position rollers (26) of transfer arm type (D)

Removal
33 24 25
42- Remove the brake bolt (33).
43- Remove the spacer (32). 32
Note the assembly direction of the spacers (25; 27; 31

32) before removing them.
44- Remove the shaft (28).
45- Remove the transfer arm (30) head support . 30
46- Remove the following items:
- follower (26),
- spacer (25; 27).
Refit
Make sure you comply with the assembly direction
and orientation of the spacers (25 ; 27; 32). 29 28 27 26
48- Position the spacer (25 ; 27)/roller (26)/rail (24)

1-011550-02-xx.svg
assembly on the head support (30).
49- Position the shaft (28) on the head support (30).
50- Correctly position the flat (29) of the shaft (28) in the rail
(24).
51- Position the spacer (32) and the brake bolt (33) on the
shaft (28).
53- Position the spring (31), see procedure "BDM-147.
Orientation rollers (39) of head of transfer arm type (D)
Removal
The bolt (34) should be fitted with normal threadlock

bolt (34).
31
56- Remove the lower roller shaft (40)/ roller (39)/ adjusting
washers (38)/ upper roller shaft (37) assembly from the 34
head support (36).
35
Refit
37
59- Position the new roller (39) on the shaft (40) using a 38
small clamp.
39
Place the same number of adjusting rings (38) as
previously. 40
60- Position the adjusting washers (38) on the roller (39).
61- Position the upper roller shaft (37) on the lower roller 1-011553-02-xx.svg
shaft (40).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
62- Position the lower roller shaft (40)/ roller (39)/ adjusting
washers (38)/ upper roller shaft (37) assembly on the
head support (36).
63- Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock to the bolts (34).
64- fit the bolt (34) and the washer (35) on the head support
(36).
Orientation rollers (42) of head (18) of transfer arm type (B)
Removal
clamp or a mallet.
Refit
13
small clamp.
71- Position the plastic ring (43) on the shaft (41).
41
72- Position the spring (13), see procedure "BDM-147.
Grip (45) opening rollers of transfer arm type (C) 42
Removal
43
1-013602-01-xx.svg
The shaft (46) is assembled with light threadlock

shaft (46).
- shaft (46),
- follower (45).
Refit
45
77- Position the new roller (45) on the shaft (46) using a 46
small clamp.
78- Apply threadlock "LOCTITE 222" to the thread of the
shaft (46).
79- Position the shaft (46) in the grip support (44). 1-013603-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Grip (52) opening rollers of transfer arm type (C)

Removal
The shaft (53; 56) is assembled with strong threadlock

"LOCTITE 638". You may have difficulty loosening the 60
shaft (53; 56).
59
81- Loosen the shaft (53; 56).
82- Remove the following assembly: 58
- shaft (53; 56; 58),
- grip support (54; 57), 52
- spring (59),
57
- follower (52).
The shaft (58) is assembled with light threadlock 56
55
shaft (58).
84- Remove the following assembly: 54 53
- shaft (58),
- follower (52).
1-013605-01-xx.svg
clamp or a mallet.
Refit
small clamp.
shaft (58).
89- Position the shaft (58) in the grip support (57).
91- Position the spring (59) between the right spring support
(54) and the left spring support (57).
92- Position the right grip support (54) / left grip support
(57) / spring (59) assembly in the grip support (60).
shaft (53; 56).
94- Position the shaft (53;56).

95- Tighten the pin (53;56).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Grip (48) opening rollers of transfer arm type (D)

Removal
96- Remove the transfer arm head (51), see
98- Remove the elastic ring (49). 51
clamp or a mallet.
Refit 50
100-Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths.
101-Position the new roller (48) on the shaft (50) using a 49
small clamp. 48
102-Position the plastic ring (49) on the shaft (50).
103-Insert the spring (47), see procedure "BDM-147.
104-Fit the transfer arm head (51), see
procedure "BDM-073.
Grip (62) opening rollers of transfer arm type (D)
Removal 1-013604-01-xx.svg
105-Remove the elastic ring (61).

106-Remove the roller (62) from the shaft (63) using a small
clamp or a mallet.
Refit
107-Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths.
108-Position the new roller (62) on the shaft (63) using a
small clamp.
109-Position the plastic ring (61) on the shaft (63).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Make sure that the rollers move freely (5; 8; 21; 26; 39;
42; 45; 52; 48; 62). 63
110-Fit the transfer arm, see procedure "BDM-003. 62

If the rollers (5; 8; 21; 26; 39; 42; 45; 52; 48; 62) are
incorrectly positioned on the cams change the number
of adjusting rings . 61
F Make sure that the rollers are in the correct positions (5;
8; 21; 26; 39; 42; 45; 52; 48; 62) on the position and 1-011555-02-xx.svg
speed cams.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt BDM-039 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replace the part(s) (2) with equipment with identical

technical characteristics.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,

- unscrambler roller assembly clear of preforms.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- belt (2).
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-039 Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt 2
Removal
1- Remove the cover (1) using the fixing bolts . 3
9 5
12 1
6 13
1-012972-01-xx.svg
4 9
6 2
1-006508-01-xx.svg
2- Loosen the tensioner arm (3) manually and remove the

belt (2).
4
Refit
3- Loosen the tensioner arm (3) and fit the belt (2). 3
9
F Check that the belt (1) is aligned with the pulleys (4, 5,
12) with respect to the reference pulley (6) of the 5
reducer motor (13).
4- Fit the cover (1) and secure it (1). 1
5- Turn on the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-003. 12
7- Enter the unscrambler roller rotation setpoint (9).
6 13
9- Press button (10). 1-013126-01-xx.svg
The unscrambler rollers are functioning.
F Make sure that the unscrambler rollers (9) rotate
properly.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt BDM-039 3/4
1-011727-02-xx.svg

The unscrambler rollers are stopped. A
1-010351-04-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-039 Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt 2
10 11
1-012973-01-xx.svg
11 10
1-006375-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit: conveyor belts BDM-040 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For any operation on the drive system, consult the

plans supplied with the machine.

The number of conveyor belts (12) may differ

depending upon the configuration of the machine.
1-008490-01-xx.svg
The preform feeder may be provided with conveyor

belts (12) at the following locations: 8
- 1 under the hopper (1),
- 1 under the elevator column (2),
- 1 on the intermediate conveyor (3) (Depending on
the configuration of your machine) ,
- 1 in the elevator column (5) of the mini-hopper
(4) (Depending on the configuration of your
machine) ,
- 1 on the recycling conveyor (6) of the mini-hopper
machine) ,
1-006636-02-xx.svg
- 1 under the unscrambler rollers (7) (Depending on
- 1 on the emptying belt (8) of the hopper (1)
(option).
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-010.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- Conveyor belt (12),
- Holding rod (9).
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-040 Removal/refit: conveyor belts 3
1- Move the end of the conveyor belt (12) to the most

accessible location.
2- Slacken the conveyor belt (12), see
procedure "BRM-015.
3- Open or remove the casings providing access to the
conveyor belt concerned.
4- Carefully remove the holding rod (9).
The conveyor belt (12) is opened.
Mark the link between the old belt and the new belt.
Make sure that the cleats (11) are installed in the

same direction as on the old conveyor belt (12).
5- Install the new belt (12) at one end of the belt to be
removed using the holding rod (9).
6- Carefully pull the old belt (12) by its free end to bring the
new belt in fully.
9 11 12
7- Carefully remove the holding rod (9).
8- Remove the old belt (12). 1-008492-03-xx.svg
Make sure that the edges (10) of the conveyor belt

(12) are perfectly aligned. 11 11
9- Connect the 2 ends of the new belt (12) using the 12 12
holding rod (9).
The conveyor belt (12) is closed.
10- Set the conveyor belts, see procedure "BRM-015.
10 10
9 9
10 10
12 12
11 11
1-013192-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit: conveyor belts BDM-040 3/4
BEFORE YOU FINISH

11 11
11- Close or install the casings.
12 12
10 10
9 9
10 10
12 12
11 11
1-013195-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-040 Removal/refit: conveyor belts 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - double filtration filters BDM-041 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always replace all of the high pressure circuit filters

together. For replacing the filter on the main supply
interface, see procedure "BDM-006.

regulations.
The number of filtering elements (6 ; 11) depends on

the machine type.
1-006030-04-xx.svg
The filter type ("AK" ; "SRF") is indicated on the filter
blocks (2 ; 3) label (1).
The arrow on the labels (16 ; 17) indicates the

direction in which the envelopes (4) are to be
removed.
Always follow the correct order for fitting the filter

elements.
If the filters "AK" and "SRF" are switched during

fitting, the filter "AK" will be destroyed and the
machine polluted.
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- various filter elements (6 ; 11).
Consumables
- latex gloves,
- vaseline.
Specific tools
- strap wrench.
PROCEDURE
1- Shut off the high pressure air supply, see

procedure "BCU-008.
F Check that the presure gauges show no pressure
before carrying out any works on the air system, see
procedure "BCU-008.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BDM-041 Removal/refit - double filtration filters 2

machine.
Filter "AK" 3 2
Removal
Make sure you comply with the direction of removal

indicated on the label (16). 1 1
4
4
17 16
1-011707-01-xx.svg
3- Loosen and remove the envelope (4) using the strap

wrench .
4- Loosen the filter element (6) from the filter block (2) and
remove.
6
1-010405-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Refit
15
1-010592-01-xx.svg

5
10
Never touch the filter section of the filter element (6).
F Visually check the cleanness of the filter (6). 4

· If the filter (6) is dirty, replace it.
F Make sure that the description on the filter block (2)
label (1) corresponds to that (7) on the filter to be
mounted.
Do not remove the packaging from the body of the 1-007397-04-xx.svg
filter element (6).

8- Check the condition and the position of the 2 seals (8).
9- Grease the thread (9) on the (6) filter and the seals (8)
using vaseline.
Do not apply grease to the filter section of the filter 7
element (6).
6
13- Grease the thread (10) of the envelope (4) and the seal
(5) using vaseline.
14- Screw in the envelope (4) until completely tight and then
unscrew it d’1/4 turns using the strap wrench.
Filter "SRF"
Removal
F If there are temperature probes (15),remove them.
Make sure you comply with the direction of removal
indicated on the label (17). 8 9
15- Loosen and remove the envelope (4) using the strap
wrench . 1-010383-01-xx.svg
16- Loosen the filter element (11) from the filter block (3)
and remove.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Refit

3
Never touch the filter section of the filter element
1
(11).
11
1-010406-01-xx.svg
· If the filter (11) is dirty, replace it. 5
F Make sure that the description on the filter block (3) 10
label (1) corresponds to that (12) on the filter to be
mounted.
Do not remove the packaging from the body of the
4
filter element (11).
20- Check the condition and the position of the 2 seals
(13).
1-007397-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
21- Grease the thread (14) on the (11) filter and the seals
(13) using vaseline.
Do not apply grease to the filter section of the filter
element (11).
25- Grease the thread (10) of the envelope (4) and the seal 11
(5) using vaseline.
26- Position the envelope (4) and tighten using the strap
wrench .
F If there are any temperature probes (15), fit them.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
12
27- Open the high pressure air supply, see
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: locking follower BDM-042 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Working on hot molds:

mold. In these cases always follow the following safety
instructions:

stipulated risks. 1-006030-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- locking follower (1),
- notched brake nut (2).
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-042 Removal/refit: locking follower 2
Removal
procedure "BCU-013.
3- Loosen the notched brake nut (2).
Depending on the machine configuration, the follower
(1) may be synthetic or metallic. 2
4- Remove the following parts:
- follower (3),
- spacer (4),
- washer (6) (Present depending on the machine
configuration).
Refit 1 3
5- Clean the shaft (5), the follower (3) and the spacer (4)
using a clean, dry club. 1-006565-01-xx.svg
The chamfer on the spacer (4) should be turned

towards the follower (3).
6- Position the following parts in order:
- washer (6) (Present depending on the machine
configuration),
- spacer (4),
- follower (3).
7- fit the notched nut and tighten up (2).
1 5
BEFORE YOU FINISH
8- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3

2 4 6 © SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
1-006566-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Draining the mold body hydraulic circuit BDM-043 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-005,
PROCEDURE
Drainage
machine.
2- Close the valves (1 ; 2). 1
3- Connect the drain valves (3 ; 4) to the drain using the
specially designed hoses.
4- Open the drain valves (3 ; 4).
1-006062-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-043 Draining the mold body hydraulic circuit 2

machine.
11- Connect the drain valve (3) to an low pressure air hose.
12- Turn on the low pressure air circuit.
13- Switch off the low pressure air supply.
5 6
The drainage is now complete. Work can now be
carried out on the circuit.
1-010353-09-02.svg
Filling
A
machine.
19- Close the drain valve (3).
F Make sure that the drain valve (4) is open.
20- Open the valve (2) by a 1/3.
21- As soon as the lined has drained close the drain valve
(4).
22- Open the valve (2) fully.
23- Open the valve (1). 1-010348-06-02.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH


family.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber BDM-045 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
Parts
- Shock absorber (1).
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
3
machine.
1
2- Remove the counter-nut (2).
3- Loosen and remove the shock absorber (1) from the 2
support (3).
Refit
5- Fit the new absorber (1) in the support (3) to obtain the X
gap X = 10 mm between the body of the absorber (1)
and the thrust (4). 4
6- Tighten the lock-nut (2).
7- Make sure that the mislock detection system functions
correctly, see procedure "BNM-004 . 1-006573-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-045 Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: body-guide plate assembly of bottle outfeed wheel BDM-046 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Alway refer to the User Manual supplied with the filling

machine when carrying out any work on it.
MACHINE STATUS
- bottle outfeed clear of articles,
- all energy supplies to the filler shut off,
procedure "BCU-012.
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine. 1 2
2- Remove the neck-guide plate assembly , see

procedure "BDM-082.
Removal
Depending on the configuration of the machine, the

bottle outfeed wheel may be equipped with one or
several plates (1).
3- Remove the body-guide plate assembly (1)/sleeve (4).
Refit
4- Clean the assembly using a clean dry cloth.
5- Insert the body-guide plate assembly (1)/sleeve (4) on
the shaft (2) as far as it will go.
6- Position the body-guide plate assembly (1)/sleeve (4)
on the shaft (2) with the dowel pin (3).

F Check that the groove on the sleeve (4) is pressed
against the pin (3).
7- Fit the neck-guide plate assembly , see
1-010615-02-xx.svg
procedure "BDM-082.
8- Check the general synchronization, see
procedure "BNM-012.
9- Clean all the parts handled during the operation with a
clean, dry cloth.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-046 Removal/refit: body-guide plate assembly of bottle outfeed wheel 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit - bottle outfeed ejection guide BDM-047 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- all energy supplies to the blowing machine shut off, see
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

Removal
machine.
F Make sure that the transfer arm is not above the
retractable guide.
· If necessary, rotate the machine or remove the
obstructing transfer arm, see procedure "BDM-024.
2- Remove the fasteners (1).
2 1 5
3- Remove the neck-guide (2)/body-guide (3)/column (4)
assembly
Refit
5- Clean the neck-guide (2)/body-guide (3)/column (4)
assembly using a clean dry cloth.
6- Position the bottle outfeed neck guide (2)/ body guide
(3)/ column (4) assembly using the guide studs.
7- Tighten the fasteners (1).
F Make sure the bottle outfeed guide (2) is fitted

securely.
· If necessary, fit the transfer arm head, see
procedure "BDM-024.
F Make sure that the body-guide (3) is in the correct
position.
· If necessary, adjust the body-guide (3).
3 4
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-010616-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-047 Removal/refit - bottle outfeed ejection guide 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: bottle outfeed neck guides BDM-048 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
1-006580-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Loosen the cross-nuts (1).
2 1 3 1
3- Remove the bottle outfeed neck guide (2)/support (3)
assembly.
If necessary, before refitting, remove/refit the bottle
outfeed body guide, see procedure "BDM-049.
Refit
4- Clean the columns (4) using a clean, dry cloth.
5- Clean the bottle outfeed neck guide (2)/support (3)
assembly using a clean, dry cloth.
The supports (3) must be resting on the column
flangings (4).
6- Position the bottle outfeed neck guide (2)/support (3)

assembly on the columns (4).
7- Tighten the cross-nuts (1). 4
F Check the bottle outfeed neck guide (2) is correctly
attached. 1-008689-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-048 Removal/refit: bottle outfeed neck guides 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit: bottle outfeed body guides BDM-049 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
1-006580-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Remove the bottle outfeed neck guide (1)/support (2)
assembly, see procedure "BDM-048. 1 2
3- Remove the locking nuts (3).

4- Remove the bottle outfeed body guide (4)/support (5)
assembly.
Refit
5- Clean the columns (6) using a clean, dry cloth.
6- Clean the bottle outfeed body guide (4)/support (5)
assembly using a clean, dry cloth.
7- Position the bottle outfeed body guide (4)/support (5)
assembly on the columns (6).
8- Tighten the cross-nuts (3).
F Check the bottle outfeed body guide (4) is correctly

attached.
9- Install the bottle outfeed neck guide (1)/support (2)
assembly, see procedure "BDM-048.
4 5 3 6 3
BEFORE YOU FINISH
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-049 Removal/refit: bottle outfeed body guides 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - dedust filters BDM-051 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The button (17) enables the automatic purge to be

tested.
1-007166-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- filter 40 µm(3),
- filter 5 µm(4),
- filter "SMF"(10) 0,01 µm.
Consumables
- vaseline,
- latex gloves.
Specific tools 1 9 17 2 5 6
None
1-011022-02-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

machine.
procedure "BCU-008.
3- Close and lock the valve (1).

circuit.
Replacing the 40 µm (3) and 5 µm (4) filters
The procedure for removing and replacing the filters

(3 ; 4) is identical for each filter.
Removal
4- Remove the bowl (5 ; 6).
6- Remove the filter (3 ; 4).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-051 Removal/refit - dedust filters 2
Refit
Always fit the 40 µm filter (3) up-circuit from the 5 µm

filter (4).
8- Clean the bowl (5 ; 6) using a clean, dry cloth.
· If the seal (8) is worn replace it.
9- Fit the filter (3 ; 4). 3;4
10- Fit the support (7) and tighten up. 7
11- Refit the bowl (5 ; 6).
1-007144-02-xx.svg
5;6
1-007146-02-xx.svg
Replacing the "SMF" filter (10) 0,01 µm
Removal
12- Lift and turn the bowl (9) a quarter turn.
13- Remove the bowl (9).
14- Remove the filter (10). 14
1-011025-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - dedust filters BDM-051 3/4
Refit
15- Clean the bowl (9) using a clean, dry cloth.
Replace the filter (10) with filter carrying an identical
reference.
Always wear latex gloves when handling the

packaging or its contents.
9 10 14
1-011026-01-xx.svg
F Check the condition and the position of the 2 seals
(11). 10
· If the seals (11) are worn, replace them.
13
16- Grease the O-ring (12) on the bowl (9) with some
vaseline.
· If the seal is worn replace it.
17- Fit the "SMF" filter (10) in the bowl (9) making sure you
follow the guides (13).
11
12
1-011027-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-051 Removal/refit - dedust filters 2
18- Postion the bowl (9)/filter (10) assembly in the filter

block (14).
19- Lift and turn the bowl (9) a quarter turn.
F Make sure that the arrow (15) is lined up with the closed 14
padlock symbol (16).
1-011028-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH 14
20- Turn on the low pressure air supply to the machine, see
The low pressure air circuit feeds the dedust air circuit.
The pressure gauge (2) indicates the pressure in the 9
circuit.
24- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC, see 15
procedure "BCU-023.
F Make sure there are no faults at the PCC. 1-011029-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit - dedust cam BDM-052 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Remove the dedust wheel neck guides (14), see
3- Raise the carriages (1) and hold them in position using 1
the rings (2).
· Loosen the holding rings (2), put them in the 9 5
lowered position and then retighten.
6
6- Remove the fasteners (6).
3;4
7- Remove the first cam sector (7).
8- Remove the bolts (8). 1-007150-03-xx.svg
9- Remove the second cam sector (9).
Refit
10- Clean the supports using the clean, dry cloth.
11- Position the first cam sector (7).
12- Fit the fasteners (6). 2
13- Position the second cam sector (9).

F Make sure that the cam sectors (7 ; 9) are lined up with
the fixed cam (13). 1-007151-01-xx.svg
15- Tighten the fasteners (6 ; 8).

9
16- Fit the support (5).
17- Insert the bolts (3) and fit the washers (4).
18- Loosen the holding rings (2), set them in the raised 7 13
position and then retighten.
19- Position the neck guides (14) on the dedust wheel using 6
the guide studs, see procedure "BDM-053.
8
1-007152-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-052 Removal/refit - dedust cam 1
Setting the sensor range (10)

20- Loosen the nut and the counter nut (11).
21- Set the range (12) of the sensor (10) according to the
figures shown on the table.
The sensor lamp (10) lights up.
22- Tighten the nut and the counter nut (11).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-008485-02-xx.svg
11 10 12
1-006352-02-xx.svg
Inductive sensor Max Range(mm)

10 Dedust carriage roller B11.1 1,2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - dedust module neck guides BDM-053 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
1 2
machine.
3- Raise the ring on the extraction hood (2) as much as
possible. 1
5- Remove the nuts (3).
6- Remove the dedust wheel neck guides (4).
7- Remove the transfer wheel neck guide (5).
1-007149-01-xx.svg
Refit
8- Clean the guides (4, 5) and the supports using clean,
dry cloths.
9- Position the neck guide (5) on the transfer wheel using
the guide studs.
3 4
1-008485-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-053 Removal/refit - dedust module neck guides 2
10- Position the neck guides (4) on the dedust wheel using
the guide studs.
11- Tighten the nuts (3).
procedure "BRM-025.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-007176-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - dedust module plates BDM-054 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The dedust wheel plate is composed of 2 identically

sized sectors which are labelled at the ends.
MACHINE STATUS
- dedust module neck guides removed, see
procedure "BDM-053.
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
Dedust wheel sectors
Removal
2- Raise the carriages (1) and hold them in position using
the rings (2).
· Loosen the holding rings (2), put them in the
Use the (1) to bring the other carriages JOG into an

accessible position, see procedure "BCU-013.
4- Raise the ring on the extraction hood (4) as much as
possible.
1 2
7- Remove the first plate sector (7). 1-007176-01-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-013.
10- Remove the second plate sector (7).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-054 Removal/refit - dedust module plates 2
Refit
11- Clean the sectors (7) and their supports using clean, dry 4
cloths.
12- Position the first sector of the plate (7). 3
14- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see 5
procedure "BCU-013.
15- Position the second sector plate (7).
7 6
17- Loosen the holding rings (2), set them in the raised 1-007177-01-xx.svg
procedure "BRM-025.
Transfer wheel
Removal

20- Remove the transfer wheel (9).
Refit
21- Clean the transfer wheel (9) and the support using a
clean, dry cloth.
22- Fit the transfer wheel (9).
23- Position the transfer plate (9) using the guides .
24- Fit the nut (8) and tighten.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

8
25- Fit the neck guides on the dedust module, see
F Check how the preforms move through the system.
1-007180-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit - dedust rollers BDM-055 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
Parts
- follower (4).
Consumables
Specific tools
- external elastic ring grip.
PROCEDURE
Removal
procedure "BCU-013.
2- Raise the carriages (1) and hold them in position using 2
the rings (2).
· Loosen the holding rings (2), put them in the 1
4- Remove the roller (4).
Refit
5- Clean the shaft (5) and the new roller (4) using a clean,
dry cloth.
1-007150-02-xx.svg
6- Position the roller (4) on the shaft (5).

7- Position the elastic ring (3).
8- Loosen the holding rings (2), set them in the raised
Use the JOG to bring the other rollers (4) into an
accessible position, see procedure "BCU-013.
9- Repeat as above until you have replaced all of the
rollers (4). 5
BEFORE YOU FINISH

3
1-007209-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-055 Removal/refit - dedust rollers 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/Refit - oven cooling system filters BDM-056 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Filter identification:
- Filter (C), cardboard support.
- Filter (D), metal support.
The maintenance frequency varies depending on the

type of filter.
1-006030-127-xx.svg
Type Frequency Action

Filter (C) 1000 hours Replace
Filter (D) 1000 hours Recondition
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
- primary electrical circuit under power,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- filter (1).
Consumables
- clean, dry cloths. 1 C 3 2
Specific tools
None 1-007164-02-xx.svg
3 2
PROCEDURE
Opening the admission gates on the recovery cabinets

1 D
1-010722-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-056 Removal/Refit - oven cooling system filters 2

The "Oven" family appears. 4 5
2- Note the value of the output percentage (5).
Manual mode active.
5- Enter an output percentage of 100 % using the key (7).
The admission gates on the recovery cabinets open.
Filter (C ; D)
Removal
machine.
7- Remove the nuts (2).
8- Tilt out the filter support (3).
9- Remove the filter (1).
If the filter is clean, go to step 11.
If the filter is dirty, continue with the procedure. 1-010338-05-02.svg
Depending on the model, replace the (C) type filter or A

recondition the (D) type filter, see
procedure "BDM-097.
Refit
10- Clean the filter support (3) using the clean dry cloth.
11- Position the filter (C) or the reconditioned filter (D).
12- Tilt out the filter support (3).
14- Repeat as above from stage 7 until you have replaced
all of the filters (1). 7 6
BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-007563-01-02.svg

Closing the admission gates on the recovery cabinets
16- Enter the output percentage value noted in Stage 2,
using the (7) key.
"Automatic" mode selected.

family.
legislation.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve BDM-063 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
During the warranty period only the "TORNADO"

solenoid valve assembly may be replaced.
The "TORNADO" exhaust solenoid valve and its

location are fitted with guides to prevent any inversion
of the "TORNADO" solenoid valves.
Never invert the pilots (upper part) of the "TORNADO"

solenoid valves. The pilots of the "TORNADO"
solenoid valves are specific to their operation.
1-006030-01-xx.svg

contamination.
4
Follow the hygiene precautions. 5
2
2
Ensure that no foreign bodies are allowed to enter the
"TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly or the nozzle 10
cylinder.
MACHINE STATUS
1
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
1-007421-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- "TORNADO" solenoid valve (7).
Consumables
- Methylated spirit,
- "LUB a15" grease.
Specific tools
- 7 N.m torque wrench (not supplied).
PROCEDURE
Removal
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-063 Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve 3

machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 6
3- Remove the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026.
4- Block the orifice (1).
5- Disassemble the electrical connections (10) from the
coils (2).
6- Remove the union (3). 7
7- Disconnect the hoses (4 ; 5). 7
8- Remove the bolts (6). 3
9- Remove the solenoid valves (7). 8
9
Refit
10- Clean the seatings (8) of the solenoid valves using a
cloth steeped in denaturated alcohol.
F Control the state of the seating surfaces (8) of the
solenoid valves.
1-007423-01-xx.svg
If grooving is present, replace the "TORNADO"

solenoid valve assembly, see procedure "BDM-002.
11- Grease the o-ring seals (9) using a cloth and "LUB A15"
grease.
12- Position the new solenoid valves (7).
14- Tighten the connector (3).
8
15- Reconnect the hoses (4 ; 5).
Always follow the references when connecting the
electrical connectors to the corresponding solenoid
valve functions.
The electrical connector references (10) commence

with:
- "PB" for the preblow solenoid.
- "E" for the exhaust solenoid.
1-007422-01-xx.svg
- "B" for the blowing solenoid.
Make sure the seals are on the electrical connectors

(10).
16- Fit the electrical connections to the coils (2).
17- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
19- Test the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the nozzle

cylinder , see procedure "BPU-006.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters BDM-072 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
Parts
- flow rate limiter (6).
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease.
Specific tools
- 7 N.m torque wrench (not supplied).
PROCEDURE
Removal

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Bring the blowing station around to your working 1 3 4 8
3- Remove the bolt (1).
4- Remove the knob (2).
6- Remove the position indicator (4).

8- Remove the flow rate limiter (6).
2 10
1-007425-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-072 Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters 2
Refit
9- Clean the axle (7) of the new flow rate limiter (6) using a
clean, dry cloth.
10- Clean the bore of the distribution block (8) using a
clean, dry cloth.
F Check the condition of the distribution block bore (8). 9 7
If grooving is present, replace the "TORNADO"

solenoid valve assembly, see procedure "BDM-002.
4
1-007424-01-xx.svg
11- Lubricate the distribution block bore (8) using "LUB

A15" grease.
12- Fit the new flow rate limiter (6).
14- Fit the position indicator (4) using the positioning pin
(9).
15- Turn the position indicator (4) knob (10) to the "0,00" 6
value.
16- Tighten the bolt (3). 5
17- Fit the knob (2).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
19- Check the pre-blow flow rate setting, see

procedure "BPU-013.
7 8
1-007426-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/refit - bottle outfeed wheel neck-guide plate assembly BDM-082 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Depending on the machine configuration, the bottle

outfeed wheel may be fitted with a quick-release
removal system (A).
MACHINE STATUS
- all energy supplies to the filler shut off, 1-006580-01-xx.svg
- the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006. A

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
In the presence of the system (A)
2- Remove the bottle outfeed wheel , see
procedure "BDM-105.
1-011174-01-xx.svg
Removal
1 2 3 4
The following operations are carried out on the
workbench.
3- Remove the fastener (4).

several plates (1).
5- Remove the neck guide plate (1)/sleeve (2)assembly.
6- If necessary, remove the body-guide plate assembly
(5), see procedure "BDM-046.
Refit
8- If necessary, fit the body-guide plate assembly (5), see
procedure "BDM-046.
9- Fit the neck guide plate (1)/sleeve (2) assembly fully
onto the shaft (6).
10- Position the neck guide plate (1)/sleeve (2) assembly on 5
the shaft (6) using the guide pin (7). 1-010566-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-082 Removal/refit - bottle outfeed wheel neck-guide plate assembly 1

12- Tighten the fastener (4).
13- Install the bottle outfeed wheel, see
procedure "BDM-105.
In the absence of the system (A)
Removal 6 7

several plates (1).
14- Remove the fastener (4).
16- Remove the neck guide plate (1)/sleeve (2)assembly.
17- If necessary, remove the body-guide plate assembly
Refit
19- If necessary, fit the body-guide plate assembly (5), see
procedure "BDM-046. 1-010615-03-xx.svg
20- Fit the neck guide plate (1)/sleeve (2) assembly fully
onto the shaft (6).
21- Position the neck guide plate (1)/sleeve (2) assembly on
the shaft (6) using the guide pin (7).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
24- Check the general synchronization, see

procedure "BNM-012.
The synchronization of the bottle outfeed wheel with
regard to the bottle transfer wheel is checked
automatically at reduced speed each time the
machine starts.
25- Clean all the parts handled during the operation with a
clean, dry cloth.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Reconditioning the oven spindles BDM-095 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The denominations "upper" and "lower" sprockets

designate the sprockets at the oven wheel with the
spindle tip pointing downwards.
Replace all of the parts in the spare parts kit

according to its contents.
Replace all of the parts in the spare parts kit at the

same time.
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-119-xx.svg
- oven cold.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- elastic ring (1),
- support ring (2 ; 3),
- bearing (4 ; 5),
- ring (6),
- nut (7),
- spring (8),
- O-ring (9).
Consumables
- cleaning agent NET A03.

Specific tools
- expansible extractor .
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-095 Reconditioning the oven spindles 3
Use a workbench when reconditioning the spindle

chain.

JOG implementation window. 1 11
procedure "BCU-013.
2- Use the JOG system to bring the spindle up to your 8
working position, see procedure "BCU-013.
2
Removal
3- Depending on the machine configuration, remove the 4
4- Remove the sprocket (12 ; 13) / shaft (14) 15 10
5- Remove the sleeve (15), see procedure "BDM-010.
6- Remove the rings (2 ; 3).
7- Remove the bearing (4) using an extractor.
Refit
8- Replace the bearing (4).
9- Replace the seal (9), (depending on the machine
configuration). 6 13
10- Fit the sleeve(s) (15), see procedure "BDM-010. 7
11- Replace the ring (6).
5
12- Replace the nut (7)/bearing (5).
13- Replace the ring (2 ; 3). 3
14- Fit the sprocket(s) (12 ; 13)/shaft(s) (14), see
procedure "BDM-013.
15- Replace the spring(s) (8). 14
16- Replace the elastic ring (1).
12
17- Fit the spindle tips (11) and the ejectors
(10), (depending on the machine configuration), see
procedure "BDM-012.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-0012165-01-xx.svg


legislation.
19- Sign off the operation on the machine’s worksheet.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: filter element on the oven cooling system BDM-097 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure must be carried out in a clean, dry and

covered area.
Replace all of the filter elements on the oven cooling

system at the same time.
MACHINE STATUS
- filters removed, see procedure "BDM-056.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006757-01-xx.svg
Parts
- new filter element(s) (2).
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Manually remove the inner structure (1) of the filter.
2- Remove the used filter element (2).
1
1-010475-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-097 Removal/refit: filter element on the oven cooling system 2
Refit
2
Replace the filter (2) with a technically identical filter.
3- Wipe all of the structures (1 ; 3) on the filter using a

clean dry cloth.
4- Carefully fit the new filter element (2) on the outer
structure (3) beginning with the center.
1-010479-01-xx.svg
5- Fold the filter element (2) between the bars (5) on the
outer structure (3).
The filter element (2) must be flush with the edge of the
exterior structure (3).
3 2
1-010477-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: filter element on the oven cooling system BDM-097 3/4
6- Insert the inner structure (1) fully into the outer structure
(3). 1
The lugs (4) lock the inner structure (1) into position.
F Check that the filter element (2) is in the correct
position.
2 3
1-010480-01-xx.svg
A filter element (2) which is incorrectly fitted between

the structures (1 ; 3) will lead to pollution in the oven
cooling system.
7- Repeat all of the steps above until all of the oven
cooling filters have been reconditioned.
4
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-010476-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-097 Removal/refit: filter element on the oven cooling system 2
Dispose of the used filter elements (2) in compliance

with current legislation.
8- Cover the reconditioned filters and store them in a
clean, dry place.
1-010478-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel BDM-105 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Depending on the machine configuration, the bottle

outfeed wheel may be fitted with a quick-release
removal system (A).
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
1-006580-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
None
1 2 3 A
1-011174-02-xx.svg
B
1-011240-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-105 Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel 1
PROCEDURE

machine.
Removal
2- Insert the lever (1) into its housing.
3- Turn the lever (1) clockwise.
The assembly is released.
4- Remove the lever (1).
5- Lift and remove the bottle outfeed wheel (B).
Refit
7- Position the bottle outfeed wheel (B) using the
positioning guide pin (2).
F Check that the groove on the flange (3) is pressed
8- Insert the lever (1) into its housing.
9- Turn the lever (1) counter-clockwise.
10- Remove the lever (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
11- Close the safety doors. 2 3 1 2

1-011244-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve BDM-106 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
- the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006,
- PCC application (not) in Setting mode.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- 2 silencers (1).
Consumables
None
None
PROCEDURE
Removal

position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 1
machine.
3- Unscrew and remove the silencers (1).
1-010742-01-xx.svg
Refit
4- Fit and tighten the silencers (1).
5- Repeat as above, from step 1 until you have replaced
all of the silencers (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-010738-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-106 Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid BDM-107 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
For an intevention on several blow stations, use

manual rotation (and not the JOG) in order to protect
the low-pressure air circuit.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 5 8 6
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

2 4
Parts
- (7) solenoid valve .
Consumables
- clean, dry cloths. 7 3
Specific tools
None 1-010738-02-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removal
the work station using manual rotation, see
procedure "BCU-014.
machine.
4- Remove the electrical connector (2).

5- Disconnect the hoses (3 ; 4).
7- Remove the union (6).
9 10 8 6
8- Hold the solenoid (7) and remove the screws (8).
9- Unscrew and remove the silencers (9).
10- Remove the union (10).
1-010739-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-107 Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid 3
Refit
F Check the condition and the position of the seals (12).
12- Fit and tighten the connector (10).
13- Fit and tighten the silencers (9).
14- Position the solenoid (7) on the holes (13) on the
support (11).
15- Hold the solenoid (7) and tighten the screws (8). 9 10 12 6
1-010740-01-xx.svg
16- Position the connector (6).

8
18- Reconnect the hoses (3 ; 4).
F Make sure that the seal (14) is in position on the 13
electrical connector (2).
19- Connect the electrical connector (2).
BEFORE YOU FINISH 11

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit: tensioner wheel sectors BDM-122 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replace all the upper and lower sectors of the

tensioner wheel during the operation.
The following procedure is carried out in the zone

where the sectors (2 ; 4) are no longer in contact with
the spindle chain .
MACHINE STATUS

procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- sectors (2 ; 4).
Consumables
- cleaning agent NET A03,
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
1 2
procedure "BCU-013.
2- Bring the parts concerned up to your working position,

The bolts (1 ; 3) are fitted with light "LOCTITE 222"
threadlock. You may find some difficulty loosening the
fixing bolts (1 ; 3).
4- Remove the upper sector (2). 3 4
1-010790-01-xx.svg
6- Remove the lower sector (4).
Refit
8- Position the lower sector (4) on the tensioner wheel (5).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-122 Removal/refit: tensioner wheel sectors 3
Fit the bolts (1 ; 3) having applied "LOCTITE 222"

light threadlock.
10- Position the upper sector (2) on the tensioner wheel
(5).
12- Repeat the previous steps, from step 2, until all the
sectors (2 ; 4) of the tensioner wheel (5) have been
replaced.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-010791-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Opening/closing the infrared oven support BDM-131 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
When the machine stops, the cooling system cools

the infrared oven for 7 min.
Depending on the configuration of your machine:

- the number of infrared ovens is different. 1-006030-09-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS B A 1 B
- the machine is stopped,
- oven cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None 1-011492-03-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

F Wait for the oven cooling to stop. B
3
machine.
Opening
3- Hold the infrared oven support (A) by the handle (1).
4- Unscrew the fastener(s) (2) but do not remove them.
The infrared oven support (A) is no longer held. 4
2
5- Hold the handle (1) with your two hands and lower the
infrared oven support (A) through 90°.
The elements (3 ; 4) are in contact.
6- Release the handle (1).
1-013231-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-131 Opening/closing the infrared oven support 2
Closing
7- Hold the handle (1) with your two hands and lift the
infrared oven support (A) through 90°.
The element (A) is in the upper-most position.
8- Hold the infrared oven support (A) by the handle (1).
9- Fit and tighten the fixing parts (2).
The infrared oven support (A) is now held.
10- Release the handle (1).
1
1-011494-01-xx.svg
F Make sure that the cables (5) are in the correct
position.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

5
1
1-011492-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - infrared oven BDM-132 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

1-006030-09-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
None
3 A 2 3
PROCEDURE
1-011495-01-xx.svg

F Wait for the oven cooling to stop.
procedure "BCU-011.
machine.
4- Open the infrared oven support (1), see
procedure "BDM-131.
Removal
5- Disconnect the connectors (2).
6- Loosen the fixings (3) but do not remove them.
7- Lift the infrared oven (A) through 45°.
8- Release the fixing(s) (4).
9- Remove the infrared oven (A). 5 6 4 1 6 5
Never install an infrared oven (A) so that it is weight
bearing on its lamps . 1-011496-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-132 Removal/refit - infrared oven 2
Refit
11- Position the infrared oven (A) at 45° on its support (1).
12- Insert the fixings (4) into their housing .
13- Tilt the infrared oven (A) on its support (1).
14- POsition the infrared oven (A) on its support (1) using
the locator pins (5 ; 6).
F Make sure there is no gap between the infrared oven
(A) and the support (1).
16- Connect the connector(s) (2).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
17- Close the infrared oven support (1), see

procedure "BDM-131.
18- Set the height of the infrared oven support(s) (1), see 1 3
procedure "BRM-010.
1-011497-01-xx.svg
F Make sure that the infrared ovens (A) function
correctly, see procedure "BPU-007.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - lamp cap protective covers BDM-133 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

bearing on its lamps .
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006757-01-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
1- Remove the infrared oven (A), see

procedure "BDM-132.
A
Removal
2- Remove the bolts (5) and the washers (6)
3- Pull the tab (1).
4- Pull out the lug (2) from its slot (3).
The lower part of the cover (4) releases.
5- Remove the cover (4).
6- Repeat steps 2 to 5 untl you have removed all of the
covers (4).
1-011976-02-xx.svg
Refit
5
Clean the components using a clean dry cloth.
6
7- Insert the lug (2) into the slot (3).
8- Refit the protection (4).
9- Fit the bolt (5) and the washer (6).
10- Tighten the bolt (5)
11- Repeat steps 7 to 10 until you have refitted all of the
covers (4).
1 2 4
1-011977-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-133 Removal/refit - lamp cap protective covers 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

4
1
1-011503-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - infrared oven reflectors BDM-134 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Handle with care so as not to damage the part(s) (1).


bearing on its lamps (4). 1-006757-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- reflectors (1).
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
A
procedure "BDM-131.
procedure "BDM-132.
4- Remove the protections (2 ; 3), see
procedure "BDM-133.
5- Remove the lamp(s) (4), see procedure "BDE-009.
The reflectors (1) are secured into the support bars
(5) and may be difficult to remove and replace.
1-011976-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-134 Removal/refit - infrared oven reflectors 2
2 4 1 8 3 9 10
1-011977-02-xx.svg
Removal
8- Pull the support bars (5) apart slightly and pull out the
notch (9) on the reflectors (1) from the frame (10).
The reflectors (1) have been removed.
Refit
9- Clean the parts (1) using a clean dry cloth.
Make sure you fit the reflectors (1) the right way
around. 5
1-011987-01-xx.svg
10- Pull the support bars (5) apart slightly and insert the
notch (9) on the reflectors (1) into the frame (10).
8
11- Position the support (8).
12- Position the bolts (6) and the washers (7).
The reflectors (1) have been fitted.
F Make sure there are no gaps between the reflectors
(1).
F Check the alignment of the reflectors (1). 4
BEFORE YOU FINISH

10
14- Fit the lamp(s) (4), see procedure "BDE-009.
F Make sure there is no stress between the lamps (4) and
the reflectors (1).
15- Fit the protections (2 ; 3), see procedure "BDM-133. 1-011511-02-xx.svg

procedure "BDM-131.
lamps (1).
F Make sure that the infrared ovens (A) function
correctly, see procedure "BPU-007.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - false lamps BDM-135 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replace the part(s) with equipment with identical

Warning - risk of burns.

1-006030-09-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- reflectors (1),
- pin (2).
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
None
A
PROCEDURE
1-011501-01-xx.svg

F Wait for the oven cooling to stop. 2 3 2
procedure "BDM-131.
Removal
F Check that the reflector(s) (1) are cold.
3- Hold the reflector (1) and remove the pin (2).

4- Remove the reflector (1).
The false lamp (A) has been removed.
Refit
6- Insert the reflector (1) into the support (3). 1
7- Insert the pin (2).
The false lamp (A) has been fitted.
1-011982-01-xx.svg
false lamps (A).
F Make sure that the false lamps (A) are correctly aligned
on each side of the oven .
F Make sure that the false lamps (A) are all at the same
height on each side of the oven .
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-135 Removal/refit - false lamps 2
If there is an production article change, set the heights

of the false lamps (A), see procedure "BRM-050.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BDM-131.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - stretching cylinder yoke BDM-139 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- yoke (1),
- inserts (2),
- coupling (3).
Consumables
Specific tools
- slide hammer ,
- jet .
PROCEDURE
1- Bring the stretching cylinder (4) forward to the working

position using manual rotation, see
procedure "BCU-014.
procedure "BCU-008.
procedure "BCU-011.
4- Purge the strtching cylinder (4), see
procedure "BDM-014.
The stretching cylinder is no longer blocked in the up-
position and the rod can slide freely.
Removal
5- Separate the yoke (1) from the cylinder rod (4), see
procedure "BDM-014.
The bolt (5) has been fitted with a threadlock 1 6 2 3 5
"LOCTITE 222". Unscrewing the bolt (5) may prove a
little stiff. 1-011552-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-139 Removal/refit - stretching cylinder yoke 2
7- Remove the bolt (5)

8- Remove the coupling (3).
9- Remove the yoke (1).
10- Remove the inserts (2) using a slide hammer.
Refit
12- Position the inserts (2) in the slide (6) using a jet.
13- Position the yoke (1) in the slide (6).
14- Position the coupling (3) in the yoke (1).
16- Position the screw (5) in the coupling (3).
17- Tighten the bolt (5) to a torque of 7 N.m.
18- Assemble the yoke (1) in the cylinder rod (4), see
procedure "BDM-014.
19- Set the gap between the roller (7) and the stretching
cam (8), see procedure "BDM-014.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The procedure is now complete. 7 8 1
1-006670-04-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - front and rear shell support slides BDM-141 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-006030-01-xx.svg
Replace the part(s) (5 ; 8) with equipment with

identical technical characteristics.

procedure "BSU-001.
Working on hot molds
The following procedure is carried out on cold molds. Some 5
mold.
In these cases always follow the following safety 8
instructions:
1-011558-01-xx.svg
stipulated risks.

MACHINE STATUS
3
- cold molds.

procedure "BCU-002,
- PCC application set to "Settings", 2
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

- front slide (5),

- rear slide (8).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-141 Removal/refit - front and rear shell support slides 2
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Wear protective glasses.

procedure "BCU-013.
procedure "BSU-001.
procedure "BSU-001.
Removal
Do not remove the compensation seal (1).
5- Remove the left shell support (2)/ left mold shell (3)
7- Remove the front slide (5) and the front shim (6).
9- Remove the rear slide (8) and the rear shim (9).
Refit
F Check the condition of the compensation seal (1).
- If the seal (1) is in good condition.
· Go to the next step. 8 10 2 5
- If the seal (1) is worn.
· Replace the seal (1), see procedure "BDM-016. 1-11559-01-xx.svg
11- Position the rear shim (9)/rear slide (8) assembly on the
left support block (10). 4 7
8
13- Position the front shim (6)/front slide (5) assembly on 5

the left support block (10). 9
6
15- Position the left shell support (2)/left mold shell (3) 1
assembly on the left support block (10), see
procedure "BDM-016.
procedure "BSU-001.
1-11560-01-xx.svg
all of the elements (5 ; 8).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - front and rear shell support slides BDM-141 3/4

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-141 Removal/refit - front and rear shell support slides 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit - nozzle cylinder distributor silencers BDM-142 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-006030-01-xx.svg
Depending upon the type of silencer (1 ; 3), the

removal/refit procedure may differ.
A B
The number of components (1 ; 3) varies accordingto
the machine configuration.

identical technical characteristics. 1 3
Certain illustrations represent standard parts and may

not correspond to the options actually fitted on your
machine.
1-011561-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- type A silencers (1),
- type B silencers (3).
X
1 2
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
1-010699-02-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-142 Removal/refit - nozzle cylinder distributor silencers 3

procedure "BCU-013.
position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 1
X
Type (A) silencers
Removal 1-011563-01-xx.svg
Depending upon the machine configuration, the

silencers (1) may be located either on the left or the
right of the nozzle cylinder (2).
3- Unscrew the silencer(s) (1) and remove.
Refit
4- Position the silencer(s) (1) and tighten.
5- Repeat steps 3 to 4 until all of the components have
1
been replaced (1).
1-011564-01-xx.svg
Type (B) silencers
Removal
The silencers (3) are located behind the nozzle 6

cylinder (2).
7
8
Note the direction in which the component (6) is
fitted. 4;5 X
3
7- Remove the bracket (6)/silencer (3)/connector (7)
assembly. 9
8- Remove the silencer (3) using the flat sides (8).
9- Repeat steps 6 to 8 to remove the second silencer (3).
1-011565-01-xx.svg
Refit
Make sure you fit the component (6) in the right

direction.
10- Assemble the connector (7), bracket (6) and silencer
(3).
11- Tighten the silencer (3) using the flat surfaces (8).
12- Position the bracket (6)/silencer (3)/connector (7)
assembly on the stretching support (9).
15- Repeat steps 10 to 14 to fit the second silencer (3).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - bearings on the bottle outfeed wheel retractable guide BDM-143 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replace all of the self-lubricating bearings during this

procedure.
Do not grease the parts which are in contact with the

self-lubricating bearings .
1-007205-13-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 11 17
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- bushings (15 ; 16).
Consumables
Specific tools
- set of thickness gauges, 1-010616-02-xx.svg
- jet ,
- plastic mallet ,
- slide hammer .
PROCEDURE

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-143 Removal/refit - bearings on the bottle outfeed wheel retractable guide 2
Removal
1- Remove the ejector guide (1) from the bottle 5 10 9 12 19
outfeed , see procedure "BDM-047.
2- Remove the bolt (2), the washer (3) and the block (4).
6
4- Remove the brake bolt (7) and the washer (8).
5- Remove the bolt (9) and the washer (10). 11
6- Remove the under-neck guide support (11)/shaft (12)

assembly. 14
7- Remove the peelable shim(s) (13).
8- Remove the support shaft (14). 17
9- Remove the bearings (15 ; 16) from the support plate
(17).
4
3 2 7 8 18
1-011577-01-xx.svg
Refit
Ensure that you follow the manufacturer’s assembly

recommendations (15 ; 16). 13
12
11- POsition the bearing (15) in the support plate (17).
12- POsition the bearing (16) in the support plate (17). 14
13- Position the shaft (14) in the bearings (15 ; 16).
14- Position the peelable shm (13) on the support shaft 15
(14). 19
17
16 18
1-011578-01-xx.svg
Refit the same number of peelable shims (13) as were

removed.
15- Simultaneously position the under-neck guide (11)/
shaft (12) assembly on the support shaft (14) and the 15

cylinder yoke (18).
16- Position the bolts (5) and the washers (6).
18- Position the bolt (9) and the washer (10) on the under-
neck guide support (11).
16
19- Fit the washer (8) and the lock nut (7) on the bolt (9).
21- Position the bolt (2), the washer (3) and the block (4) on
the support shaft (14).
Position the under-neck guide support (11) on the 1-011579-01-xx.svg
thrust bolt (19).

22- Tighten the bolt (2) up to a gap of j = 0,1mm between
the block (4) and the bearing (16).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - bearings on the bottle outfeed wheel retractable guide BDM-143 3/4
F Make sure that the under-neck guide (11) rotates

correctly.
23- Fit the ejection guide (1) on the bottle outfeed , see
procedure "BDM-047.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

4 2 16 17
1-011580-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-143 Removal/refit - bearings on the bottle outfeed wheel retractable guide 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - stretching cylinder silencers BDM-144 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- silencer (1).
Consumables
- "LOCTITE 243" threadlock.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

1
procedure "BCU-013.
Removal
The silencers (1) have been fitted with threadlock

1
"LOCTITE 243". The silencers (1) may be hard to
unscrew.
3- Unscrew the silencer(s) (1) and remove.
Refit
4- Apply "LOCTITE 243" threadlock on the silencer (1)
threads.
5- Position the silencer(s) (1) and tighten.
been replaced (1).
1-011566-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-144 Removal/refit - stretching cylinder silencers 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - mold opening/closing roller BDM-145 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
- high pressure air circuit supply on, see
procedure "BCU-005.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- follower (1).
Consumables
Specific tools
- small vice.
PROCEDURE

JOG implementation window, see
procedure "BCU-013.
procedure "BCU-013.
2- Bring the roller(s) (1) around to your working position
using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3
Removal
4
The nut (3) has been tightened with "LOCTITE 243" 6
threadlock. The nut (3) may be a little stiff when
1
untightening.
4- Remove the nut (3) and the washer (4). 5
5- Remove the shaft(2)/rollers (1)/ spacer (5) assembly.
1
The rollers (1) on the shaft (2) are separated by a
spacer (5). 2
6- Remove the rollers (1) from the shaft (2) using a small
clamp or a mallet. 1-011568-01-xx.svg
Refit
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-145 Removal/refit - mold opening/closing roller 2
clamp.
clamp.
shaft (2).
12- Position the shaft(2)/rollers (1)/ spacer (5) assembly on
the connecting rod (6).
13- Fit the nut (3) and the washer (4).
F Make sure that the rollers move freely (1).
been replaced (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the mold opening/closing lever setting, see
procedure "BRM-001.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - stretching cylinder roller BDM-146 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.
Replace the roller (1) with an identical one.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- follower (1).
Consumables
Specific tools
- small vice.
PROCEDURE

JOG implementation window, see 6
procedure "BCU-013.
5
2- Bring the follower (1) concerned up to your working
position, using the JOG, see procedure "BDM-013. 1

Removal
The bolt (2) has been fitted with a threadlock

"LOCTITE 222". Unscrewing the bolt (2) may prove a
little stiff. 2
4- Remove the bolt (2)
5- Remove the washer (3). 1-011569-01-xx.svg
6- Remove the shaft (4)/roller (1) assembly.

clamp or a mallet.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-146 Removal/refit - stretching cylinder roller 2
Refit
clamp.
11- Position the spacer (5) on the shaft (4)/roller (1)
assembly.
12- Position the rod (4) in the slide (6).
1
15- Tighten the bolt (2) to a torque of 33 N.m. 7
been replaced (1). 1-006670-05-xx.svg
F Set the gap between the roller (1) and the stretching
cam (7), see procedure "BDM-014.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - transfer arm springs BDM-147 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

wheel.
The number of springs varies according to the transfer

arm type (A ; B ; C ; D).
Replace all the springs of the transfer arms (A ; B ; C ;

D) at the same time.
Always replace the springs (1 ; 2 ; 22 ; 25 ; 31 ; 34) in 1-006757-01-xx.svg

pairs to avoid stress on the guide system.
This procedure must be carried out on the

workbench.

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
A C B D
- springs .
Consumables
- normal threadlock "LOCTITE 243",
- strong threadlock "LOCTITE 638".
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
1-013575-01-xx.svg
1- Remove the transfer arms , see procedure "BDM-003.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-147 Removal/refit - transfer arm springs 2
Position return spring (1 ; 2) of head (13) of transfer arm

type (A ; C)
Removal
4- Remove the washers (4 ; 5 ; 6).
5- Remove the spring spacer (7).
7- Remove the bolt (8). 1
12
8- Remove the washers (9 ; 10).
6
9- Remove the spring spacer (11).
10- Remove the spring (1). 7
Refit 5
4 3
1-011570-02-xx.svg
Follow the correct order when refitting the

components (3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 7 ; 1 ; 6 ; 12).
2
13- Position the screw (3) / washer (4 ; 5) / spring spacer
(7) / spring (1) / washer (6) assembly on the arm
support (12). 1
13
11
10
Follow the correct order when refitting the
components (8 ; 9 ;10 ;11 ; 1 ;13). 9
16- Position the bolts (8)/ washers (9 ; 10) / spring spacer
(11) / spring (1) assembly on the grip support (13). 8
18- Repeat the procedure to replace the component(s) (2).
1-011571-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - transfer arm springs BDM-147 3/4

type (B)
Removal
24
21- Remove the washers (15 ; 16 ; 17). 17 25
15
24- Remove the washers (19 ; 20 ; 21).
26
Refit
22
18 19 20 21 23
Make sure you fit the component(s) (18 ; 19 ; 20 ; 22 ;
21 ; 23) in the correct order and in the right direction.
1-013647-01-xx.svg
28- Position the screw (18), washer (19 ; 20 ; 21) and spring
(22) assembly on the support (23).
32- Repeat the procedure to replace the component(s)
(25).
type (D) 34
Removal
33- Remove the spring (31) from the support (33).
32
35- Remove the bolt (27). 30
36- Remove the washers (28 ; 29 ; 30). 29
28
Refit

31
33 35
1-013649-01-xx.svg
42- Repeat the procedure to replace the component(s)
(34).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-147 Removal/refit - transfer arm springs 2
Grip closing spring (36) of transfer arm type (A ; B ; C)

Removal
43- Remove the fixing bolts (37 ; 38).
44- Remove the right grip (39) / left grip support
(40) / spring (36) assembly.
13
Refit 36
46- Position the spring (36) between the right spring support 39
(39) and the left spring support (40). 38
47- Position the right grip support (39) / left grip support
(40) / spring (36) assembly in the grip support (13). 37
48- Apply "LOCTITE 638" threadlock to the bolts (37 ; 38).
49- Position the screws (37 ; 38).
50- Tighten the bolts (37 ; 38). 1-011572-02-xx.svg
Grip closing spring (41) of transfer arm type (D)

Removal 44
Do not touch the grip opening adjustment fixing (42).
51- Remove the spring (41) from the pins (43 ; 44) using an 43
appropriate tool .
Refit 41
53- Position the spring (41) on the pins (43 ; 44) using an
appropriate tool .
1-011576-02-xx.svg
Return spring (45) of oriented head of transfer arm type (B ;
D)
Removal
55- Remove the spring (45) from the rollers (46 ; 47).
Refit
47
58- Position the spring (45) on the rollers (46 ; 47).
26
BEFORE YOU FINISH
F Make sure that the transfer arm assembly functions
correctly.
59- Fit the transfer arm , see procedure "BDM-003, 46 45
1-013650-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable cam BDM-148 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-006030-33-xx.svg
Replace all of the self-lubricating bearings during this

procedure.
Do not grease the parts which are in contact with the

self-lubricating bearings .
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds,
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002, 28 2 1

1-011596-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-005.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- bushings (22 ; 23),
- ring (16),
- shaft (17),
- plates (20),
- spring (8).
Consumables
Specific tools
- jet ,
- expansible extractor ,
- caliper ,
- slide hammer .
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-148 Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable cam 3
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Bring the mold opening/closing rollers (1) around using
the JOG to access the retractable cam (2), see
procedure "BCU-013.
Removal
4- Measure the distance (X) between the short screw (4)
and the long screw (5) using the calipers.
The spring (8) is slack.
13- Remove the stop pins (13).
14- Remove the thust (12).
15- Hold the shaft (17) and remove the screw (14) and the
washer (15).
16- Remove the collar (16).
If necessary, bring the mold opening/closing rollers (1)
around using the JOG to access the retractable cam
(2), see procedure "BCU-014.
18- Remove the retractable cam (2).
19- Remove the bolts (18 ; 19).
20- Remove the shoe(s) (20).
17
21- Remove the peelable shim(s) (21).
22- Remove the bearings (22 ; 23).
6 4 7 8 28 2 12
1-011597-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable cam BDM-148 3/4
Refit
23- Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths. 4 8
The bearing (22) should be flush with the surface
(24).
24- Position the bearing (22) in the bore (25).
The bearing (23) should be flush with the surface
(26).
25- Position the bearing (23) in the bore (27).
Position the same number of peelable shims as
5
before disassembly. X
26- Position the peelable shim(s) (21).

1-011598-01-xx.svg
27- Position the plate(s) (20).
28- Tighten the bolts (18 ; 19).
29- Position the retractable cam (2).
30- Pass the shaft (17) through the retractable cam (2). 6
31- Position the ring (16) between the bearing (23) and the
shaft (17) and hold it there. 7
33- Fit the bolt (14) and the washer (15). 29
F Check the rotation of the retractable cam (2). 9
8
5
4 3
1-011599-01-xx.svg
Refer to the set of drawings supplied with the machine

to identify the exact dimension Y to be applied. 13 10 2 17
F Check the gap Y using a set of thickness gauges.

- If the gap is not correct.
· Adjust the number of peelable shims (21) to set
the height of the retractable cam (2).
12
- If the gap is correct.
35- Position the thrust (12) on the cam (2).

36- Fit the stop pins (13).
38- Fit the screw (11) and the nut (10).
40- Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock to the bolts (4). 11 28 16 15 14
41- Position the screw (4), the spring (8) and the spacer (9)
on the tensioner (29). 1-011600-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-148 Reconditioning the mold opening/closing retractable cam 3

43- Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock to the bolts (5). 18 20 19 22
44- Position the screw (5) at the end of the spring (8) and
on the cam (2).
28 21 27 23 25
1-011601-01-xx.svg
Refer to the set of drawings supplied with the machine

24 22 17 2
to identify the exact dimension X to be applied.
F Check the distance X between the screw (4) and the
screw (5) using the calipers .
· Tighten or loosen the screw (7) to obtain the
required distance (X).
The spring tension (8) is now correct.
- If the gap is correct. Y
· Tighten the lock-nut (6).
26 23 16 20 28
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-011602-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Reconditioning the stretching cylinder distributor BDM-149 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Replace the coil (3) when reconditioning the

stretching cylinder distributor.

same time.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A 14 1 12 18

Parts
- distributor reconditionnig kit (A),
- coil (3).
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
1- Remove the distributor (C), see procedure "BDM-029.

Removal 9 10 11 4
1-011614-01-xx.svg

3- Remove the bolts (2). C
2
3 16
8
6
7
15
1-011615-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-149 Reconditioning the stretching cylinder distributor 2

6- Remove the bolts (5 ; 6).
7- Remove the covers (7 ; 8).
3
8- Remove the seals (9).
9- Remove the pads (10 ; 11).
Use the orifices in the body (13) to extract the drawer
(14).
11- Remove the tray (14).
13- Remove the end-plate (16). 4
1-011616-01-xx.svg

18 17
13
1-011618-01-xx.svg
Refit
16- Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths. 3 16
17- Insert the seal (18).
18- Position the screws (17).
19- Position the end-plate (16).
13
8 14 12 7
1-011617-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Reconditioning the stretching cylinder distributor BDM-149 3/4
Make sure you fit the drawer (14) in the right direction,
B 8 1 13
see drawing (B).
21- Fit the tray (14).
22- Insert the spring (12).
23- Fit the cushioning pad (11).
17 14 12
1-011619-01-xx.svg
24- Fit the cushioning pad (10).

25- Apply "LOCTITE 222" threadlock to the bolts (5 ; 6). 11 8 9 7 10
26- Position the covers (7 ; 8).
27- Insert the screws (5 ; 6) and tighten.
29- Fit the coil (3) onto the body (13).
30- Insert the screws (2) and tighten.
32- Fit the distributor , see procedure "BDM-029.

F Make sure the parts (C) work properly.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-149 Reconditioning the stretching cylinder distributor 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Reconditioning a solenoid valve "Tornado" BDM-150 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The number of solenoid valves (C) will vary

depending on the machine configuration.
The pilot kit (B) is not subject to preventive

maintenance but must be replaced if faulty.
The piston kit (A) needs to be reconditioned every 6

000 hours. At 12 000 hour(s), the solenoid valve (C) 1-006757-01-xx.svg
must be replaced, see procedure "BDM-063.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

A B
Parts
- piston kit (A),
- pilot kit (B).
Consumables
Specific tools
None
1 8 5 2 9 3
PROCEDURE
1-011706-01-xx.svg
1- Remove the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026.
2- Remove the solenoid valves (C), see
procedure "BDM-063.
Removal/refit - piston kit (A)
Removal
3- Remove the chcek valve (1).
5- Separate the cover (3) from the valve body (4). 9
6
1-011583-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-150 Reconditioning a solenoid valve "Tornado" 3
Make sure you do not damage the seal (9).
6- Remove the piston (5).
1-011584-01-xx.svg
Refit
C
same time.
8- Lightly grease the bores (6 ; 7) using the tube of grease
3
included in the kit (A).
9- Remove the piston (5) from its packaging (8). 9
10- Insert the piston (5) int the valve body (4).
5
F Check the position of the seal (9).
12- Assemble the cover (3) on the valve body (4).
13- Position the check valve (1).
been replaced (A).
Removal/refit - pilot kit (B)
4
Removal
15- Separate the cover (3) from the valve body (4). 2
16- Remove the seal (9) from the cover (3).
1
Refit

same time.
18- Position the seal (9) in the cover (3). 1-011585-01-xx.svg
19- Position the cover (3) on the valve body (4).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Reconditioning a solenoid valve "Tornado" BDM-150 3/4

been replaced (B).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Control the state of the seating surfaces (10) of the
solenoid valves. 3
· If grooving is present, replace the "TORNADO"
solenoid valve assembly, see
4
procedure "BDM-002.
21- Fit the solenoid valves (C), see procedure "BDM-063.
22- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026. 1
10
1-007423-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-150 Reconditioning a solenoid valve "Tornado" 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit - spindle chain BDM-151 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-006030-119-xx.svg

technicians.
The number of chain links packed varies depending 2 1

upon the machine configuration.
Relace all of the spindle chain links with identical

ones.
1-006205-02-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- spindle chain .
Consumables
- leather gloves.
Specific tools
None
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-151 Removal/refit - spindle chain 3
PROCEDURE

machine.
procedure "BCU-013.
3- Depending on the machine configuration, remove the A
procedure "BDM-012.
1-011590-01-xx.svg
4- Bring link 001 (3) up to the working position using the

5- Slightly loosen the spindle chain to free the spindle 5
6
tips , see procedure "BRM-003.
Removal 4
The number of links in a section (A) varies depending
on its packing. Remove the same number of links.
6- Remove a section of links (A) from the spindle
chain , see procedure "BDM-010, see 7
X
procedure "BDM-013.
Refit
Always follow the orientation of the articulated links 1-010469-03-xx.svg
(4) and the H links (5) with regard to the original

setting.
Follow the numbering on the links you have replaced.
7- Fit the start of the new section of links (A) at the end of
the old section , see procedure "BDM-010, see
procedure "BDM-013.
8- Note the first spindle on the first section replaced. 8
9- Close the spinle chain using a sleeve (6), see
procedure "BDM-010.
The spindle chain is now secure.
F Check that the sprockets (7) engage on the spindle
drive chain. 1-011591-01-xx.svg
10- Bring the next section (A) forward using the JOG.
11- Remove the sleeve (6).
The spindle chain may come away.
been replaced .
13- Close the spidle chain , see procedure "BDM-010, see
procedure "BDM-013.
F Make sure the screw (8) is present on the spindle link
number 001.
procedure "BRM-003.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit - spindle chain BDM-151 3/4
15- Adjust the tension of the spindle drive chains , see

procedure "BRM-032.
16- Fit the spindle tips (2) and the ejectors (1) on the
spindle chaain as per the machine configuration , see
procedure "BDM-012.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

19- Dispose of used parts according to current legislation.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-151 Removal/refit - spindle chain 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit - spindle chain rotation chain BDM-152 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Do not modify the settings of the tensioning bolts (5 ;

11).
Use the tensioning wheel (1) to slacken the fixed

chain (6).
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- fixed chains (6).
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Remove the spindle chain , see procedure "BDM-151.
3- Complete slacken the tensioner wheel (1), see
procedure "BRM-003.
Removal
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-152 Removal/refit - spindle chain rotation chain 3
4- Remove the quick fasteners (2 ; 3).

5- Remove the spring (4)/tensioner bolt (5) assembly. 7 8
Remove the fixed chain (6) from the guides (7 ; 8) on
the same side as the tensioner wheel (1) first.
6- Remove the fixed chain (6) from the guides (7 ; 8) on
the half-plate (9).
6 4 5 11
1-011622-01-xx.svg
6 A 10 4 5
1-011623-01-xx.svg
7- Repeat steps 4 to 6 to remove the second fixed chain

(6).
Refit
A
F Check the length of the new fixed chain (6) in relation to 2
the old one.
- If the length is correct.
- If the length is not correct.

· Remove links until the length is correct.
1-011624-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit - spindle chain rotation chain BDM-152 3/4
Insert the fixed chain (6) in the guides (7 ; 8) on the

3
same side as the tensioner wheel (1) first.
1-011625-01-xx.svg
9- Position the fixed chain (6) in the guides (7 ; 8) and the

half-plate (9).
10- Position the spring (4)/tensioner bolt (5) assembly in the
tensioner (10).
11- Fit the quick fasteners (2 ; 3).
12- Repeat steps 8824 to 11 to fit the second fixed chain
(6).
6 7
1-011626-01-xx.svg
13- Fit the spindle chain , see procedure "BDM-151.

9 1
procedure "BRM-003.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the settings for the oven spindle drive
chains, see procedure "BRM-032.
1-011061-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-152 Removal/refit - spindle chain rotation chain 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - stretching cylinder check valve BDM-153 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- check valve (6).
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
the work station using manual rotation, see
procedure "BCU-014.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-153 Removal/refit - stretching cylinder check valve 2
Check that the machine is powered down.
Removal
4- Disconnect the hoses (1 ; 2 ; 3).
5- Remove the silencer (4), see procedure "BDM-144.
6- Remove the distributor (5), see procedure "BDM-029.
7- Unscrew the check valve (6) using the straight sides (7)
and remove.
Refit
9- Tighten up the check valve (6) using the straight sides
(7).
10- Fit the silencer (4), see procedure "BDM-144.
11- Fit the distributor (5), see procedure "BDM-029.
12- Reconnect the hoses (1 ; 2 ; 3).
13- Repeat steps 4 to 12 until all of the components have 5 1 6
been replaced (6).
1-011603-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH 7 6 4

1 2 3
1-011604-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit - PUPM mold support unit locking pins BDM-154 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION

identical technical characteristics.
MACHINE STATUS
- cold molds.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- locking pins (27 ; 28).
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
procedure "BCU-013.
3- Bring the relevant treatment station around to your
working position using the JOG, see
procedure "BCU-013.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BDM-154 Removal/refit - PUPM mold support unit locking pins 3
Removal
7
Do not open the mold support unit.
4- Remove the washers (1) and the fixing screws (2) from
the spring support (3).
5- Remove the spring support (3)/magnet support (29)
assembly.
7- Remove the holding lock (5).
procedure "BSU-001.
12- Disassemble the bracket (10).
13- Remove the bolt (11) and the washer (12). 1-006614-02-xx.svg
14- Remove the locking thrust (13).

The bolt (14) has been fitted with a threadlock
"LOCTITE 243". Unscrewing the bolt (14) may prove
a little stiff.
15- Hold the nut (15) and remove the bolt (14) and the
washer (16).
1
16- Remove the nut (15)/anti-torque guide (17).
2
The bolt (22) has been fitted with a threadlock 3
"LOCTITE 243". Unscrewing the bolt (22) may prove
a little stiff.
21- Remove the screws (22) and the washers (23) using the 5 4 29
flat sides on the linking rods (24).
1-006610-02-xx.svg
The shaft (25) may now slide freely through the right
support block (26).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

Note the respective location of the locking pin (27).
Note the direction in which the locking pins (27 ; 28)

10
are fitted.
23- Remove the linking rods (24) and the locking pins (27 ;
28). 9
Refit
8
Follow the order and direction of assembly for the
locking pins (27 ; 28) in the right support block (26).
25- Position the locking pins (27 ; 28) and the linking rods
(24) in the right support block(26).
26- Insert the shaft (25) and hold it in the right support block
(26).
27- Insert the linking rods (24) in the bores on th shaft (25). 1-011610-01-xx.svg

31- Fit the ring (21).
32- Insert the spring (20).
33- Fit the ring (19).
34- Fit the washer (18).
35- Fit the nut (15)/anti-torque guide (17) assembly.
37- Position the bolt (14) and the washer (16) on the nut
(15).
Apply the correct tightening torques .
For more information, refer to the drawings supplied

with the machine.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
38- Tighten the screw (14) to the recommended torque.

39- Position the locking thrust (13) on the anti-torque guide
(17). 11
41- Tighten the bolt (11). 12
42- Position the cover (7) on the right support block (26).
44- Position the safety bracket (10). 13
Place both hands under the nut (15) to lift the locking 25
pins (27 ; 28). 26
21
47- Lift the nut (15) and at the same time close the mold
support unit manually.
48- Release the nut (15). 20
The mold support unit is closed.
49- Position the holding lock (5).
50- Position the spring (4). 19
51- Position the spring support (3)/magnet support (29)
assembly. 17
18
54- Grease the locking system on the mold support
units, see procedure "BGM-019. 15

all of the elements (27 ; 28).
16
14
1-011611-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27
24
22 ; 23
28
24
25
1-011612-01-xx.svg
7
15
1-006680-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit onboard air circuit filters BDM-155 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.
The number of filters (4) varies depending on the

machine model and configuration.
The plastic bowls (2) are ceaned with soapy water or

other similar neutral products (non residual).
MACHINE STATUS 1-006030-18-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
- filter(s) (4).
Consumables
- soap product.
Specific tools
- strap wrench.
PROCEDURE
1- Bring the on-board air circuit (A) around to your working

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-155 Removal/refit onboard air circuit filters 2

machine, see procedure "BCU-012. A
machine.
gauges (1).
F Make sure there is no liquid inside the bowl (2).
- If there is no liquid.
- If there is liquid.
· Unscrew the cap (7).
The liquid drains out.
· Tighten the cap (7).
Removal
4- Unscrew the bowl (2) using a strap wrench.
5- Remove the bowl (2) and the seal (3). 2 1
6- Loosen and remove the filter (4).
1-011605-01-xx.svg
Refit
- If the seal (3) is worn replace it.
F Make sure the seal (5) is present on the filter (4).
7- Tighten the filter (4) onto the support (6).
F Make sure the bowl is clean (2).
- If the bowl is dirty.
· Clean the bowl (2) using soapy water. 5
· Wipe the bowl (2) using clean dry cloth.
4
1-011606-01-xx.svg
F Make sure the seal (3) is present on the bowl (2).
8- Tighten the bowl (2) using the strap wrench .
9- Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all of the components have 6
been replaced (4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH 4

10- Turn on the power supplies to the machine, see 3

procedure "BCU-001.
F Check for leaks.
7
1-011607-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - pneumatic control circuit silencers BDM-156 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION 1;2;4
5;6
1-006030-134-xx.svg
The number of components (2 ; 3 ; 5 ; 6) varies

accordingto the machine configuration.
1-011627-01-xx.svg
Replace the part(s) (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6) with equipment

with identical technical characteristics.
Certain illustrations represent standard parts and may

not correspond to the options actually fitted on your
machine.
1-006301-19-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDM-156 Removal/refit - pneumatic control circuit silencers 2
Parts to be replaced:
- silencer (1) on the 7 bar line, 2
- silencer (2) on the 40 bar line,
- silencer (3) on the preform feeder stabilization rail ,
- silencer (4) on the air recovery system (option),
- silencer (5 ; 6) on the braking system .
1-006316-03-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- silencer .
Consumables
- teflon tape.
Specific tools
None
3 3
PROCEDURE
1-013810-01-xx.svg
Removal
machine.
2- Unscrew the silencer(s) (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6) and
remove,
Refit
1-011635-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - pneumatic control circuit silencers BDM-156 3/4
4- Apply teflon tape (7) on the threaded section of the

silencer(s) (2). 5
5- Fit and tighten the silencers (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6).
been replaced (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Remove all debris in accordance with applicable

legislation.
1-011636-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDM-156 Removal/refit - pneumatic control circuit silencers 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit - spindle sprockets rotation chain guide BDM-157 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

technicians.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold,
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
4
- PCC application set to "Settings", 5
1-006075-04-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- guides (6).
Consumables
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Remove the spindle chain , see procedure "BDM-151.
3- Remove the fixed chain , see procedure "BDM-152.
4- Remove the nuts (1), washers (2) and bolts (3).
To faciltate tightening, the handles (4) can be 4
disengaged.
Depending on the configuration of your machine,

5
these elements (4) may vary visually but their
6
functions remain the same.
1-006076-05-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDM-157 Removal/refit - spindle sprockets rotation chain guide 3
5- Loosen the handles (4).

6- Open the rack (5) on the oven carefully.
7- Lift the guide (6) out.
Refit
8- Position the guide (6) on the supports (7).
9- Close the rack (5) on the oven carefully.
11- Position the guide (6) up against the chain holder (8).
12- Position the bolts (3), the washers (2) and the nuts (1).
been replaced (6). 6 7 1;2;3
1-011608-01-xx.svg
15- Fit the fixed chains , see procedure "BDM-152.

16- Fit the spindle chain , see procedure "BDM-151.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

8 3 6
1-011609-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting the mold opening/closing lever ..................................................................................................... BRM-001
Setting the heights of the transfer arms ................................................................................................... BRM-002
Setting the tension of the spindle chains .................................................................................................. BRM-003
Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer ....................................................................................... BRM-005
Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer ................................................................................................... BRM-006
Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds ................................................................................................ BRM-007
Setting the tensions on the timing belts .................................................................................................... BRM-008
Setting the stretching bottom thrust .......................................................................................................... BRM-009
Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields ........................................................................................ BRM-010
Setting the infeed rail ................................................................................................................................ BRM-011
Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads ......................................................................... BRM-012
Setting the unscrambler roller assembly .................................................................................................. BRM-013
Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts ............................................................................................... BRM-015
Setting the height of the unscrambler unit ................................................................................................ BRM-016
Setting up the stabilization rail assembly ................................................................................................. BRM-017
Setting the mold compression system ...................................................................................................... BRM-021
Setting the bottle base outfeed guide ....................................................................................................... BRM-022
Setting the height of the extraction hood .................................................................................................. BRM-025
Setting the transfer arm grips ................................................................................................................... BRM-031
Setting the oven spindle drive chains ....................................................................................................... BRM-032
Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven infeed wheel ................................................................. BRM-036
Setting the heights of the dummy lamps .................................................................................................. BRM-050
27/05/2013 C - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
C - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure Part C
2 Setting the mold opening/closing lever BRM-001 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
If the same opening/closing lever is regularly mis-

adjusted, do not tighten to the highest torque rather
check that the shaft and the various assembled parts
are correctly greased.

technicians.
1-006030-37-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 5
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
1
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 3
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools 2
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Unbolt the button (1) from the support (2).

3- Install the cam (3) in the upper part of the support (2).
1-008393-01-xx.svg
4- Bolt the button (1).
5- Bring into position the lever (7) to be adjusted on the
cam (3) using manual rotation, see
procedure "BCU-014.
Check that the station to be adjusted is in closed
position and locked out.
6- Advance the roller (4) until opposite the mark (5) of the
cam (3) using manual rotation, see
procedure "BCU-014.
7-
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure
2/4 BRM-001 Setting the mold opening/closing lever 2
Loosen the bolts on the expanding assembler (6)

crosswise but do not remove them.
In normal use the components of the expanding 7 9
assembler (6) come apart when the bolts are
unscrewed. If you have any difficulty releasing the
parts of the assembler (6) use the bolts M10 and the
tappings M10 located at the position of the white bolts
(9).
8- Position the roller (4) into contact with the cam (3) and
align with mark (5).
F Make sure that the roller (4) rolls freely.
F Control play X < 0.05 mm between the roller (4) and the
cam (3).
F Check the gap Y = 0.05 mm between the connecting
rod (7) and the console (8).
9- Tighten up the bolts on the expanding assembler (6)
crosswise to a torque of 3,2 daN.m.
Tighten in crosswise fashion the bolts of the
expanding assembler (6) in the order indicated in the
illustration (A). 6
1-006671-02-xx.svg
Tightening up the expanding assembler (6) can

modify the gaps X and Y. A
F Check that the follower (4) rolls freely.
F Check the gaps X and Y again.
· If the gaps X and/or Y exceed tolerances go to step
7.
F Make sure that the bolts on the expanding assembler 12 1
(6) are not raised above the inner surface of the 8

5
connecting rod (7).
4
10- Unbolt the button (1) from the support (2). 9
10
3
6
7
2 11 © SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
1-006671-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the mold opening/closing lever BRM-001 3/4
11- Install the cam (3) in the lower part of the support (2).
X
12- Bolt the button (1). 8
procedure "BSU-001.
· If the mold support unit is difficult to open reset the Y
gap Y.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

7 6 4 3
1-008390-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-001 Setting the mold opening/closing lever 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the heights of the transfer arms BRM-002 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

A B
The reference transfer arm on a wheel is stamped
with the lowest number.
C
A bottle transfer arm inspection is carried out in (A).
A preform transfer arm inspection is carried out in

(B). 1-006030-36-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
- low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 14
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

13
Parts
None 1
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- dummy grip tooling (1), 1-010326-01-xx.svg
- grip height tool (2),

- comparator (3) and column,
- guide pin (4).
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-002 Setting the heights of the transfer arms 3
Checking the height of the reference transfer arm

2- Remove the mold support unit corresponding to the 2
reference transfer arm, see procedure "BDM-011.
3- Remove the pair of grips (5) from the reference transfer
arm , see procedure "BDM-024.
4- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the reference transfer arm
using the 2 bolts (6 ; 7).
1-006521-01-xx.svg
5- Position the grip height tooling (2) on the shell support

(8) for the mold support unit corresponding to the
reference transfer arm.
- For the preform transfer arm.
· Position the speed follower (9) at the marker
"FIN" engraved on the cam using the JOG
The dummy grip (1) positions above the grip
height tool (2).
- For a bottle transfer arm.
· Position the speed follower (9) at the marker 14
"DEBUT" engraved on the cam using the JOG
The dummy grip (1) positions above the grip 13
height tool (2).
3
4 5
1-010329-01-xx.svg
F Check the gap "X" between the 2 tools across the
length of the dummy grip (1) using a set of thickness 10 11
gauges.
- If the gap is correct.
· Refit the pair of transfer grips, see
procedure "BDM-024.

· Adjust the height of the transfer arm .
Transfer arm Preforms (mm) Transfer arm Bottles (mm)
X = 1 ±0,05 X = 0,7 ±0,05
Setting the height of the reference transfer arm

X
7- Tighten or loosen the shaft (11) to obtain the
measurement "X".
The height of the transfer arm is set. 2 1 14 12
9- Remove the grip height tool (2).
10- Remove the 2 bolts (6 ; 7). 1-010259-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the heights of the transfer arms BRM-002 3/4
11- Remove the dummy grip (1).

F Make sure that the followers (9 ; 12) are centered on
the cam races (13).
- If they are not centered.
· Set the position of the followers , see
procedure "BDM-038.
12- Refit the pair of transfer grips, see
procedure "BDM-024.
Checking the other transfer arms
10 11
13- Position the reference transfer arms (14) to (C) using
the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.
14- Position the pin (4) in the grip (5) on the reference
transfer arm (14).
15- Fit the comparator (3) and the column above the
reference transfer arm (14).
16- Position the sensor on the comparator (3) on the pin 14
(4).
17- Position the needle on the comparator (3) on "0".
The comparator (3) must not move.
7
18- Fit the pin (4) in the transfer arm you wish to check.
19- Position the transfer arm under the comparator (3) 5
using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.
F Check the position of the needle.
- If the needle is not at "0". 6 12 9
· Adjust the height of the transfer arm .
- If the pin is on "0". 1-010324-01-xx.svg
· Repeat the previous steps, from step 13 until all

the transfer arms have been checked.
Setting the other transfer arms
21- Tighten or loosen the shaft (11) so that the needle on
the comparator (3) is at "0".
The transfer arm is at the same height as the
reference transfer arm.
The height of the transfer arm is set.
F Make sure that the followers (9 ; 12) are centered on
the cam races (13).

- If they are not centered.
· Set the position of the followers , see
procedure "BDM-038.
- If centring is correct.
· Repeat the previous steps, from step 13 until all
the transfer arms have been checked.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
23- Fit the mold on the mold support unit, see

procedure "BDM-011.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-002 Setting the heights of the transfer arms 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the tension of the spindle chains BRM-003 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The tension of the spindle chain needs to be set

correctly in order for the preforms to be conveyed
correctly through the oven.
1-006030-21-xx.svg
The spindle chain tension is determined by the

compression of the spring (1) on the tensioner wheel
(2).
Before making any adjustment to the value (A) of the

tensioner wheel spring (1), note the value (B)
indicated on the ruler (3) of the measurement kit.
1 2
1-010994-01-xx.svg
The function of the measurement kit is to check the

extension of the spindle chain.
Never use the measurement kit to adjust the tension

of the spindle chain.
MACHINE STATUS

procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
B 3
1-010779-02-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRM-003 Setting the tension of the spindle chains 2
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

JOG implementation window. 3 5 4 1
1- Connect the JOG to the work zone. see

procedure "BCU-013.
To adjust the tension of the spindle chain (4), the
spindle drive chains (5) must be slack, see
procedure "BRM-032.
The value (A) corresponds to the length of the spring

(1) once compressed.
2- Loosen or tighten the nut (6) using a dowel-pin punch.
The length of the spring (1) is A= 270 ±20 mm.
3- Adjust the tension of the spindle drive chains (5), see
procedure "BRM-032. A
F Check the value (A) of the spring (1) of the tensioner 6
wheel (2).
The tension of the spindle chain (4) and the spindle 1-011132-02-xx.svg
drive chains (5) must be correct before starting the

machine.
procedure "BCU-013.
F Make sure that the spindle chain functions correctly.
F Check the value (A) of the spring (1) of the tensioner
wheel (2).
F Check the settings for the oven spindle drive
chains, see procedure "BRM-032.
5- Note down the value (B) read on an information sheet.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer BRM-005 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
(P) is the meeting point between the preforms with the

grips on the preform transfer arms (4). P
Do not confuse point (P) and the synchronization
marker "SYNCHRO" (12) engraved on the transfer
cam.
1-006030-38-xx.svg
Check the general synchronization before attempting

any individual synchronization, see
procedure "BNM-012.
Check the belt tensions, see procedure "BRM-008.
11
Check the torque limiters are in working position.
1-010326-02-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None 5
Consumables
None 1-006528-01-xx.svg
Specific tools
- dummy grip tooling (1),
- oven wheel dummy sector tool (2),
- guide pin (3).
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-005 Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer 3

machine. 5 1 4 3 2 5
2- Remove the oven outfeed guide , see
procedure "BDM-028.
3- Remove one of the infeed wheel sectors on the oven
wheel, see procedure "BDM-023.
4- Fit the dummy oven wheel sector (2) using the bolts
(5).
5- Remove the grip from the preform transfer arm (4)
which corresponds to approximately 1 spindle from the
bore on the oven wheel sector (2), see
procedure "BDM-024.
6- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm (4).
7- Remove the preform transfer wheel/oven wheel
transmission belt (9).
8- Loosen, but do not remove, the 3 fixing bolts (6) on the
fine setting plate (10). 1-010325-01-xx.svg
9- Loosen the counter nuts (7) but do not remove them.

10- Position the bolts (6) in the middle of the oblong slots on
the fine setting plate (10) using the bolts (8).
12- Bring the roller (11) on the transfer arm (4) along to the
8
synchronization marker "SYNCHRO"(12) on the transfer 6
cam using the manual rotation system, see
10
13- Manually line up the bore on the dummy oven wheel
sector (2) with the bore on the dummy grip (1). 9
Setting the tension of a belt will change the angular
position of the synchronized elements.
1-006346-02-xx.svg
14- Position and set the oven wheel/preform transfer wheel
transmission belt (9), see procedure "BRM-008.
16- Adjust the alignment of the bore on the dummy oven
wheel sector (2) with the bore on the dummy grip (1) 11 12
using the bolts (8) on the fine setting plate (10).
17- Insert the pin (3) in the 2 bores on the tools (1) and (2).
F Make sure that the pin (3) is not obstructed.
- The pin (3) is not obstructed.

18- Tighten the bolts (6) on the fine setting plate (10).
The setting position is locked.
20- Remove the pin (3).
21- Remove the dummy sector on the oven wheel (2) using
the bolts (5).
22- Fit the oven wheel infeed wheel using the bolts (5), see
procedure "BDM-023.
23- Fit the oven outfeed guide, see procedure "BDM-028.
1-006756-01-xx.svg
24- Bring the transfer arm (4) around to the working position
procedure "BCU-014.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer BRM-005 3/4

26- Fit the transfer grip , see procedure "BDM-024.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the synchronization of the machine before
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-005 Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer BRM-006 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

procedure "BNM-012.
P
Check the torque limiters are in working position. 1-006030-50-xx.svg
Check the centering of the nozzle cylinders, see

1
procedure "BDM-015.
(P) is the meeting point of items with the transfer

grips.
1-010238-01-xx.svg


technicians:
9
- the second technician checks the positions of the
meeting points.
7
1-010326-05-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-006 Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer 3
To ensure correct synchronization:

- the dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely
through the guide ring (2) on the dummy grip (1),
- the reference transfer arm speed roller (9) should
position on the reference marking "DEBUT" on the
transfer cam (7).
1 2 3
1-010262-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

9
Parts
None
Consumables
None 7
Specific tools
- ring for dummy arm-head (2),

- dummy stretching rod (3),
- 3 preforms which have been cut shorter.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Remove the pair of grips from the reference transfer

3- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm .
4- Fit the ring (2) on the false grip (1).
5- Remove the stretching rod on the blowing station no.1.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer BRM-006 3/4
Make sure that the stretching and nozzle cylinders are

6- Bring blowing station no.1 around using the manual
rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014.
The mold shaft on blowing station no.1 is lined up with
marker "RDS" on the transfer cam (7).
7- Loosen the 3 fixing bolts (4) on the synchronization
device . 4 4
The transfer wheel (8) has an angle of clearance.
10- Place the dummy stretching rod (3) in the ring (2).
- If a bolt (4 ; 6) is up against the edge. 5 6 5
· Remove the dummy stretching rod (3).
1-006367-02-xx.svg
· Shift the corresponding belt by one notch.
· Set the tension of the belt, see
procedure "BRM-008.
11- Set the position of the transfer wheel using the fine
setting bolts (6) on the synchronization device.
The dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely in the
ring (2).
8
15- Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). 7
procedure "BDM-024. 1-006369-02-xx.svg
19- Insert the 3 cut preforms into the molds, before the
meeting point.
F Check the synchronization using the manual rotation
Setting can then be optimised. At normal production
speeds, the play and the inertia of the parts can

change the settings.
7
BEFORE YOU FINISH

starting production, see procedure "BNM-012. 1-006368-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-006 Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds BRM-007 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

procedure "BNM-012.
P
Check the torque limiters are in working position. 1-006030-29-xx.svg
Check the centering of the nozzle cylinders, see

1
procedure "BDM-015.
(P) is the meeting point of items with the transfer

grips.


technicians:
1-010238-01-xx.svg
- the second technician checks the positions of the
meeting points.
To ensure correct synchronization:

- the dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely
through the guide ring (2) on the dummy grip (1),
- the reference transfer arm speed roller (10) should
position on the reference marking "FIN" on the
transfer cam (8).
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None 10
Consumables
None 8
Specific tools
- ring for dummy arm-head (2),

- dummy stretching rod (3),
- 3 preforms which have been cut shorter.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-007 Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds 3
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Remove the pair of grips from the reference transfer
3- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm .
4- Fit the ring (2) on the false grip (1).
5- Remove the stretching rod on the blowing station no.
1, see procedure "BDM-026. 5
Make sure that the stretching and nozzle cylinders are
6- Bring blowing station no.1 around using the manual
rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 4 4
The mold shaft on blowing station no.1 is lined up with
marker "RDS" on the transfer cam (8).
6 7 6
1-006367-01-xx.svg
7- Loosen the 3 fixing bolts (4) on the synchronization

device (5).
The transfer wheel (9) has an angle of clearance.
10- Place the dummy stretching rod (3) in the ring (2).
- If a bolt (4 ; 7) is up against the edge.
· Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). 8
· Shift the corresponding belt by one notch.
· Set the tension of the belt, see
procedure "BRM-008.
1-006368-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds BRM-007 3/4
the reference transfer arm speed roller (11) should

position on the reference marking "RDS" on the
transfer cam (8).
11- Set the position of the transfer wheel (9) using the fine
setting bolts (7) on the synchronization device. 9
The dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely in the
ring (2).
10
1-010326-04-xx.svg

15- Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). 9
19- Insert the cut preforms 3 in the transfer grips, before the
meeting point.
2 technicians is required for the following operations. 1-006369-01-xx.svg
F Check the synchronization using the manual rotation

Setting can then be optimised. At normal production
speeds, the play and the inertia of the parts can
change the settings.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

8 11 1 2 3
1-010262-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-007 Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the tensions on the timing belts BRM-008 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The number of timing belts varies according to the

configuration of the machine.
Before any work on the tension of the timing belts,

check the adjustment values on the drawings
delivered with the machine., see
procedure "BNM-048.
Never adjust the setting bolts (1) for the tensioner (2)
positions.
1-006030-129-xx.svg
Check new belts after several hours of production.
If the belts lose their tension regularly after the

commissioning period check the settings and
conditions of the various mechanical parts and
replace the belt if necessary.
MACHINE STATUS 2
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None 1 7
Consumables
None 1-011014-01-xx.svg
Specific tools
- frequency meter (3) and instructions for use.
PROCEDURE
Setting the machine belt tensions

machine.
3- Depending on the configuration of the machine and if
necessary, remove the electrical box, see
procedure "BCU-036.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-008 Setting the tensions on the timing belts 2

the position indicated, see procedure "BNM-048.
· Go to step 20.
5- Loosen the counter nuts (5 ; 6) but do not remove
them.
The tension of a belt is adjusted by modifying the
position of the tensioner roller (2) present on each 3
belt .
6- Set the tension of the belt using the screw (7) and the 1-006530-01-xx.svg
check nut (6).

7- Tighten up the check nuts (5 ; 6).
9- Repeat steps 4 to 8 until you have set the tensions on
all of the belts.
The belt tensions are now set.
procedure "BCU-013.
the position indicated, see procedure "BNM-048. 2
· Repeat as above from step 4. 7
13- Depending on the configuration of the machine and if
necessary, position the electrical box, see
Setting the tension on the unscrambler roller belt

assembly is fitted with either an automatic (C) or a
manual (A ; B) tensioner. The automatic tensioners
(C) do not require any tension adjustment. C
14- Remove the protective cover .

F Check the tension on the belt using the frequency meter
(3) at the point indicated on the belt, see
procedure "BNM-048.
· Go to step 19.
· Go to the next step. 1-011017-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the tensions on the timing belts BRM-008 3/4
15- For a type (A) system:

· Loosen the counter-nut (9) but do not remove it. 9 10
· Tighten or loosen the bolt (10).
· Tighten the lock-nut (9).
1-008966-05-xx.svg
16- For a type (B) system:

· Loosen the screws (10) but do not remove them.
· Set the tension on the belt sing the nuts (9).
· Tighten the bolts (10).
· Tighten the nuts (9).
18- Rotate the unscrambler rollers a few times, using the
PCC, see procedure "BPU-008.
F Check the tension on the belt using the frequency meter
(3) at the point indicated on the belt, see
procedure "BNM-048. 10
· Repeat as above from step 15. 9 B
19- Fit the protective cover .
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-008 Setting the tensions on the timing belts 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the stretching bottom thrust BRM-009 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Set the bottom stretching thrusts (1) following a

change to the production item.
Never run the machine if any of the bottom thrusts (1)

have not been set.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- molds for the new production item mounted on the
machine.
procedure "BCU-001,
2
procedure "BCU-002,
3
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006200-02-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out,
- comparator and the magnetic support.
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
4- Screw the stretching bottom thrust (1) fully into the
thrust (3).
5- Measure the thickness (E) of the bottom of the preform 1-006372-01-xx.svg
at the injection point.
6- Purge the stretching cylinder (4) using the button (5).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRM-009 Setting the stretching bottom thrust 2
The stretching cylinder (4) is no longer blocked in the

up-position and the rod can slide freely.
The indicator (6) indicates the pressure remaining in
the cyclinder.
7- Lower the slide (7) manually.
The stretching rod (8) is in contact with the bottom of
the mold.
8- Position the conparator under the slide (7).
The adjustment of the distance "X" between the
stretching pin (8) and the base of the mold is process
function:
- X = 2/3 of the thickness (E) of the preform for
items containing a non gaseous liquid.
- X = the thickness (E) of the preform for items 4 5
containing a CSD (Carbonated Soft Drink) liquid.
- X = 1 mm for machines fitted with the scavenging 6
system (option).
9- Adjust the position of the lower stretch stop (1), to raise
the slide (7) of "X" depending on the process.
1-006371-01-xx.svg
The distance between the stretching rod (8) and the

mold base is theoretical and may vary according to
the production process.
10- Keep the stretching bottom thrust (1) in position and 7
tighten up the counter nut (2).
11- Note the bottom stretching thrust (1) to be used with this 1
mold on the station.
12- If necessary, repeat the previous steps from step 2 until 8 2
complete adjustment of the lower stretch stop assembly
(1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006373-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields BRM-010 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION
The inner and outer cooling shields are set

simultaneously.
This procedure is a base for settings. Settings for the

cooling shields will be refined depending on the
process and the articles to be produced.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
5
- oven cold,
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- mirror (1),
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
1- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU -006.

Setting the inner cooling shield
machine.
3- Tilt the infrared oven support (2), see
procedure "BDM-131. 2 6
To faciltate tightening or untightening, the handles (5)
can be disengaged. 1-013262-01-xx.svg
4- Loosen the handles (5).

5- Carefully tilt the exterior cooling shield (6).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BRM-010 Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields 2
6- Position 3 preforms (P) on the spindle chain opposite at

each end and in the middle of the inner cooling shield P 7 3
(4).
To faciltate tightening or untightening, the handles (3)
can be disengaged.
7- Loosen the handles (3) on each side of the heating
module.
8- Set the gap at the inner cooling shield (4) with regard to
the preform bodies (P) using the bolts (7) to obtain a
clearance of X=1 mm.
X
1 4
1-013261-01-xx.svg
3 3
4 4
2 P
3
2
1-013233-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Setting the outer cooling shield

9- Carefully lift the exterior cooling shield (6).
F Check the position of the outer cooling shield (6) with
regard to the preform neck-rings (P).
- If the outer cooling shield (6) is (above) the prefrom P
neck-rings (P).
· Go to step 13.
- If the outer cooling shield (6) is (below) the preform
neck-rings (P).
· Go to step 10.
1-013260-01-xx.svg
1-013260-02-xx.svg
11- Raise the outer cooling shield (6) using the handles (9)
and the grip nuts (10).
8
5
9
10
1-013234-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
13- Set the height of the outer cooling shield (6) with regard
to the preform neck rings (P) using the handles (9) and P
the grip nuts (10) to obtain Y=1 mm.
1-013267-01-xx.svg
14- Set the gap at the outer cooling shield (6) with regard to
the preform bodies (P) using the handles (5) and the P
bolts (8) to reach distance of Z=1 mm.
1 6
1-013266-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
16- Remove the preforms (P).

19- Adjust the infrared oven support (2), see
procedure "BRM-055.
20- Repeat steps 2 to 19, to set all of the outer (6) and inner
(4) cooling shields.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

2 6
1-013262-02-xx.svg
1-006187-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the infeed rail BRM-011 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
First carry out the following operations:

- check that the upstream block fitted corresponds
to the type of preforms in production. If necessary
replace the up-circuit infeed block, see
procedure "BDM-018,
- check that the downstream block fitted
corresponds to the type of preforms in
production. If necessary, replace the downstream
block, see procedure "BDM-019,
- set the unscrambler roller assembly , see
procedure "BRM-013, 1-007021-23-xx.svg
- set the stabilization rail assembly , see

procedure "BRM-017.
One turn of the knob (4) in the clockwise direction

separates rails (2 ; 3) by 1 mm.
Do the settings on the upper and lower sections of the

infeed rail simultaneously.
MACHINE STATUS 1 4
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts 2 X 3
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools 5
being carried out, 1-006533-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE
1- If necessary, open the cover(s)in the infeed rail.

Setting the gap between the rails
3- Spread the rails (2 ; 3) using the knobs (4).
4- Pass the preforms (5) through the infeed rail gate and
position them on the rails (2 ; 3).
5- Turn the knobs (4) to adjust the rails (2 ; 3) until they
come into contact with the preforms below the necks.
4
6- Set the gap X between the rails (2 ; 3) by turning the
knobs (4). 1-006534-01-xx.svg
X = Ø under the preform necks + 0,8 mm.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRM-011 Setting the infeed rail 3
The gap X must be constant along the entire length of

the infeed rail.
Setting the body-guides (6)
The rails (2 ; 3) must be set.
position them on the rails (2 ; 3). 2 3
9- Set the gap Y on the set of guides (6) using the
adjustment knobs (7) and the counter-nuts (8). 5 6
Y = Ø preform + 2 mm.
The gap Y must be constant along the entire length of 7 7
the infeed rail.
8 8
1-006533-03-xx.svg
10- Set the height L of the guides (6) using the adjustment
knobs(7).
L = 3/4 L1.
Setting the rim guide (9) L1
The rails (2 ; 3) must be set. L

7
position them on the rails (2 ; 3).
1-006533-04-xx.svg
12- Set the height of the gap Z between the rim guide (9)
and the preforms using the knurled rings (10).

Z = 2 mm.
The gap Z must be constant along the entire length of
the infeed rail.
10
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Z
14- If necessary, close the cover(s) on the infeed rail.
F Observe how the preforms move in production.
9 5
1-006539-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads BRM-012 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Do not inhale the dust from the brake systems.

1-006030-40-xx.svg

2
technicians:
- The first technician presses the push-button (4) to
open the brake, 3
- The second technician sets the position of the
friction pads (2 ; 3). 1
MACHINE STATUS
Parts
None
Consumables
- latex gloves.
Specific tools
- spring puller .
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 1-006603-05-xx.svg
3- Remove the bolts (7) from the cover panels (8 ; 9).
4- Remove the cover panels (8 ; 9).
Wear latex gloves.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-012 Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads 3
F Check the condition of the brake pads (2 ; 3) visually.

· Replace the pads if they have become soiled by
grease or oil, see procedure "BDM-033.
F Check the thickness of the brake pads (2 ; 3).
5
· If the thickness of the brake pads (2 ; 3) is less than
7 mm replace them, see procedure "BDM-033.
5- Remove the spring (10) using the spring puller.
6
pressed in.
1-006095-02-xx.svg

7
7- The second technician loosens the nuts (11).

8
8- Set the adjustment screw (12) to obtain a gap of 0,5
+0,4/0 mm between the friction pad (2) and the disc
(13). 9
9- Tighten or loosen the screws (17) to line up the friction
pads (2) with regard to the disc (13).
13- Tighten of loosen the screw (16) to obtain a gap of 0,5 13
+0.1/0 mm between the friction pad (3) and the disc
(13).
1-006202-02-xx.svg
14- Tighten up the screw (15).

14 16 10 12
16- Tighten or loosen the screws (17) to line up the friction
pads (3) with regard to the disc (13). 15
When the second technician gives the order, the first
technician releases the push-button (4). 2
17- Loosen the screw (18) but do not remove it.
3
18- Position the cam (19) so that it is in contact with the
sensor (20).
11
The sensor (20) should detect the cam (19) when the
brake is closed.
20- Position the spring (10) using the spring puller.
F Make sure that the brake disc is clean (13).
· Clean the disc (13) if necessary, see
procedure "BNM-009.
1-006374-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads BRM-012 3/4

22- Position the cover plate (8). 18 10 17 2
24- Repeat steps 1 to 23. 19
The 2 braking systems are now set.
25- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 20 13
BEFORE YOU FINISH

3
F Check the gap between the friction pads (2 ; 3) and the
brake disc (13), see procedure "BNM-009.
26- Press the button (4) several times to test the brakes.
1-006093-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-012 Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the unscrambler roller assembly BRM-013 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION
Check that the upstream block fitted corresponds to

the type of preforms to be produced. If necessary
replace the up-circuit infeed block, see
procedure "BDM-018.
1-007021-27-xx.svg
Before making any custom settings, make sure that

the initial settings are correct:
- α = 12° between the unscrambler rollers (1) and
the horizontal. α
The unscrambler rollers (1) setting modifies the
following:
- the belt tensions on models not equipped with
automatic tensioners,
- the settings of the body-guide wires (2),
- the settings of the deflectors (3). 1-010447-01-xx.svg
The body-guide wires (2) are equipped with a type (E)

or type (F) adjustment system.
The body-guide wires help to stabilize the preforms in

the unscrambler rollers.
The body-guide wires can be spread to the maximum 3

in the presence of short-bodied preforms.
The intermediate bearings are fitted free and adjust

automatically when the gap between the unscrambler
rollers is being set.
The figures used for this procedure are theoretical

values. These settings will need to be adjusted
according to the characteristics and the performance

F 1 2 1 2 E
of the preforms in production.

regulations.
1-006540-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BRM-013 Setting the unscrambler roller assembly 3
MACHINE STATUS A
procedure "BCU-012,
- feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out. 1-008966-06-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

machine.
assembly is fitted with either an automatic (A) or a
manual (B) tensioner. The automatic tensioners do
not require any particular adjustments. B
2- If there is a tensioner (A) or (B), loosen the transmission
belt.
Setting the unscrambler rollers (1)
3- If necessary, spread the covers (4) downstream from
the rollers (1) as far apart as possible.
4- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers (1).
The rollers (1) must be slightly further apart at the
top.
1-008939-07-xx.svg
5- Set the gap X between the rollers (1) using the knobs
(6). 5
In the zone downstream (1) from the unscrambler
rollers, X = Ø preform neck ring - 2 mm.
In the zone upstream from the rollers (1), X = Ø preform 4
neck ring - 1 mm.
F Check for the correct positioning of the preforms, with

no obstruction, between the rollers (1).
- If the preforms are not positioned correctly between
the unscrambler rollers (1).
· Repeat the stages above, from step 5, to adjust
the settings of the rollers (1) depending on the 1-010445-01-xx.svg
characteristics of the preforms.

6- If necessary, position the covers (4) as close as
possible to the rollers (1) without coming into contact.
7- Tighten the knobs (5).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Setting the type (E) body-guide wires (2)

8- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers (1). 14
9- Remove the gate (7) to access the body-guide wires
(2). 6
In the zone upstream from the rollers (1): 6
10- Unscrew the nuts (8) (but do not remove) to loosen the 7
wires (2).
In the zone downstream (1) from the unscrambler
rollers: (see illustration (C) or (D) depending on the model)
12- Set the vertical position of the supports (10).
The body-guide wires are positioned at 3/4 of the length 1
of the preform bodies (below the neck).
2
14- Set the horizontal position of the supports (10).
The body-guide wires are run 1 mm along each side of
the preform bodies.
15- Tighten the bolts (9). E
12
In the zone upstream from the rollers (1):
13 11
1-006376-03-xx.svg
17- Set the horzontal and vertical positions of the supports

(12). C 1 2 1
The body-guide wires are positioned at 3/4 of the length
of the preform bodies (below the neck).
9 9
the preform bodies.
19- Set the position of the tensioner rings (13) using the
nuts (8), to tension the body-guide wires (2). 10 10

1-010448-01-xx.svg
21- Fit the gate (7).
F Check for the correct positioning of the preforms, with D
the unscrambler rollers (1). 9
· Increase slightly the gap between the body-
guide wires(2).
10
1-010449-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Setting the type (F) body-guide wires (2)

22- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers (1). F
23- Remove the gate (7) to access the body-guide wires
(2).
1
24- Unscrew the nuts (15) (but do not remove) to loosen the
wires (2).
The supports (17) can be adjusted in the horizontal
direction only.
26- Set the horizontal position of the supports (17).
The body-guide wires are run 1 mm along each side of 15 20 17 2 20 15
the preform bodies.
In the zone downstream (1) from the unscrambler rollers:
1 2 1
29- Set the horzontal and vertical positions of the supports
(19).
The body-guide wires (2) are parallel to the unscrambler
rollers (1).
the preform bodies. 19
31- Set the position of the tensioner rings (20) using the 18
nuts (15), to tension the body-guide wires (2).
33- Fit the gate (7).
1-013877-01-xx.svg
F Check for the correct positioning of the preforms, with
the unscrambler rollers (1).
· Increase slightly the gap between the body-
guide wires(2).
Setting the deflectors (3) 2
1
Upstream, the deflectors do not require any specific
adjustment. Downstream, the deflectors are generally

16
parallel to the unscrambler rollers or slightly tighter to 16
help in correctly positioning the preforms. The spread
of the deflectors must be greater than the total length
of the preform to prevent them from blocking.
17
34- Set the spread of the deflectors (3) using the button(s)
(14). 1-013879-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

36- If there is a tensioner (A) or (B), set the tension of the
unscrambler roller transmission belt, see
procedure "BRM-008.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
37- Set the gap for the stabilization rail assembly, see
procedure "BRM-017.
unobstructed.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts BRM-015 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The number of conveyor belts (12) may differ

depending upon the configuration of the machine.
1-008490-01-xx.svg
20
1-006636-03-xx.svg
The preform feeder may be provided with conveyor

belts (12) at the following locations: 14 21
- 1 under the hopper (1),

- 1 under the elevator column (2),
- 1 on the intermediate conveyor (3) (Depending on
- 1 in the elevator column (5) of the mini-hopper
machine) ,
- 1 on the recycling conveyor (6) of the mini-hopper
machine) ,
21 12 13
- 1 under the unscrambler rollers (7) (Depending on
1-013200-01-xx.svg
- 1 on the emptying belt (20) of the hopper (1)
(option).
The form of the drums and the tension settings ensure

that the conveyor belt is guided correctly.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BRM-015 Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts 3
There is no position setting (14) on the side of the

roller (21) with the drive system (13).
If modular conveyor belts (A) are present, the rollers

(21) are equipped with drive pinions (18).
Use a safetied, raised work platform for working at

heights.
21 18
The adjustment screws (19) are accessible with the
casing in place.
1-013222-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
12 21
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
- preform feeder switched off.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

21 15 13
Parts
None
1-013201-01-xx.svg
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- raised platform for workng at heights.
PROCEDURE
The setting for the conveyor belt should eliminate:

- slipping on the rollers (21),
- centering faults on the rollers (21),
- flapping at a slack belt section (15).
The setting procedure differs according to the type of

conveyor belts (A ; B):
Setting the tension on a type (A) conveyor belt (12)
1- Remove the cover panels to check the tension of the
slack sections of the belts during the setting procedure. 21 12 A
1-008492-04-xx.svg
17 19
27/05/2013
1-013208-01-xx.svg
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2- Loosen the check nuts (16).

12
3- Loosen the fastening screws (17).
21
The type (A) conveyor belts (12) must show, on the
return part, a bit of slack (15) with a belly clearly
visible but not excessive.
17
4- Tighten or loosen the screws (19) to adjust the
conveyor belt tension (12).
16
6- Tighten up the check nuts (16)
7- Fit the cover panels. 19
1-013202-01-xx.svg
12
19 21 16 17
1-013203-01-xx.svg
16 19 17 21 12
1-013204-01-xx.svg
12
21
27/05/2013
19 16 17
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Setting the tension on a two-way type (A) conveyor belt (12)

12
In this configuration it is the weight of the roller (21)
and its drive system (13) which ensure the tension of
the conveyor belt (12).
8- Loosen the fastening screws (17) on both sides of the
roller (21).
The weight of the roller (21) and its drive system (13)
increase the tension of the conveyor belt (12).
9- Tighten the fastening screws (17) on both sides of the 13
roller (21).
The tension of the conveyor belt (12) is now set.
Setting the tension on a type (B) conveyor belt (12)
21
10- Loosen the check nuts (16).
11- Loosen the fastening screws (17). 1-013205-01-xx.svg
12- Move the tensioner roller (21) using the setting screws
(19) so that the conveyor belt (12) is not under tension.
13- Make two reference marks, at a distance of 1 m from 21
each other, on the conveyor belt (12).
17 17
14- Increase the tension of the conveyor belt (12) using the
setting screws (19) so that its initial length increases by
0,3 %.
The distance between the two reference marks must be
1,003 m.
16- Tighten up the check nuts (16). 13
Centering the conveyor belts (12) on the rollers (21)
1-013206-01-xx.svg
12
21
1-013225-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

1-010353-19-02.svg
19- Press the key for zone (D) corresponding to the

conveyor belt to be adjusted. C
20- Enter the minimum setpoint value, see
procedure "BCU-025.
21- Press the key for zone (E) corresponding to the
conveyor belt to be adjusted. D
The conveyor belt needing to be adjused has been
selected.
Selected elements will only start if the "Preform E
PCC is activated.
1-010351-08-02.svg

The conveyor belt to be set must be running. 9
The buttons (10 ; 11) located on the unscrambler

roller unit frame have the same function ast the
"Preform elevator start/stop" key on the lower display
bar of the PCC. The keys (10 ; 11) allow the user to
1-006704-03-xx.svg
start and stop the various components of the
unscrambler rollers selected in the "Feeder test"
window in order to observe their performance in
contact with the preforms.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

23- Tighten or loosen the screws (19) to center the
conveyor belt (12) on the rollers (21).
24- Press the key for the zone (E) corresponding to the belt 11 10
being adjusted.
The adjusted belt stops.
F Check the tension on the conveyor belt (12).
25- Repeat the steps above from step 19 until all of the
conveyor belts have been centered.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Observe the movement of the belts in production.
10 11
1-012973-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the height of the unscrambler unit BRM-016 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
First adjust the stabilization rail assembly, see

procedure "BRM-017.
Set the height of the unscrambler unit when setting up

the machine for a new production item.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2
In production, the preforms must not be obstructed
between the vanes on the unscrambler (1) and the rim
guide (3). 1
3- Position the unscrambler (1) as close as possible to the
infeed rim guide (3). 3
Maintain an angle of 60° between the axis of the
vanes on the unscrambler and the axis of the preform
movement.
Only preforms which are laid flat or in the correct

position should pass under the unscrambler
vanes . Any other position will cause the preform to be 1-010461-01-xx.svg
ejected by the uncrambler.

4- Set the height of the unscrambler (1) using the upper
nut (2).
F Check the movement of a preform laid flat under the
unscrambler vanes (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the unscrambler in production.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRM-016 Setting the height of the unscrambler unit 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting up the stabilization rail assembly BRM-017 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-007021-24-xx.svg
First carry out the settings on the unscrambler roller

assembly, see procedure "BRM-013.
1-010447-02-xx.svg
Before making any custom settings, make sure that

2
the initial settings are correct:
- α = 15° between the stabilization rail (1) and the
horizontal,
- X = 1 mm between the preform contact point on
the unscrambler rollers (2) and the top of the
under-neck guides (3),
- Y = 0,5 mm between the unscrambler rollers (2) X
and the under-neck guide (3),
- the axis of the stabilisation rail lined up with the
axis of the unscrambler rollers.
The angle α may be different for specific preforms. 3

1-010450-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BRM-017 Setting up the stabilization rail assembly 3
The settings of the under-neck guides (3) modifies the

2
following:
- the setting of the neck guides (4),
- the settings of the neck guides(5),
Y
- the settings of the rim guides (6 ; 7).


fitted on the machine and always follow current safety 3 A
regulations.
1-010451-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
- up-circuit infeed block fitted, see procedure "BDM-018.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Remove the covers (8) upstream from the stabilization
rail (1) (if present). 9
Setting the under-neck guides (3)
1-010445-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3- Unscrew the knobs (10) but do not remove the them.
10
1-010455-01-xx.svg
4- Unscrew the knobs (11) down from each side of the

under-neck guides (3) but do not remove them. 3
11
1-010453-01-xx.svg
5- Unscrew the fasteners (12) upstream from each side of

the stabilization rail (1) but do not remove them. 12
6- Place a few preforms in between the under-neck guides
(3). 5
The stabilization rail (1) is equipped with a type-(D) or
type-(E) adjustment system.
16
12
1-010452-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
7- Unscrew the fastener(s) (13 ; 14) but do not remove

them. 2
D
15
4
13
14
1-010454-01-xx.svg
8- Set the gap (A) between the under-neck guides (3)

using the bolts (14).
A = Ø under the preform necks + 0,5 mm. E
The setting should be identical for each of the under-

neck guides, such that the axis of the stabilization rail 3
(1) remains lined up with the axis of the unscrambler
rollers (2).
9- Tighten the fasteners (13 ; 14).
14
11- Tighten the knobs (10 ; 11).
Setting the body-guides (4)
In production, if there is an excessive accumulation of

preforms, the body guides (4) can be spread to the
maximum. 1-010456-01-xx.svg
12- Position 1 preform bewteen the under-neck guides(3).

13- Set the gap (B) on the body-guides (4) using the knobs
(15).
B = Ø under the preform necks + 2 mm.
The gap between the body-guides (4) must be set 3
using both of the knobs (15) located along each side
of the guides (4). 15
1-010459-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
The setting must be identical for each of the knobs C

(15) such that the axis of the body-guides (4) remains
lined up with the axis of the stabilization rail (1).
5
The gap (B) must be constant along the length of the
body-guides (4).
16
Setting the neck-guides (5)
14- Position 1 preform bewteen the under-neck guides(3).
3
1-010565-01-xx.svg
15- Unscrew the screws (16) along each body-guide (3) but
21 ; 22 17 24 19 ; 20 17 18
do not remove them.
16- Set the gap (C) on the body-guides (5) with regard to
the preform neck ring.
C = Ø preform neck ring + 2 mm.
Setting the rim guides (6 ; 7)
19- Set the support (18) so that the axis of the rim guides
(6 ; 7) remains lined up with the axis of the unscrambler
rollers (2).
21- Unscrew the fasteners (19 ; 20) along the infeed rim 7 3 16 5 6 15
guide (6).
1-010561-01-xx.svg
22- Unscrew the fasteners (21 ; 22) along the outfeed rim
guide (7).
The longitudinal position of the outfeed rim guide (7)
is determined by the elements located downstream.
23- Set the longitudinal position of the infeed rim guide (6)
so that it is in contact with the outfeed rim guide (7).
24- Lay a preform down on the infeed rim guide (6).

25- Set the minimum height of the guide with regard to the
preform using the knobs (19).
The laid-down preform must pass freely under the rim
guide (6).
27- Position a preform under the outfeed rim guide (7).
28- Set the minimum height of the guide with regard to the
rim on the preform using the knobs (21).
The preform must pass freely under the rim guide (7).
30- Lay a preform down on the infeed rim guide (6).
31- Push the laid-down preform along manually up to the
outfeed rim guide (7).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
F Check that the laid-down preform is stopped by the

outfeed rim guide (7).
- If the preform passes freely under the outfeed rim
guide (7).
Setting the stop-pin (23)
33- Bring the stop-pin out manually (23).
34- Position a preform near the stop-pin (23).
The stop-pin (23) must not extend past the preform
movement axis.
35- Set the position of the stop-pin (23) using the screws
(25). 25
36- Fit the casing (24).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

23
37- Set the unscrambler, see procedure "BRM-016.
38- Refit the covers (8) using the knobs (9) (if present).
40- Set the gap on the infeed rail , see
procedure "BRM-011. 1-010464-01-xx.svg

unobstructed.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the mold compression system BRM-021 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

procedure "BSU-001.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
1-006030-01-xx.svg
- molds at production temperature.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
- 2 thickness gauges 0.05 mm,
- compensation setting tool (13).
PROCEDURE

machine.
procedure "BCU-013.
The compensation is adjusted with the mold closed. 5
Setting the gap X = 0.05 mm +/- 0.02

3
6- Remove the lock bolt (6).
Tighten the nuts (5) diagonally to position the left half 5
shell support correctly (9).
7- Tighten up the nuts (5) so that the left half shell support A
(9) is clamped against the left support block (2).
8- Tighten the bolts (3) up against the plug (1) and the left
shell support (9). 1-011882-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRM-021 Setting the mold compression system 2
9- Position 2 thickness gauges X between the front and

rear bars (10 ; 11) on the upper part X
of the mold. A 4
X
10- Set the gap X using the upper screws
X (3).
3
11- Position the 2 thickness gauges X between theX front 1
and rear bars (10 ; 11) on the lower part of the mold.
8 2
12- Set the gap X using the lower screws
X
(3).
F Check the gap X between the front and rear bars (10 ; 9 5
11). X
- If yes. 10 6
- If not. X 11 7
· Repeat the steps above from step 5 until the
gap X=0,05mm +/- 0,02 is correct. 1-011881-02-xx.svg
13- Screw the lock nuts (4) onto the bolt (3).
14- Hold the bolt (3) and tighten the lock nut (4).
15- Remove the thickness gauges X.
16- Insert the lock bolts (6).
17- Set gap Y.
Setting the gap Y = 1.2 +/- 0.05 mm
Set gap X before setting gap Y.

9 10 X 11 12
The pin (8) is fitted into the shell support (9) with 1-011884-01-xx.svg
threadlock "LOCTITE 601".
18- Unscrew the lock bolt (6).
20- Position the shim (13) between the nut (5) and the ring
(7).
21- Set the gap Y using the nuts (5).
22- Screw the lock bolt (6) into the nut (5).
23- Hold the nut (5) and tighten the lock bolt (6) to a torque
of 10 Nm.
24- Remove the shim (13).
25- Repeat steps 18 to 24 until you have set all of the parts 13
Y
(5).
1-011885-01-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the gaps X and Y again after a few minutes of
operation.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Setting the bottle base outfeed guide BRM-022 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
- 1 certified acceptable bottle (1).
PROCEDURE

machine. 2
2- Position 1 certified acceptable bottle (1) on the neck

guides (2).
1
3- Remove the trunnion nut (3).
4- Position the bottle outfeed base guide (4) to obtain the
clearance "X" = 5 mm between the bottle outfeed base
guide (4) and the base of the certified bottle (1).
Tighten up the nut (3) onto the flat-section on the
shaft (5). 4
5- Remove the certified bottle (1) from the neck guides
(2). X
BEFORE YOU FINISH

5 3
1-006589-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRM-022 Setting the bottle base outfeed guide 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the height of the extraction hood BRM-025 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The height of the neck ring (1) on the aspiration hood needs
to be reset when the height of the preform neck changes.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
PROCEDURE
1-007166-01-xx.svg

machine. 3
2- Measure the height H of the preform neck, see
4- Set the position of the neck ring (1) to obtain a
measurement of X = H + 3 mm between the neck
guides (2) and the neck ring (1). X
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-007153-01-xx.svg
H
1-007210-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRM-025 Setting the height of the extraction hood 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the transfer arm grips BRM-031 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

wheel.
The preform and bottle transfer grips are different; the

preform transfer grips are spread further apart than
the bottle transfer grips.

1-006757-01-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
- arm-head adjustment tool (1),
- adjusting bar (2),
A C B D
- chuck (7).
PROCEDURE
1-013575-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-031 Setting the transfer arm grips 3
Setting the grip gap (8) of a transfer arm of type (D)

6 3 9 ; 10
This procedure must be carried out on the
workbench.
This procedure presupposes that the transfer arm-

head has been removed, see procedure "BDM-073. 11 7
Adjusting the first arm head
1- Fit the arm head (3) on the adjustment tooling for the 1
arm-heads (1).
2- Fit the bolt (5) and the washer (4). 12
13 8
7- Place the adjusting bar (2) in position.

bolts (6).
4;5 6
13- Remove the bar (2).
15- Fit the transfer grip (8). 9 ; 10
3
17- Fit the chuck (7) on the arm head adjustment tool (1).
19- Place the stop (12) against the grip (8) control roller
(13).
2 1
1-007491-01-xx.svg

4;5 6 3
The stop (12) is already adjusted for the other arm
heads.
21- Keep the grip (8) closed on the chuck (7) manually and 9 ; 10
tighten the bolts (9).
22- Remove the chuck (7). 7
24- Remove the arm-head (3) from the adjustment tooling
(1).
Adjusting the other arm heads
25- Repeat steps 1 to 16.
26- Hold the control roller (13) against the stop (12) and 8 1
tighten the bolts (9).
27- Remove the bolt (5) and the washer (4). 1-007502-01-xx.svg
28- Remove the arm-head (3) from the adjustment tooling

(1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the transfer arm grips BRM-031 3/4
Setting the grip gap (14 ; 15) of a transfer arm of type (A ;

B ; C)
29- Loosen the bolts (16 ; 17).
30- Press on the outer side of the grips (14 ; 15) to move
them closer.
31- Simultaneously, tighten the bolts (16 ; 17).
14
15
17 16
1-013694-01-xx.svg
17
15
16 14
1-013693-01-xx.svg
Setting the grip opening (18) of a transfer arm of type (C)
19 20
The roller (23) must not be in contact with the
opening/closing cam of the transfer arm grips
32- Loosen the check-nut (19).
33- Adjust the screw (20) to obtain the gap X = 0,01
between the stop (21) and the roller (22).

34- Hold the bolt (20) and tighten the lock nut (19).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Make sure that the transfer arm assembly (A ; B ; C ; D) X
23
18 21 22
functions correctly.
1-013702-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-031 Setting the transfer arm grips 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the oven spindle drive chains BRM-032 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The tension on the oven spindle rotation chains

determines the orientation of the spindle pinion
positioning parts.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
F Check the tension on the spindle chain, see
procedure "BRM-003. 2
Adjusting the engagement of the spindle sprockets
2- Loosen the screw (5) but do not remove it. 4 3
Adjust bolt (1) to disengage the spindle sprockets (2)
from the stationary chain (3) when the positioning 8
guides (4) are retracted.
3- Screw the bolt (1) in or out to adjust the disengagement 1 L 7
of the spindle sprockets (2).
5 6
Adjusting the tension on the stationary chain
5- Loosen the counter-nut (6) but do not remove it. 1-007655-01-xx.svg
6- Tighten or loosen the nut (7).

The length of the spring (8) is L= 90 ±1 mm.

procedure "BCU-013.
F Check the position of the guides (4) when the stationary
chain (3) spindle sprockets (2) are disengaged.
· If the setting is not correct, go to Step 2.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BCU-013.
F Make sure that the spindle chain functions correctly.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRM-032 Setting the oven spindle drive chains 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven infeed wheel BRM-036 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

procedure "BNM-012.
Check the torque limiters are in working position.
1-006030-10-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 33
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
procedure "BCU-005.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
12 10 9 11 13
Consumables
None 1-007176-03-xx.svg
Specific tools
- Dedust wheel dummy sector tool (1),
- oven wheel dummy sector tool (2),
- preform infeed dummy plate tool (3),
- transfer wheel outer dummy sector (4),
- dummy outer guide tooling (5),

- dummy centering sector tool (6),
- dummy under-neck guide tool (7),
- preform transfer wheel dummy plate tool (8),
- positioning studs tools (27 ; 32).
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-036 Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven infeed wheel 3

machine. 35
2- Remove the dedust wheel neck guides (9), see
procedure "BDM-053.
3- Remove the transfer wheel neck guide (10), see
procedure "BDM-053.
4- Remove the neck guide (11) from the infeed wheel, see
procedure "BDM-053.
5- Remove the transfer wheel (12), see
procedure "BDM-054.
34
6- Remove the infeed wheel (13), see
procedure "BDM-054.
7- Remove the sectors (33) from the dedust wheel
plate, see procedure "BDM-054.
8- Remove the oven outfeed guide (34), see 1-007092-04-xx.svg
procedure "BDM-028.
9- Remove one of the infeed wheel sectors (35) on the
oven wheel, see procedure "BDM-023. 20 19 6 5 21 18 22 3
10- Fit the dummy under-neck guide (7) using the knob (14)
and the bolt (15).
11- Fit the dummy transfer wheel outer sector (4) using the
knob (16) and the bolt (17).
12- Fit the dummy centering sector (6) on the dedust wheel
(18) using the bolt (19).
13- Fit the dummy outer guide tool (5) using the knob (20)
and the bolt (21).
14- Install the preform infeed dummy plate tool (3) using the
knurled nut (22).
15- Install the preform transfer wheel dummy plate tool (8)
using the knurled nut (23).
8 16 4 23 17 7 14 15
1-008643-01-xx.svg
16- Fit the dummy oven wheel sector (2) using the bolts
(24). 2

18- Install the dedust wheel dummy sector tool (1) using the
bolts (28).
19- Manually align the holes on the positioning plate (26) on 24
the dummy oven wheel sector (2) with the dummy
preform transfer wheel plate (8).
25
20- Fit the positioning pin (27) through the positioning plate
(26) and the preform transfer wheel dummy plate (8).
1-008645-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven infeed wheel BRM-036 3/4
21- Loosen the belt (29) using the tensioning arm (30).
22- Manually align the holes in the positioning plate (31)
with the holes in the preform infeed dummy plate (3).
23- Fit the positioning stud (32) through the positioning
36
plate (31) and the preform infeed dummy plate (3).
24- Manually align the positioning plate holes (37) with the 29 30
holes in the preform transfer wheel dummy plate (8).
25- Fit the positioning pin (38) through the positioning plate
(37) and the preform transfer wheel dummy plate (8).
1-008644-01-xx.svg
27- Set the tension of the belt using the tensioner (30)
2 26 27 38 37 1 28 31
adjustment bolt (36), see procedure "BRM-008.
28- Remove the positioning studs (27 ; 32 ; 38).
32
29- Remove the braces (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7 ; 8).
30- Fit the infeed wheel plate (35) on the oven wheel using
the bolts (24), see procedure "BDM-023.
31- Fit the oven outfeed wheel guide (34), see
procedure "BDM-028.
32- Fit the sectors (33) on the dedust wheel plate using the
bolts (28), see procedure "BDM-054.
33- Fit the infeed wheel (13) and the preform transfer wheel
34- Fit the neck guides (10 ; 11) for the infeed wheel and
the preform transfer wheel, see procedure "BDM-053.
35- Fit the neck guides (9) on the dedust module, see
procedure "BDM-053.
1-008643-02-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

37- Check the synchronization of the machine before
38- Check the preform loading synchronization before
returning the machine to production, see
procedure "BRE-005.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-036 Synchronizing the dedust module and the oven infeed wheel 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the heights of the dummy lamps BRM-050 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Depending on the configuration of your machine:

- the number of heating modules is different,
- the length of the heating modules is different.
MACHINE STATUS
- oven cold,
procedure "BCU-012.
1-006030-09-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
being carried out.
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
1- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU -006.

machine.
3- Lower the infrared oven support , see
procedure "BDM-131.
1 2 3 3 2 1
1-013239-01-xx.svg
Setting the gap (X)
4- Place a preform (1) on the spindle tip (2) at the infeed
and outfeed on each heating module equipped with a
dummy lamp (3).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRM-050 Setting the heights of the dummy lamps 2
F Make sure that the preforms (1) are correctly loaded

onto the spindle tips (2).
5- Lower and turn the indexing pin (4).
5
3
4
1-013232-01-xx.svg
Never allow the preform (1) to touch the dummy lamp

(3).
3
6- Lower the support (5) of the dummy lamp (3) using the
nut (6) until it is flush with the top of the preform dome
(1).
Lower the support (5) of the dummy lamp (3) equally
at the inlet and outlet of each heating module.
1-013236-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the heights of the dummy lamps BRM-050 3/4
7- Note the values (X) measured on each ruler (7).

X
1-013237-01-xx.svg
8- Position the ruler (7) on the noted values (X) + 15 mm

using the nut (6). 6
The dummy lamp (3) has been set.
(X) + 15 mm
1-013238-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRM-050 Setting the heights of the dummy lamps 2
9- Turn the indexing pin (4).

10- Release the indexing pin (4). 6
F Check that the indexing pin (4) is against stop.
- If yes.
- If not.
· Loosen or tighten the nut (6). 4
11- Remove the preforms (1).
12- Repeat steps 4 to 11 until all of the dummy lamps (3)
have been adjusted.
F Check that the dummy lamps (3) are correctly aligned
between the heating modules.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BDM-131.
1-013240-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Greasing procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Greasing the transfer arm guides ............................................................................................................. BGM-001
Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring ................................................................................. BGM-006
Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring ................................................................................. BGM-007
Greasing the stretching guides ................................................................................................................ BGM-008
Greasing the mold base support assembly guides .................................................................................. BGM-009
Changing the oil in the reducer motor ...................................................................................................... BGM-010
Greasing the molds (cavities) ................................................................................................................... BGM-011
Greasing the cylindrical PUPM mold support units .................................................................................. BGM-013
Greasing the coder wheel gear ................................................................................................................ BGM-014
Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings .................................................................................................. BGM-018
Greasing the mold support unit locking system ....................................................................................... BGM-019
Greasing the preform ejection cams ........................................................................................................ BGM-020
Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam ...................................................................................................... BGM-021
Greasing the dedust bearing .................................................................................................................... BGM-022
Filling the grease tanks ............................................................................................................................ BGM-023
Greasing the extractor hood bearings ...................................................................................................... BGM-028
Greasing the no-load protection cams ..................................................................................................... BGM-029
Greasing the reducer motor bearing ........................................................................................................ BGM-035
Greasing the tensioner wheel guide ......................................................................................................... BGM-041
Greasing the upper notches of the oven wheel and the forks .................................................................. BGM-050
27/05/2013 C - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
C - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure Part C
2 Greasing the transfer arm guides BGM-001 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The transfer arm type (A; B; C; D) may be different for

the preform transfer wheel and the bottle transfer
wheel.
Never exceed the recommended amount of grease as

this may cause permanent damage to the parts being
greased.
1-006030-02-xx.svg
1 shot(s) from the grease gun (5) corresponds to 1
cm3 of grease.
1
Use a different grease gun (5), high pressure hose (6)
and staple (4) for each lubricant . 3
The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not 2

need to be greased when they are assembled for the
first time.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
- main electrical circuit under power, see A
procedure "BCU-002,


Parts 2
None
Consumables
- "LUB A13" grease,
- "LUB 29" grease,

Specific tools B
- pull staple (4),
1-013491-01-xx.svg
- grease gun "ALGI" (5),
- high pressure hose (6).
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part C Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure
2/2 BGM-001 Greasing the transfer arm guides 2

machine.
1
2- Open the vision system, see procedure "BCU-36.
Do not activate the low pressure air system in the 3
2
procedure "BCU-013.
F Check the condition of the guides (1).
F Check the gap at the rail (2) with regard to the guide
(1).
F Check the operating of the grease gun (5).
You must follow the recommendations for intervals,
quantity and type of lubricant according to different
transfer arms (A; B; C; D). C
Quantity Number of grease

Arm type Lubricant 1-013535-01-xx.svg
(cm3) gun shots
A;B;C Lub A13 1 1 3
D Lub 29 1 1
1
4- Connect the staple (4) of the grease gun (5) to the 2
grease nipple (3).
5- Inject the recommended lubricant into the nipple (3)
using the grease gun (5).
6- Disconnect the staple (4) of the grease gun (5) from the
grease nipple (3).
7- Remove any excess grease using a clean, dry cloth.
Apply the same procedure to the accessible preform
D
and bottle transfer arms.
1-013542-02-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-013.
The following transfer arms are opposite the working
position.
9- Repeat the previous steps, from step 4, until all the
guidances (1) of the transfer arms have been greased.
10- Close the vision system, see procedure "BCU-36.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

6 4
1-013561-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring BGM-006 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

1-006030-93-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- procedure(s) "BNM-014" completed.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts 1
None
- "LUB 30" grease,

Specific tools
PROCEDURE


procedure "BCU-013.
3 2
1-008404-07-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-006 Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring 2

3- Grease the accessible section of the drive ring (5) using
a paintbrush and the "LUB 30" grease.
Area to be greased

procedure "BCU-013.
The next section of the drive ring (5) is accessible.
of the drive ring toothing (5).
3 4
1-008423-04-xx.svg

Do not remove the grease from the drive ring toothing
(5).
9- Install the different elements that have been removed.
BEFORE YOU FINISH 5

1-006384-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring BGM-007 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure follows the degreasing of the toothing

on the drive rings, see procedure "BNM-014.

MACHINE STATUS
- procedure(s) "BNM-014" completed.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 30" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Grease the accessible section of the drive ring (1) using
a paintbrush and the "LUB 30" grease.
Area to be greased
The toothing on the drive gear (2) is inaccessible and

will be greased by contact with the drive ring (1).
3- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see 1
procedure "BCU-013.
The next section of the drive ring (1) is accessible.
of the drive ring toothing (1). 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006385-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-007 Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring 2
Do not remove the grease from the drive ring toothing

(1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the stretching guides BGM-008 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

greased.
1 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease corresponds to 1 shot

from the "ALGI" grease gun.
The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not

first time.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 3
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None 1 2
Consumables
- "LUB A13" grease,
Specific tools
- "ALGI" grease gun.
PROCEDURE

4
procedure "BCU-013.
2- Check the condition of the guides (1).
F Check the gap between the slide (2) and the rail (4).
3- Wipe off the grease nipples (3) using a clean dry cloth.
4- Inject 2 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease into each nipple (3)
using the grease gun "ALGI".
6- Clean off excess grease. 3

1-006386-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-013.
of the stretching guides (1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-008 Greasing the stretching guides 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the mold base support assembly guides BGM-009 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

greased.


first time.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A13" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-009 Greasing the mold base support assembly guides 2

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Check the condition of the guides (1).
3- Check the gap at the guide (1) with regard to the rail
(2).
4- Clean the greasing nipple (3) using a clean, dry cloth.
5- Inject 1 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease into the nipple (3)
using the "ALGI" grease gun. 2
7- Clean off excess grease. 1
procedure "BCU-013.
9- Repeat as above from step 2 until all of the guides (1) 3
on the mold base support assemblies have been
greased.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006387-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Changing the oil in the reducer motor BGM-010 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Always follow current legislation when disposing of

the used oil.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012,
- reducer motor cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-17-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 37" oil,
Specific tools
- oil pump,
- a container for the used oil.
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Position the container for the used oil under the drain
plug (1).
3- Remove the filler cap (2).
4- Remove the drain plug (1).
The oil drains from the reducer motor.
5- Wait until all of the oil has drained off. 1
6- Fit the drain plug (1).
7- Inject 4,2 L of "LUB 37" oil into the reducer motor using 2
the oil pump.
8- Fit the filler cap (2). 1-006099-02-xx.svg
9- Remove the oil container.

10- Clean the reducer motor using a clean, dry cloth.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-010 Changing the oil in the reducer motor 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the molds (cavities) BGM-011 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Do not carry out this procedure if the molds are

equipped with the "Kohlox TM" option.

open position before attempting any work on it see
procedure "BSU-001.
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-01-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE

procedure "BSU-001.

4- Wipe the spent grease off the guide studs (1) and the
guide slots (2), the wear washers (3) and the wear ring
(4) using a clean, non-abrasive dry cloth.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with "NET A03".
5- Use a clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth to wipe the guide

studs (1) and slots (2), the wear washers (3) and the
wear ring (4).
1-006389-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-011 Greasing the molds (cavities) 2
6- Clean the cavities (5) in the half-molds using a clean,

dry, non-abrasive cloth. 2
7- Grease the guide studs (1) and slots (2), the wear
washers (3) and the wear ring (4) with the "LUB A15"
grease and a paintbrush.
Area to be greased 5

procedure "BSU-001.
position using the JOG system, see 3
procedure "BCU-013.
11- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have greased all 1-006388-01-xx.svg
of the molds on the machine,

5 4
1-006390-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the cylindrical PUPM mold support units BGM-013 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

open position before attempting any work on it see
1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from

the "ALGI" grease gun.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- primary electrical circuit under power, see 3 1
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease, 2
Specific tools
- "ALGI" grease gun. 4

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Wipe off the grease nipples (1 ; 2) using a clean dry
cloth. 1 2
3- Inject 11 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (1 ; 2)
cloth.
cloth.
6- Inject 3 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (3 ; 4)
1-006393-01-xx.svg
cloth.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-013 Greasing the cylindrical PUPM mold support units 2

position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU 3 4
-013.
of the mold support units.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

11- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually.
1-006394-01-xx.svg
position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU
-013.
17- Repeat as above from step 13 until you have cleaned
all the mold support units.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the coder wheel gear BGM-014 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
2- Bring the coder wheel around to your working position
using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.
3- Wipe the grease from the rings (1) using a clean, dry
cloth. 1
4- Grease the rings (1) with "LUB 29" grease using the
paintbrush.
Area to be greased

Do not wipe off the grease already present on the
crown rings (1).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-014 Greasing the coder wheel gear 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings BGM-018 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

technicians:
JOG system,
- the second technician applies the grease.
The greasing unit (1) is located on the oven frame.
1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from 1-006030-05-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS 2
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None 1
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease, 1-006970-01-xx.svg

Specific tools
PROCEDURE


Rotate the machine as you are greasing it.

Change the greaser every 2 shots from the grease
gun to ensure that the grease is applied evenly.
4- Inject 8 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (2)
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-018 Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the mold support unit locking system BGM-019 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

The frequencies with which the locking pin and the

holding lock are different.
The frequency differs according to the lubricant being

used, see maintenance schedule in the User manual.
1-006030-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 2
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None 1-006614-01-xx.svg
Consumables
3
- "LUB A03" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE 6 5
Lubrication of mold support unit locking pins


procedure "BCU-013.
4
2- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually.
6- Clean the locking components using a clean, dry cloth.
1-006615-01-xx.svg
7- Use a paintbrush to apply the "LUB A03" grease to the
shaft (3), the anti-torque guide (4), the locking pins (5)
and the bores (6).
Area to be greased
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-019 Greasing the mold support unit locking system 2

procedure "BSU-001.
-013.
13- Repeat as above from step 3 until you haved lubricated
all of the locking pins on the mold support units.
Lubricating the mold support unit locking systems
14- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see 11
procedure "BCU-013.
15- Remove the washers (7) and the fixing screws (8) from 10
the spring support (9).
16- Remove the spring support (9) / magnet support 9
assembly.
18- Remove the holding lock (11).
19- Use a paintbrush to apply "LUB A03" grease to the 8
holding lock (11).
20- Position the holding lock (11).
7
22- Position the spring support (9) / magnet support 1-006610-01-xx.svg
assembly.
-013.
of the mold support unit locking systems.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

system, see procedure "BCU -013.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the preform ejection cams BGM-020 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Wipe the spent grease of the cam races (1) using a
clean, dry cloth.
3- Grease the cam races (1) using a paintbrush and the
"LUB A15" grease.
Area to be greased
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Do not wipe the cam races (1). 1
4- Wipe off the excess grease using a clean, dry cloth.

1-006507-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-020 Greasing the preform ejection cams 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam BGM-021 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE
1- Clean the spent grease off the cam race (1) using a
clean, dry cloth.
2- Grease the cam race (1) using a paintbrush and the
"LUB 29" grease.
Do not wipe the cam race (1).
3- Wipe any excess grease off the cam (1).
Area to be greased
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-007162-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-021 Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the dedust bearing BGM-022 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE

procedure "BCU-013.
BEFORE YOU FINISH


1
1-007208-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-022 Greasing the dedust bearing 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Filling the grease tanks BGM-023 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Fill the grease tanks with grease (1 ; 2 ; 3) within 2 h

of the fault appearing at the PCC.
The machine may be fitted with 3 grease tanks:

- the grease tank (1) for the spray system which
applies grease to the teeth on the blow wheel and
oven wheel drive rings,
- the grease tank (2) for the cams and bearings,
- the grease tank (3) to grease the turnover cams,
guide rails and slides. 1-006030-142-xx.svg
A
For further information, please refer to chapter
"Automated self-lubricating system" in the User
manual. 4
MACHINE STATUS
- the machine is stopped.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
1-013769-02-xx.svg
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
1
- "LUB 30" grease,
- "LUB A18" grease, A
Specific tools 5
- Grease pump .
PROCEDURE 7
Filling the grease tank (1)

machine.
1-013656-04-xx.svg
Fill the grease tank (1) up to vent (4).
Never fill the tank (1) to over the vent (4) (See
Illustration (A)).
3- Use the grease pump to inject the grease "LUB 30" into
the nipple (5) until the the tank (1) is full.
5- Clean the all of the grease spray system parts using a
clean dry cloth.
F Check for leaks from the distributor (7).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-023 Filling the grease tanks 2
Filling the grease tank (2)

machine. 2
Fill the grease tank (2) up to vent (4). A
Illustration (A)).
8- Use the grease pump to inject the grease "LUB 29" into
the nipple (8) until the the tank (2) is full.
10- Clean all of the parts on the automated self-lubrication 8
system using a clean dry cloth.
1-006848-04-xx.svg
Filling the food grease tank (3)
3
machine.
Fill the grease tank (3) up to vent (4). A
Illustration (A)).
13- Use the grease pump to inject the grease "LUB A18"
into the nipple (9) until the the tank (3) is full.
9
15- Clean the parts on the centralized automatic food
greasing system using a clean dry cloth.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the greasing system in production.

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the extractor hood bearings BGM-028 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

regulations.

1-006030-61-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease, 1
Specific tools 1-010353-06-02.svg
PROCEDURE


The fan in the extractor hood is in operation.
4 3 2
1-006421-03-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-028 Greasing the extractor hood bearings 2

using the grease gun "ALGI". 5
8- Clean off excess grease.
The fan in the extractor hood stops.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

family.
1-006455-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the no-load protection cams BGM-029 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Wipe the spent grease of the cam races (1) using a
clean, dry cloth.
3- Grease the cam races (1) using a paintbrush and the
"LUB A15" grease.
Area to be greased
BEFORE YOU FINISH
Do not wipe the cam races (1).
4- Wipe off the excess grease using a clean, dry cloth.

1
1-007308-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-029 Greasing the no-load protection cams 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the reducer motor bearing BGM-035 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

This procedure requires 6 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease
1-006030-77-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006
- PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004
- machine empty.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB 29" grease,
- clean, dry cloths. 2 1
Specific tools
1-010734-00-xx.svg
PROCEDURE

machine.
procedure "BCU-013

greased
To ensure a uniform distribution of grease, carry out

the operation 2 times.
4- Inject 3 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into the nipple (1) using
5- Turn the machine 1 time uusing the JOG.
6- Inject 3 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into the nipple (1) using
8- Clean off excess grease
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-035 Greasing the reducer motor bearing 2
BEFORE YOU FINISH
9- Disconnect the JOG. see procedure "BCU-013

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the tensioner wheel guide BGM-041 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

greased.


first time.
1-006030-21-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
2
- Oven empty of preforms.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-011061-01-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A19" grease,
Specific tools
PROCEDURE

machine.
If there is a measurement kit, note the value indicated

on the ruler (1) of the tensioner wheel (2).
2- Loosen the spindle chain, see procedure "BRM-003.
3- Loosen the spindle drive chains (4), see
procedure "BRM-032.
4- Hold the spindle chain (3) and the spindle drive chains
(4) in their original position.
F Check the gap between the carriage (5) and the rail (6).
1-010779-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-041 Greasing the tensioner wheel guide 2

4 8 3 2
Inject 15 cm3 of "LUB A19" grease to completely
grease the guide .
6- Inject 2 cm3 of "LUB A19" grease into the nipple (7)
using the "ALGI" grease gun.
7- Move the carriage (5) on the rail (6) to spread the
grease.
8- Repeat the previous steps, from step 6, until the guide
has been completely greased.
10- Clean off excess grease.
11- Position the spindle drive chains (4).
12- Position the spindle chain (3).
F Check that the sprockets (8) engage on the spindle 6 5
drive chain.
The adjustment of the spindle drive chains (4) is 1-011132-01-xx.svg
described in the following procedure.

procedure "BRM-003.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Greasing the upper notches of the oven wheel and the forks BGM-050 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- "LUB A15" grease,
- clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth. 1-006030-10-xx.svg
Specific tools
PROCEDURE
1- Stop the machine. see procedure "BCU-006.

procedure "BCU-013.
- the forks (1),
- upper notches (2),
3- Clean and wipe off the above parts using a dry, clean
cloth and cleaning agent "NET A03".
4- Grease the above parts using a brush and grease "LUB
A15"
Area to be greased
5- Remove any excess grease using a clean, dry cloth.

6- Use the JOG to bring the other above parts into an
accessible position.
7- Repeat the steps above, from step 3 until the above 1
parts have been fully greased
BEFORE YOU FINISH


1-012993-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BGM-050 Greasing the upper notches of the oven wheel and the forks 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Part D

Part C
PROCEDURE
Part D
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSPECTING / CLEANING PROCEDURE BNE
Checking the electrical connections .......................................................................................................... BNE-001
Inspection/cleaning: fan filters ................................................................................................................... BNE-002
Cleaning an infrared camera ..................................................................................................................... BNE-003
Cleaning the photo-electric sensors .......................................................................................................... BNE-004
Checking the beacon stack ....................................................................................................................... BNE-005
Checking the speed controller parameters ............................................................................................... BNE-006
Inspecting an infrared oven ....................................................................................................................... BNE-008
Checking the machine protection control lamps ....................................................................................... BNE-010
REMOVAL/REFIT PROCEDURE BDE

Removal/refit - plc batteries ...................................................................................................................... BDE-001
Removal/refit - plc memory card ............................................................................................................... BDE-003
Removal/refit: striker fuses ....................................................................................................................... BDE-004
Removal/refit - UPS battery ...................................................................................................................... BDE-005
Removal/refit - UPS .................................................................................................................................. BDE-006
Removal/refit - power controller box ......................................................................................................... BDE-007
Removal/refit: infrared oven lamps .......................................................................................................... BDE-009
Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps ................................................................................................................... BDE-010
Removal/refit: dewpoint sensor ................................................................................................................. BDE-013
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE BRE

Setting the inductive sensors .................................................................................................................... BRE-001
Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed .................................................................... BRE-002
Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera ................................................................................................... BRE-003
Configuring an infrared camera ................................................................................................................ BRE-004

Synchronizing preform loading ................................................................................................................. BRE-005
Setting the torque limiter sensors ............................................................................................................. BRE-010
Setting the differential pressure switch on the dedust aspirator ............................................................... BRE-013
Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail ................................................................................................. BRE-014
Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail ............................................................................. BRE-015
Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers ....................................................................... BRE-016
Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper .............................................................................................. BRE-017
Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly ..................................................................................... BRE-018
Calibrating the multi-parameter tester ....................................................................................................... BRE-019
Setting the optical sensors ........................................................................................................................ BRE-021
27/05/2013 D - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part D Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents
D - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Electrical operation procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Checking the electrical connections .......................................................................................................... BNE-001
Inspection/cleaning: fan filters ................................................................................................................... BNE-002
Cleaning an infrared camera ..................................................................................................................... BNE-003
Cleaning the photo-electric sensors .......................................................................................................... BNE-004
Checking the beacon stack ....................................................................................................................... BNE-005
Checking the speed controller parameters ............................................................................................... BNE-006
Inspecting an infrared oven ....................................................................................................................... BNE-008
Checking the machine protection control lamps ....................................................................................... BNE-010
27/05/2013 D - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
D - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure Part D
2 Checking the electrical connections BNE-001 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Checking the electrical connections:

- when installing the machine,
- during a technical shutdown or at least once a
year.
The first inspection should be made before the end of

the manufacturer’s warranty period.
MACHINE STATUS
1-006030-00-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-012,
- mains power switch, open.
PROCEDURE
1- Check and systematically tighten up all of the screws

holding the electrical connections in position in the
various electrical boxes and the electrical cabinet.
2- Check and tighten up the autotransformer connections if
the machine is fitted with one.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
3- Sign off the operation on the maintenance schedule.

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part D Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure
2/2 BNE-001 Checking the electrical connections 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Inspection/cleaning: fan filters BNE-002 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The fan filters are located as follows:
- next to the control station (1),
- next to the PCC(2),
- on the panelling of the hopper electrical cabinet (3),
- unscrambler rollers electrical cabinet front (4),
- on the on-board cabinets (5) in the mobile section.
- side of the 3M UV infeed rail electrical cabinets (7).

technicians: 1-006030-27-xx.svg
- the first activates manual rotation,

- the second controls the access to the on-board
cabinets (5).
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
Fixed section filters
machine.
2- Remove the filter from its support using a screwdriver.
F Check the condition of the filter.
· If the filter is soiled go to step 3.
· If the filter is worn replace it and go to step 5.
3- Rinse the filter with water.
1-006349-01-xx.svg
4- Dry the filter.

5- Fit the filter on the support.
The filters are clean.
2
1-006347-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNE-002 Inspection/cleaning: fan filters 1
Filters on the mobile section

machine.
8- Use the manual rotation system to bring the on-board
cabinets (5) into an accessible position, see
procedure "BCU-014.
9- Open the door to the cabinet (5).
10- Remove the filter from its support using a screwdriver.
F Check the condition of the filter.
· If the filter is soiled go to step 11.
· If the filter is worn replace it and go to step 13. 3
1-008518-01-xx.svg
11- Rinse the filter with water.

4
12- Dry the filter.
13- Fit the filter on the support.
14- Close the door to the cabinet (5).
The filters are clean.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006348-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Inspection/cleaning: fan filters BNE-002 3/4
1-008832-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNE-002 Inspection/cleaning: fan filters 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Cleaning an infrared camera BNE-003 1/2
Camera
Controls the temperature of the preform bodies at
1
oven outfeed
Controls the temperature of the preform necks at
2
oven outfeed (option)
4
Controls the temperature of the preform bases at
3
oven outfeed (option)
Controls the temperature of the items at mold
4
outfeed (option)
1-006030-72-xx.svg
The number of cameras varies depending on the

process and the options available on the machine.
The cleaning procedure is identical for each camera.
Do not alter the position of the components when

cleaning them.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- optical cleaning solution.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Clean the sensor (1) lens (5) with a cloth dipped in the
cleaning solution. 5
3- Wipe the lens (5) on the sensor using a clean, dry
cloth.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006068-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNE-003 Cleaning an infrared camera 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Cleaning the photo-electric sensors BNE-004 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION 13
Sensor
Blockage in the top-chute on the elevator B80.1
1
column (D0)
12
Unscrambler rollers and elevator column B102.1
2
stoppage (D1)
B126.0 9
3 Elevator column speed control
(D2)
Blockage detection on unscrambler roller B99.2 8
4
outfeed (D7)
B102.0
5 Unscrambler roller exit
(D3) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
B105.0
6 Upper count cell 1-006030-90-xx.svg
(D5)
Unscrambler roller anticipated start B103.3
7
sensor (D4)
8 Detection of preforms at top of rail B10.5
9 Detection of preforms at bottom of rail B10.6
Bottle blockage detection in chute
12 B13.1
(option)
13 Detection of preforms at machine infeed B32.1
MACHINE STATUS 11
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- optical cleaning solution.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

machine.
2- Clean the photo-electric cells (10) and the reflectors 1-006762-03-xx.svg
(11) using a cloth dipped in the optical cleaning

solution.
3- Wipe the photo-electrical cells (10) and the reflectors
(11) using a clean, dry cloth.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNE-004 Cleaning the photo-electric sensors 1
10
1-006072-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Checking the beacon stack BNE-005 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The order of the lamps on the beacon stack (2) is,

from top to bottom: red, yellow, green and blue.
1-006030-07-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
PROCEDURE

The lamps in the beacon stack (2) light up one by one
and the sequence is completed with an alarm siren (3).
2- Replace fault lamps by turning the collars (4) a quarter
turn.
1
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-010353-23-02.svg
3- Sign off the operation on the maintenance schedule.
1-006073-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNE-005 Checking the beacon stack 1
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Checking the speed controller parameters BNE-006 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

The procedure is solely for checking the parameters of the
speed controllers.
List of parameters to be checked:
This list is intended as an example and is by no

means exhaustive. See the real list in the machine’s
electrical file.
1-006030-08-xx.svg
Operation / Display
0.01 Language
0.40 Key on LCP
Load / motor
1.20 Motor Power
1.22 Motor Voltage
1.23 Motor Frequency
1.24 Motor Current
1.25 Motor Nominal Speed
References / Ramps
3.03 Maximum Reference
3.41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
3.42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
Limits / Warnings
4.10 Motor speed Direction
4.13 Motor Speed High Limit
Analog In/Out
5.40 (0) Function Relay (1)
5.40 (1) Function Relay (2)
Comm. and Options
8.01 Control Site
Profibus
9.16 PCD Read Configuration
9.22 Telegram Selection
Not all of the parameters may need to be checked,

depending on the controller.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNE-006 Checking the speed controller parameters 1
Parts
- controller setting sheet (see electrical file).
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
1- Open the door to the electrical cabinet.

the "menu" page appears.
3- Press keys (2).
The required menu is selected.
The selected menu appears. 1
5- Check the configuration against the setting sheet for the
corresponding controller.
If the readings do not match, contact SIDEL.
4
6- Press the key (4) to return to the previous menu.

1-006074-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspecting an infrared oven BNE-008 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
This procedure detects any imperfection and

guarantees an optimum heating process for the
preforms .
Take into account the part pairs during the

maintenance operations.
Replace the part(s) with equipment with identical

Always wear clean, dry gloves. 1-006757-01-xx.svg

bearing on its lamps .
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE

procedure "BDM-132.
2- Remove the protections (1), see procedure "BDM-133.
Checking the lamp base protections (1)
F Check the condition of the protections (1). A
- If the protections (1) are clean and without damage.
- If the protections (1) are dirty. 2
· Clean the protections (1), see
procedure "BNM-055.
- If the protections (1) are damaged.
5
· Replace the damaged protection(s) (1), see
procedure "BDM-133.
1-011976-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BNE-008 Inspecting an infrared oven 2
Checking the lamps (2)

F Check the condition of the lamps (2). 5
- If the lamps (2) are clean and without damage.
- If the lamps (2) are faulty, blackened or soiled.
· Replace the faulty lamps (2), see
procedure "BDE-009.
4
1-011984-01-xx.svg
Checking the lamp bases (3)
F Check the condition of the lamp bases (3).
- If the lamp bases (3) are in good condition.
- If the lamp bases (3) are damaged.
3 2
· Replace the faulty lamps (2), see
procedure "BDE-009.
Checking the supply leads (4)
F Check the condition of the supply leads (4).
- If the supply leads (4) are in good condition.
- If the supply leads (4) are damaged.
· Replace the faulty lamps (2), see 1-011500-01-xx.svg
procedure "BDE-009.
Checking the reflectors (5)
F Check the condition of the reflectors (5).
- If the reflectors (5) are in good condition.
- If the reflectors (5) are damaged.
· Replace the damaged reflectors (5), see
procedure "BDM-134. 7 6
Checking the opposite reflectors (6)
F Check the condition of the opposite reflectors (6).
- If the reflectors (6) are in good condition.
- If the reflectors (6) are dirty.
· Clean the reflectors (6), see
procedure "BNM-003.
Checking the dummy lamps (7)

1-011501-02-xx.svg
F Check the condition of the dummy lamps (7).
- If the dummy lamps (7) are in good condition.
- If the dummy lamps (7) are damaged.
· Replace the dummy lamps (7), see
procedure "BDM-135.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
3- Fit the protections (1), see procedure "BDM-133.

F Check all the infrared ovens (A).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Inspecting an infrared oven BNE-008 3/4
F Make sure the oven operates correctly, see

procedure "BPU-007.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BNE-008 Inspecting an infrared oven 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Checking the machine protection control lamps BNE-010 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The machine protection UPS cabinet is fitted with the
following:
- signal lamps,
- control circuit breakers.
For further information, , please refer to

chapter "Machine protection UPS cabinet", in the User
manual. 1-011678-01-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Case No.1
F Check that the circuit breakers (F ; C) are in the "Off"
position.
- If yes.
· Check the the lamps (A ; B ; D ; E) are off.
- If yes.
The power to the UPS cabinet is switched
off.
- If not.
Case No.2
F Check that the circuit breakers (F ; C) are in the "On"
position.
- If yes.
· Check that the lamps (A ; B ; D ; E) are on.
- If yes.
The machine protection UPS cabinet is
powered.
- If not.
1-011680-01-xx.svg
Case No.3
F Check that the circuit breakers (F ; C) are in the "On" A B
position.
- If yes.
· Check the the lamps (A ; B ; D ; E) are off.

F C
- If yes.
The cabinet UPS batteries are flat.
- If not.
Case No.4
F Check that the circuit breakers (F ; C) are in the "On" E
position. D
- If yes.
· Check the the lamps (A ; B) are off.
- If yes.
1-011677-02-xx.svg
· Check that the lamps (D ; E) are on.
If yes.
The UPS’s are supplying the machine with
electrical power.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BNE-010 Checking the machine protection control lamps 1
The UPS cabinet is supplying the machine

with emergency power.
- If not.
· Contact Sidel.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Removal/refit - plc batteries ...................................................................................................................... BDE-001
Removal/refit - plc memory card ............................................................................................................... BDE-003
Removal/refit: striker fuses ....................................................................................................................... BDE-004
Removal/refit - UPS battery ...................................................................................................................... BDE-005
Removal/refit - UPS .................................................................................................................................. BDE-006
Removal/refit - power controller box ......................................................................................................... BDE-007
Removal/refit: infrared oven lamps .......................................................................................................... BDE-009
Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps ................................................................................................................... BDE-010
Removal/refit: dewpoint sensor ................................................................................................................. BDE-013
27/05/2013 D - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
D - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal/Refit procedure Part D
2 Removal/refit - plc batteries BDE-001 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Misuse of lithium batteries may cause fire or

explosion.
Never bring the batteries into contact with water of

flame.
Never expose the batteries to sources of heat greater

than 100 °C. 1-006030-13-xx.svg
Never place batteries or cells in ordinary household

1
waste. Wrap each battery indvidually in a thick plastic
bag and send them to a waste treatment center.
PLC data is saved by lithium batteries. When a

battery is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (1) on the 5
battery fault.
2
If any one of the batteries is faulty, SIDEL
recommends that you replace all of the batteries.
Replace the batteries with the plc switched On (switch

on power modules to "I").
MACHINE STATUS 3
procedure "BCU-001,
- plc On.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
- Lithium batteries "AA - 3,6 V". 1-007067-01-xx.svg
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part D Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal/Refit procedure
2/2 BDE-001 Removal/refit - plc batteries 2
Removal
2- Set the switches (2) on all of the power modules to
position "I".
3- Open the cover (3).
4- Remove the batteries (4) from their housing by pulling
the plastic strap.
Refit 4
5- Insert the batteries (4) into the housing on the power
module.
Make sure that the battery poles are inserted the right
way around and that the plastic flanges are fitted
correctly.
6- If the red "BAF" lamp (1) comes on, turn the "FMR"
(Failure Message Reset) switch (5) on the power supply
module.
3
- If the battery fault lamp goes out.
The batteries are now functional.
- If the battery fault lamp (1) remains lit:
· Remove the batteries (4) from their housing by
pulling the plastic strap.
· Short-circuit the batteries for 3 second maximum.
· Re-insert the batteries.
- If the battery fault lamp (1) remains lit.
The batteries are faulty.
· Repeat as above from step 4 with new batteries 1-007068-01-xx.svg
(4).
7- Fit the cover (3).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006113-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - plc memory card BDE-003 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Never remove a memory card when the plc is

switched on.
The memory card used here is an "EEPROM

FLASH". The "EEPROM FLASH" card is able to
conserve data without requiring an external power
supply.
1-006030-13-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1
- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. 6
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
4
- "EEPROM FLASH" (1) memory card.
Consumables
None
3
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE 2
Removal
2- Set the main switch (2) to "STOP".
"OFF".
4- Remove the "EEPROM FLASH"(1) memory card.
Refit
5- Line up the guides (5) and insert the new card (1) as far
as it will go.
1-007067-03-xx.svg
"I".
The "STOP"(6) lamp flashes slowly and the CPU carries
out a general deletion.
The full erase resets the CPU memories.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDE-003 Removal/refit - plc memory card 2
7- Set the main switch (2) to "RUN".

5
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006118-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: striker fuses BDE-004 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION

Replace the fuses when the striker pin has struck.
Before attempting any work make sure that the power

is off.
The primary electrical circuit uses orange wires.

1-006030-13-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS 1 2
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

4 3
Parts
- striker fuses. 1
Consumables
None
Specific tools
None
Removal
1- Open the mains power supply switch.
3- Remove the screws (1) from the protectve cover (2) on
the main switch (3).
4- Remove the protective cover (2).
Make sure that there is no power at the input
terminals (5).
5- Open the safety cover (4).
6- Remove the fuse (6) fixing screws .
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDE-004 Removal/refit: striker fuses 2
The fixing screws are not present on all models.

5
7- Remove the faulty fuses (6).

Refit
8- Fit the new fuses (6), with the pin (7) facing upwards.
9- Close the safety cover (4). 7
10- Fit the protective cover (2) using the screws (1).
6
12- Close the mains machine power supply switch.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006119-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - UPS battery BDE-005 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Never place batteries or cells in ordinary household

waste. Wrap each battery indvidually in a thick plastic
bag and send them to a waste treatment center.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
The battery will reach full charge in 12 hours.

1
For further information, see the technical

2
documentation supplied with the UPS.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- UPS battery.
Consumables
1-006122-01-xx.svg
None
Specific tools
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Remove the UPS (1), see procedure "BDE-006.
2- Set the UPS (1) down flat.
3- Remove the cover (2) from the battery compartment
(3).
4- Remove the battery (3).
5- Disconnect the wires from the terminals (4).
Refit
3 4
6- Connect the wires to the terminals (4) on the new

battery.
7- Insert the battery (3) into the compartment.
· Connect the black wire to the earthing terminal.
· Connect the red wire to the positive terminal.
8- Slide the battery compartment (3) cover (2) into the
grooves on the UPS (1) as far as it will go.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006121-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDE-005 Removal/refit - UPS battery 2
9- Fit the UPS (1), see procedure "BDE-006.

1-006123-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - UPS BDE-006 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The battery will reach full charge in 12 hours.
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
Removal
1- Turn off the PCC, see procedure "BCU-009. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

For further information, see the technical
documentation supplied with the UPS.
3- Turn off the UPS (2) by pressing the button (3) for 2
second(s).
5- Remove the flange (5).
1-006278-04-xx.svg
6- Remove the UPS (2) from the control station.

Note the respective positions of the connecting cables
(6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9) before disconnecting them. 5
7- Disconnect the wires (6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9) from the UPS.
8- Take the UPS (2) out of the control station. 2
Refit
9- Place the UPS (2) near the control station.
10- Connect the wires (6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9) to the UPS. 4
10
1-011905-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDE-006 Removal/refit - UPS 2
11- Position the UPS (2) on the support (10).

12- Position the flange (5). 3
14- Press the button (3) to turn on the UPS (2).
The display interface (11) switches on.
11
1-011902-01-xx.svg
15- Turn on the PCC, see procedure "BCU-004.

2
BEFORE YOU FINISH

6
8
7
9
1-011904-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit - power controller box BDE-007 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- electrical wiring box.
Consumables
None
None
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Disconnect the connectors (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4) from the box (5)
you wish to remove. 5
3 4
1-006127-01-xx.svg
3- Unscrew and remove the bolt (7).

7
4- Remove the electrical box (5).
1-006131-01-xx.svg
5- Loosen and remove the bracket (8) and the rubber

stopper (9) assembly from the box (5). 5
6- Open the box (5).
7- Note down the profibus (10) address on the box (5).
Refit
8- Open the box again (5). 9 8
9- Set the address profibus (10) to the same as that on the
removed box by turning the inner arrow (11) using a
small screwdriver.
10- Set the circuit breaker (12). 1-006132-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDE-007 Removal/refit - power controller box 2
11- Fit the bracket (8) and the rubber stopper (9) on the box
(5).
12- Fit the box (5) on the oven frame.
13- Insert the fixing screws (7) and tighten up. 12
14- Refit the connectors (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

11
10
1-006128-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: infrared oven lamps BDE-009 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Color of
Zone(s) Power (W) General information
wires
3 000
2 500
According to its position, make sure the power of the

lamps (1) to be replaced is complied with.
1-006757-01-xx.svg
The color of the power supply wires (5) differs
according to the power of the lamps (1).
The number of lamps (1) differs according to the

configuration of the machine and the process.

Check the power of the lamps you wish to replace

(2500 W, 3000 W).

Allow the infrared oven(s) (A) to cool down before

carrying out any work.
Always hold the lamps (1) by their ends.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- lamp (1).
Consumables
- cotton gloves.
Specific tools
- Electrician’s screwdriver 2 mm.
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDE-009 Removal/refit: infrared oven lamps 2

procedure "BDM-132.
bearing on its lamps (1).
2- Remove the protections (2), see procedure "BDM-133.
Removal
3- Remove the fastening parts (3).
4- Open the cover (4).
5- Disengage the supply leads (5) from the through holes
(6).
6- Remove the protective cover plate (14).
7- Identify the position of the supply leads (5) of the lamp A 2 1 11 14 2 4 12 3
(1) to be disconnected from the connector (7) using the
diagram (B).
1-011977-03-xx.svg
8- Disconnect the lamp (1) from the connector (7) using a

screwdriver.
9- Move the mobile support (8) to the side and
simultaneously remove the lamp base (13) from the
mobile support (8).
10- Disengage the second lamp base (9) from the fixed
support (10).
4 5 11 14 6
1-011986-01-xx.svg
5
1-011507-01-xx.svg
11- Pull on the assembly to disengage the supply leads (5).

12- Repeat steps 7 to 11 until all the lamps (1) have been B
removed.
F Check the condition of the reflectors (11), see
procedure "BNE-008.
Refit
Make sure you fit the lamps (1) in the right direction.
1-011988-01-xx.svg
13-
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/refit: infrared oven lamps BDE-009 3/4
Feed the supply leads (5) of the lamp (1) through the
frame (12).
Do not damage the sheaths.
14- Insert the lamp base (9) in the fixed support (10).
15- Move the mobile support (8) to the side and
simultaneously insert the second lamp base (13) in the
mobile support (8).
Comply with the connection diagram (B).
Zone Corresponds to the heating zone
Right Corresponds to the RH connection of the lamp
Left Corresponds to the LH connection of the lamp
Make sure you comply with the connection polarity of

the lamps (1).
16- Connect the lamp (1) to the connector (7) using a
screwdriver.
D 10 9 1 C 13 8
17- Repeat steps 13 to 16 until all the lamps (1) have been
fitted.
1-011529-02-xx.svg
18- Engage the supply leads (5) in the through holes (6).
19- Refit the cover plate (14).
1-011983-01-xx.svg
1-011984-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDE-009 Removal/refit: infrared oven lamps 2
20- Position the cover (4).

21- Tighten the fastening parts (3). Z8
F Make sure there is no stress between the lamps (1) and
the reflectors (11). Z7
Check that the supply leads (5) are correctly Z6

positioned.
Z5
BEFORE YOU FINISH Z4
22- Fit the protections (2), see procedure "BDM-133, Z3
Z2
Clear any waste following the specific procedure for Z1
clearing electrical waste.
1-011511-01-xx.svg
F Make sure the oven operates correctly, see
procedure "BPU-007.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps BDE-010 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

Never obstruct the upper ventilation grill as this may

reduce the bactericidal effects of the lamps.
1-008758-10-xx.svg
- infeed rail clear of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017,
procedure "BCU-012,
- infeed rail cold.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- lamps.
Consumables
None 11 2 3
Specific tools
- cotton gloves. 1-008970-02-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removing the UV lamps from the upper part of the rail
1- Open the upper cover (1) using the butterfly catch (2).
2- Remove the screen from the back panel (3) by
loosening the 1/4-turn fixings .
4- Disconnect the connector (5) from the bottom of the
lamp. 8 9
1-008971-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BDE-010 Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps 2
5- Open the clips (6).

The flap (7) is now open. 7 18
6- Unclip the lower lamp cap from the lower lamp support
(8).
7- Remove the lamp from the upper support (9).
8- Repeat steps 4 to 7 until you have removed all of the
lamps you need to replace.
Removing the UV lamps from the lower part of the rail
9- Open the bottom cover (10) using the butterfly nut (11).
1-008972-01-xx.svg
10- Disconnect the connector (12) from the upper lamp

cap.
15 12
1-008973-01-xx.svg
11- Open the clips (13).

The flap (14) is now open. 14
12- Unclip the upper lamp cap from the upper lamp support
(15).
13- Remove the lamp from the lower support (16).
14- Repeat steps 10 to 13 until you have removed all of the

lamps you need to replace.
Fitting the UV lamps
Always wear protective cotton gloves when handling

the lamps . 17 13
F If the lamps are dirty, clean them using a clean dry
cloth. 1-008974-01-xx.svg
Never use cleaning agents.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps BDE-010 3/4
Lower part of the rail

15- Position the new lamp between the neck guides (17). 16
16- Position the lower lamp cap in the lower lamp support
(16).
17- Clip the upper lamp cap onto the upper lamp support
(15).
The clip must not be in contact with the glass of the
lamp.
F If the clip is touching the glass of the lamp, check the
position of the lower lamp cap in the lower lamp support
(16).
18- Reconnect the connector (12) onto the lamp making
1-008975-01-xx.svg
sure that the polarity is correct.
lamps.
20- Close the flap (14) using the catches (13).
21- Close and lock the lower cover (10) using the butterfly
nut (11).
Upper part of the rail
22- Position the new lamp between the neck guides (18).
23- Position the upper lamp cap in the upper lamp support
(9).
24- Clip the lower lamp cap into the lower lamp support (8).
The clip must not be in contact with the glass of the
lamp.
F If the clip is in contact with the glass of the lamp, check
the position of the upper lamp cap in the upper lamp
support (9).
25- Reconnect the connector (5) onto the lamp making sure
that the polarity is correct.
lamps.
27- Close the flap (7) using the catches (6).
28- Close and secure the upper cover (1) using the butterfly
catch (2).
29- Fit the casing (4).
30- Fit the back cover (3) using the 1/4-turn fixing .
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BCU-001.
32- Test the UV rail lamps to make sure that they function
properly, see procedure "BPU-008.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BDE-010 Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Removal/refit: dewpoint sensor BDE-013 1/2
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-012.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
- Sensor (3).
Consumables
None
Specific tools
- latex gloves, 1-006030-04-xx.svg
PROCEDURE
Removal
machine.
2- Disconnect the electrical connector (1).
4- Remove the sensor (3).
1 8
2 5
3 4 6
1-010293-01-xx.svg
7- Remove the sampling chamber/tube/connectors

assembly (6).
8- Take out the plug (7).
Refit
9- Clean the sampling chamber/tube/connectors assembly

(6) using clean, dry cloths.
10- Clean the plug (7) using a clean, dry cloth.
6 7 8
1-010295-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BDE-013 Removal/refit: dewpoint sensor 3
11- Clean the connector (8) using a clean, dry cloth

12- Fit the plug (7). 2 3 4 7
13- Fit the the sampling chamber/tube/connectors assembly
(6).
15- Fit the sensor (3) along with its seal (4) and tighten up.
17- Connect the electrical connector (1).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

procedure "BCU-001.
6
1-010294-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Setting the inductive sensors .................................................................................................................... BRE-001
Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed .................................................................... BRE-002
Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera ................................................................................................... BRE-003
Configuring an infrared camera ................................................................................................................ BRE-004
Synchronizing preform loading ................................................................................................................. BRE-005
Setting the torque limiter sensors ............................................................................................................. BRE-010
Setting the differential pressure switch on the dedust aspirator ............................................................... BRE-013
Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail ................................................................................................. BRE-014
Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail ............................................................................. BRE-015
Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers ....................................................................... BRE-016
Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper .............................................................................................. BRE-017
Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly ..................................................................................... BRE-018
Calibrating the multi-parameter tester ....................................................................................................... BRE-019
Setting the optical sensors ........................................................................................................................ BRE-021
27/05/2013 D - 1/2
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
D - 2/2 27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure Part D
2 Setting the inductive sensors BRE-001 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
An inductive proximity sensor detects objects made from
electrically conductive materials without the need for
contact.
The gaps indicated on the table are
theoretical. Depending on the environment and the
kinematics of the parts, the true values may need to
be adjusted.
1-006030-00-xx.svg
1;2
1-010594-01-xx.svg
3;4
1-010595-01-xx.svg
1-010587-01-xx.svg
SIDEL Ø Output normally Output normally Recommende Gap range

N° Reference indicated
reference (mm) open closed d gap (mm) (mm)
XS1M08PC410D
1 30493 8 X - 0,4 0 - 1,2
Telemecanique
2 117071 IE5318 IFM 8 X - 0,4 0 - 1,6
3 117076 IGS204 IFM 18 X - 2 0 - 6,5
4 117077 IGS206 IFM 18 - X 2 0 - 6,5
5 128580 IE5288 IFM 8 X - 0,4 0 - 3,25
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Part D Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure
2/2 BRE-001 Setting the inductive sensors 2
MACHINE STATUS
PROCEDURE
Inductive sensor
machine.
2- Position the part to be detected in front of the sensor .
3- Loosen the nut and the counter nut (1).
4- Set the range (2) of the sensor according to the figures
shown on the table.
The lamp on the sensor changes state.
5- Tighten the nut and the counter nut (1).
6- Position the part in a position where it should not be
detected.
The lamp on the sensor changes state.
1-006352-10-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed BRE-002 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The "B32.1" sensor (1) is a direct reflection photoelectric
cell. It detects preforms at the machine infeed.
technicians:
- The second monitors the functioning of the sesnor
(1).
1-006030-10-xx.svg
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002.
PROCEDURE

machine.
3- Place a preform on the infeed wheel.
4- Position the infeed guide (2) manually.
5- Place a preform in front of the sensor (1) using the
manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014.
6- Loosen the nut (3) and the counter nut (4).
7- Position the sensor (1) level with a position between the 1-006281-01-xx.svg
neck and half way down the length of the preform.
8- Position the sensor (1) at a range of between 1 cm and
2 cm from the body of the preform.
The sensor lamp (1) lights up.
9- Tighten the nut (3) and the counter nut (4).
11- Place several preforms on the infeed wheel.

12- Position the infeed guide (2) manually. 1
13- Use the manual rotation system to check that the
sensor (1) functions correctly, see
procedure "BCU-014.
The lamp on the sensor (1) lights up when preforms 4
pass in front of it.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006282-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRE-002 Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera BRE-003 1/4
Camera
1
oven outfeed
2
oven outfeed (option according to model)
3

1-006030-116-xx.svg
This procedure applies to the camera (1) controlling

the temperature of the preform bodies. The
adjustment procedure is the same for each camera.
The infrared sensor is fitted with a laser guide to

enable it to be lined up.
Never point the laser towards the eyes as you may

cause permanent damage.

technicians:
- the second technician checks the value at the
PCC.
The minimum quantity of preforms to load onto the

infeed wheel is 8 preforms.
8 5 10 9 6 4
MACHINE STATUS
1-007626-05-02.svg
- oven cold.
procedure "BCU-001,

procedure "BCU-002,
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRE-003 Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera 2

(4), see procedure "BCU-015.
4- If the "Forced loading" mode is not active, press the key
(7).
Forced loading is active.
family.
7 A
1-010390-03-02.svg

The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. 8 9 4
F Wait for the rate setpoint to be reached.
7- Press the key (9) while the 8 preforms are loading and
then press the key (9) again to stop loading.
8- Press key (8) before the preforms reach the turnover
1-006704-12-xx.svg
ramp at the oven outfeed.
The machine stops.
The "Alarms" family appears.
8 10 9 4 11
1-006948-04-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera BRE-003 3/4

12- Press the (13) key. B
13- Enter the "DB30.DBB150" variable using the keypad
and then confirm.
The value "00000000" of variable "DB30.DBB150"
displays in the zone (D). 12
1-007616-03-02.svg

machine. C
D
16- Use manual rotation to bring the preforms forward until
the value "11111111" in the zone (D) is reached, see
The laser guide (1) is on. 14
1-007581-03-02.svg
19- Set the support (17) so that the laser (1) falls on the
preform bodies. 18
The sensor laser (1) needs to read a continuous line

of preforms in order to provide a stable and uniform 1
temperature reading.
20- Tighten the bolts (15). 16 17
15
1-006284-05-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRE-003 Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera 2
22- Set the bracket (19) to position the sensor laser (1) on
the middle of the preform bodies. 1 17
The height of the point at which the temperature is
read depends on the size of the preform and has an
effect on the bottle production set up.
The sensor laser beam (1) is switched off.
25- Advance the spindle chain using manual rotation to
clear the preforms, see procedure "BCU-014.
1-006285-03-xx.svg
BEFORE YOU FINISH

Forced loading is disactivated. 19
family.
1
31- Press key (4) to select "Automatic" mode, see
procedure "BCU-006.
1-006286-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Configuring an infrared camera BRE-004 1/2
Camera
1
oven outfeed
2
4
3
Controls the temperature of the items at mold
4
outfeed (option according to model)
1-006030-72-xx.svg

The adjustment procedure is the same for each 1

camera.
Never point the laser towards the eyes as you may 6 5

cause permanent damage.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-011,
- oven cold.
PROCEDURE
1-006284-04-xx.svg

machine.
3- Remove the cover (6).
4- Position the jumper (7) to 0,5 s.
5- Position the coder (8) to "9".
6- Position the coder (9) to "0".
The emission factor is set to a value of 0,90. 8 9
7- Fit the cover (6) along with its fixing screws (5) on the
body of the sensor (1) making sure that the pin (10) is
inserted.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

7
1-006287-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRE-004 Configuring an infrared camera 2
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Synchronizing preform loading BRE-005 1/6
GENERAL INFORMATION
The prefrom loading indexing system requires very

precise settings and synchronization, 2 operations are
required:
- mechanical setting of the position/orientation of the
loading stop jack-cylinder (1),
- synchronization of the prefrom loading wheel (2)
with the retraction and extension of the jack-
cylinder (1).
The setting values for the synchronization are part of

the recipe. 1-006030-10-xx.svg
According to the differences between the preforms

used in the previous production run and the current
one, the cylinder (1) setting may not always be
necessary.
Each setting is specific to the machine according to

the following parameters:
- the preform diameter,
- the distance between the rim and the neck ring,
- the length and slope of the infeed rail,
- the momentum of the preforms,
- the machine production rate,
- the pneumatic assistance (air jet) at the infeed
(according to model).
PROCEDURE
Setting the loading stop jack-cylinder (1)
machine.
2- Separate the 5 first preforms on the infeed rail by 4
pushing the others to the top.
3- Insert a screwdriver into the rail to stop them sliding 1
back down.
4- Position the jack (1) using the brace (3)/bolt (4) and the 3
brace (5)/bolt (6) assemblies.
The pin (7) of the jack (1) in the extended position
should be on an imaginary line Y running from the neck 5
ring to the edge of the rim and lcoated at one third of
the diameter of the preform neck. 6
The pin (7) should have an angle α = 30° - 40° with
regard to the retractable infeed guide (8).
With the jack (1) in the extended position, the gap
between the preform and the edge of the preform infeed
wheel (2) should be X = 3 mm. 1-006354-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/6 BRE-005 Synchronizing preform loading 3
Line the pin (7) up on a smooth part on the preform

neck to ensure that it functions consistently. The
position of the pin (7) at a third of the preform neck
allows rapid feeding.
2 8 7 1
1-006084-05-xx.svg

The jack (1) is in the retracted position.
The jack (1) pin (7) in the retracted position should not
obstruct preform movement in any way. 7
1-006355-01-xx.svg

The jack (1) is in the extended position. 2 7
The pin (7) of the jack (1) should not be obstructed

when extending.
11- Remove the screwdriver from the infeed rail.
1-006356-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
Synchronizing the preform infeed wheel (2) with the loading

stop jack (1)
13- Set to Supervisor mode, see procedure "BCU-021.
9 10
1-010353-24-02.svg

The "Options" family appears. A 11 12
1-010348-10-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

14 15
1-007626-04-02.svg
17- Enter the synchronization value between the preform

infeed wheel (2) and the retraction of the loading stop B 16 20
jack (1) using the keys (17).
18- Enter the synchronization value between the preform
infeed wheel (2) and the extension of the loading stop
jack (1) using the keys (18).
Begin at 50 %. The percentage 100 % corresponds to
the total number of coder points in one machine
pitch.
F Make sure preform feeding is synchronized and no error
messages appear at the PCC.
- If a "torque tripped or stress on guide" message
appears.
· Correct and cancel the fault. 1-010390-04-02.svg
· Correct the percentages.
- If not.
· Go to step 21.

21- Close the window (C). C
BEFORE YOU FINISH

17
F Make sure that:
- preforms are fed to the required mold,
- the preforms load into the notches on the infeed
wheel (2) correctly, 18
- every time there is a stoppage, the jack pin (7) is
between two preforms.
22- Press the (20) key. 1-010391-02-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054

Loading on one mold is active.
D
24- Enter mold N°1 using the key (22).
26- Make sure that the preform enters mold N°1. 21
27- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006. 22

Loading on one mold is disactivated.
family. 1-010416-01-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2 Setting the torque limiter sensors BRE-010 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The procedure for setting the sensors on all of the

torque limiters is identical.
The transmission system on the preform interior

decontamination system is fitted with a torque limiter.
Make sure that the sensor (1) is mounted in the

correct direction with regard to the control disc (2).
The control disc (2) moves towards the rings (3) if

there is over-torque. 1-007205-08-xx.svg
Never attempt to modify the torque limiter tares.

3 2 6 1
MACHINE STATUS
- all machine power and utilities turned off.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
None
Specific tools
PROCEDURE 4
1- Position the detection pin (4) horizontally using the bolt

(5).
Y
2 X 5
1-007118-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRE-010 Setting the torque limiter sensors 2
2- Loosen the bolts (6 ; 7).

3- Position the sensor (1) such that you obtain X = 1,5 mm 2 4 7
and Y = 0,5 mm between the detection pin (4) and the
control disc (2).
4- Tighten the bolts (6 ; 7).
5- Tighten or loosen the bolt (5) to obtain Y = 0,5 mm
between the detection pin (4) and the control disc (2).
BEFORE YOU FINISH
6- Check that the torque limiters function correctly, see

procedure "BNM-002.
X
6
Y
1
2 5
1-011060-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
1 Setting the differential pressure switch on the dedust aspirator BRE-013 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Run the aspirator for 4 hours to reach the operating

temperature before setting the differential pressure
switch (1).
Do no pinch the hoses (2) when connecting them (this

will increase the pressure).
MACHINE STATUS

procedure "BCU-002,
PROCEDURE
Calibrating the differential pressure switch (1)
1- Disconnect the hoses (2) from the quick connectors (3).
3
2- Press the "select" key (4) until the yellow lamp (6)
comes on.
The diferential pressure switch (1) displays the current 1
differential pressure.
- If the differential pressure is different from "000".
· Press (and keep pressing) the "-" key (5).
· Press the key "select"(4).
· Release the keys (4 ; 5).
The differential pressure is at "000".
3- Reconnect the hoses (2). 2
Setting the differential pressure setpoints
Each parameter is saved in a memory passing to the 1-010636-01-xx.svg
next step or returning automatically to the "Mode de

lecture pression" position after 30 seconds of
inactivity.
comes on.
The differential pressure switch (1) displays the
differential pressure setpoint maxi. 6
The setpoint recommended by SIDEL is 100 daPa.
7
5- Press the "+ / -" keys (11 / 5) until the required value is
displayed. 8
comes on.
The differential pressure switch (1) displays the 1 11 5 4
differential pressure setpoint mini.
1-010640-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRE-013 Setting the differential pressure switch on the dedust aspirator 1
The setpoint recommended by SIDEL is 100

daPa. The mini pressure setpoint must be much
greater than the value obtained with clean filters.
7- Press the "+ / -" keys (11 / 5) until the required value is
displayed.
Checking the aspirator filters
1-010353-08-02.svg

The aspirator starts. A 10
The pressure switch (1) displays the pressure
differential.
· Clean the aspirator filters, see
procedure "BNM-018.
The aspirator will stop.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

family.
1-010348-04-02.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail BRE-014 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
First carry out the settings on the infeed rail, see

procedure "BRM-011.
The sensors (1 ; 2) on the infeed rail are direct

reflection photo-electric cells.
Detection of preforms at the bottom of

1 B10.6
the rail
Detection of preforms at the top of the
2 B10.5
rail
1-007021-23-xx.svg
Use a sheet of white paper to show the beam from the

sensor cells (1 ; 2).
Where there are several production runs with A

preforms of differing opacities, use the most 2
transparent preforms when carrying out the cell 1
settings.
6

regulations.
1-010424-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-002,
procedure "BCU-001,
- preform feeder switched on, see procedure "BCU-003.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
being carried out,
PROCEDURE
1- If necessary, open the cover(s)in the infeed rail.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRE-014 Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail 3
Setting the preform sensor (1) at the bottom of the rail

2- Clean the emitter (3) and the reflector (4) on the (1) cell
The sensor (1) must be positioned in zone (A) of the 9 5
rail. The force of gravity from the preforms located 60°
down from the sensor (1) must be sufficient for there 7 8
not to be a loading fault on the infeed wheel. The
heavier the weight of the preforms the closer the 3 9
sensor (1) is to the loading pin (6).
Maintain an angle of 60° between the sensor beam 4

(1) and the axis along which the preforms travel.
4- Set the positions of the rings (7 ; 8) in zone (A)
according to the weight of the preforms.
6- Position a preform on the axis of the emitter (3)/reflector

(4) via the access flap on the infeed rail.
If there is a UV infeed rail, the sensors (1 ; 2) are set
3
to detect the body of the preform. The beam from the
sensors (1 ; 2) must fall between the under-neck
guides (10) and the body guides (11). X
10
8- Set the height of the supports so that the emitter (3) and
the reflector (4) are aligned and that the beam from the
emitter (3) is at X = 11 mm below the rim of the
preform.
F Check that the lamp on the emitter (3) lights up when 11
preforms pass in front.
9- Remove the preform. 1-010427-01-xx.svg
F Check that the lamp on the emitter (3) goes out.

Setting the sensor (2) at the top of the preform rail
11- Clean the emitter (3) and the reflector (4) on the (2) cell
The distance Y must be sufficient so that when
production restarts, the clearance time for preforms

located between the photoelectric sensors (1 ; 2) is
greater than the arrival time for new preforms of the
infeed rail.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail BRE-014 3/4
The theoretical distance Y between the ring (7) on the

sensor (2) and the end of the tube (12) varies
depending on the length of the infeed rail:
- Y = 1,35 m for a 1,5 m infeed rail.
Y
- Y = 2,60 m for a 3 m infeed rail.
- Y = 4 m for a 4,5 m infeed rail. 7
Maintain an angle of 60° between the sensor beam 12

(2) and the axis along which the preforms travel.
13- Set the rings (7 ; 8) on the sensor (2).
14- Repeat steps 5 to 10 to set the preform sensor at the
top of the infeed rail (2).
BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-010422-01-xx.svg
15- If necessary, close the cover(s) on the infeed rail.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRE-014 Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail BRE-015 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
First adjust the stabilization rail assembly, see

procedure "BRM-017.
The sensors "D4 ; D3" on the stabilization rail are

direct reflection photoelectric cells.

D4 B103.3
sensor
D5 Upper count cell B105.0
1-007021-24-xx.svg
The cells "D4 ; D3" are fitted with 3 indicator lamps:

D4 D5 D3
- the green lamp indicates that the power is on,
- the yellow lamp indicates that the cell has detected
an object,
- the red lamp indicates that the cell is at its
switching limit.

sensor cells "D4 ; D3".
The sensor cell "D5" on the stabilization is a fiber 1-010426-01-xx.svg

optic cell.
The cell "D5" is fitted with 2 lamps:

- the yellow lamp indicates that the cell is on and
has not detected any object,
- the red lamp indicates that the cell is locked.
The beam from the cell "D5" is not visible. The arrow
(1) indicates the direction of the beam from the cell
"D5".
Where there are several production runs with

D5
preforms of differing opacities, use the most
transparent preforms when carrying out the cell
settings.

fitted on the machine and always follow current safety 1
regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
- feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017. 1-010428-01-xx.svg

procedure "BCU-002,
procedure "BCU-001,
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRE-015 Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail 3
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE

machine.
Setting the "D4" sensor cell
2- Clean the emitter (2) and the reflector (3) on the "D4"
cell using a clean, dry cloth. 3 D4 6
F Check that the emitter (2) and the reflector (3) are lined
up.
F Check that the beam on the cell has not been cut by
any object.
F Check that the yellow lamp is out when there are no
preforms.
- If the yellow lamp is on.
· Press the button (4) for 10 s.
The yellow lamp on the cell "D4" goes out.
The switching mode for the "D4" cell is set.
3- Set the sensitivity of the cell "D4", see above.
4- Unscrew the bolts (5) but do not remove them. 7 5 2
5- Lower the support (6) until the sensor cell "D4" detects
1-010429-01-xx.svg
the stabilization rail (7).
The yellow lamp on the cell "D4" lights up.
6- Raise the support (6) until the cell "D4" no longer
detects the stabilization rail (7).
8- Pass 10 preforms in front of the cell "D4".
F Make sure that the yellow lamp on the cell "D4" lights
up when the preforms pass and that the red lamp does
not light up, even slightly.
- If the yellow lamp stays off or if the red lamp comes
on.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail BRE-015 3/4
9- Repeat the steps "Setting the "D2" cell" from step 2 to

set the "D3" cell. D3
Setting the sensitivity of a photoelectric cell
Do not press the button (4) for too long 10 s. This

action will invert the cell switching mode. For the
preform feeder to function correctly, the green and
yellow lamps on the "D4 ; D3" cells must be lit when
preforms are present.
10- Press the button (4) for 2 s until the red lamp flashes.
The red lamp goes out.
The yellow lamp and the green lamp flash alternately. 1-010430-01-xx.svg
The cell is in programming mode.

11- Position one/some of the preform(s) in front of the cell.
The yellow lamp and the green lamp for 1 s.
The yellow lamp and the green lamp flash alternately. 4
13- Remove the preform(s).
The yellow and green lamps go out.
After 3 s the green lamp lights up.
The cell has been set and is in operating mode.
If the red lamp flashes immediately after setting the
sensitivity, the setting has failed.
1-010431-01-xx.svg
15- Unscrew the bolts (8) but do not remove them.
16- Position a preform at the "D5" cell.
17- Set the height of the suppport (9) so that the beam from
the cell "D5", as shown by the arrow (1), falls half way
between the neck of the preform and the rim.
The cell "D5" and the support (9) can be fitted under
the stabilisation rail (7), if the neck of the preform
does not allow correct detection.
19- Remove the preform from the optic beam.
F Check that the red lamp is out. D5 9 11
- If the red lamp is lit.
· Press the "+" (10) and "-" (11) buttons
10
simultaneously for 3 s.
The "D5" cell is unlocked.
F Check that the yellow lamp is continuously lit. 8
- If the yellow lamp stays off.
· Pass your hand 1 time in front of the "D5" cell.
- If the yellow lamp lights.
· Press the "+" (10) and "-" (11) buttons 7
The red lamp lights for 3 s.
The yellow lamp lights after 6 s.
The switching mode for the "D5" cell is
set. 1-010434-01-xx.svg
· Press the "+" (10) button until the yellow
lamp lights.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRE-015 Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail 3
The sensitivity of the cell "D5" has been

increased.
During the settings, the beam of the cell "D5" is
directed according to the diameter of the preform
(maximum transparency zone) in order to obatain a
single signal.
20- Pass a preform slowly in front of the "D5" cell.
F Check that the yellow lamp goes out when the preform
passes.
- If the yellow lamp stays lit, or only slightly goes out.
· Press the "-" (11) button until the yellow lamp
goes out in the a preform is present.
The sensitivity of the "D5" has been reduced.
21- Pass 10 preforms in front of the cell "D5".
F Check that the yellow lamp goes out when each
preform passes in front.
- If the yellow lamp stays lit.
22- Press the "+" (10) and "-" (11) buttons simultaneously
for 3 s.
The "D5" cell is locked.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the settings in production.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers BRE-016 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
First carry out the settings on the unscrambler roller

assembly, see procedure "BRM-013.
The sensors "D7 ; D2 ; D1" on the unscrambler rollers

are direct reflection photo-electric cells.
Blockage detection at the unscrambler

D7 B99.2
roller exit (option according to model)
Unscrambler roller regulation sensor
D2 B126.0
Unscrambler rollers and elevator column
D1 B102.1
stoppage 1-007021-25-xx.svg
The cells "D7 ; D2 ; D1" are fitted with 3 indicator

D7 D2 D1
lamps:
- the green lamp indicates that the power is on,
- the yellow lamp indicates that the cell has detected
an object,
- the red lamp indicates that the cell is at its
switching limit.
1-010435-01-xx.svg
sensor cells "D7 ; D2 ; D1".

settings.


regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
procedure "BCU-002,
procedure "BCU-001,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRE-016 Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers 3
Consumables
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE

machine.
Setting the "D7" sensor cell (option according to model)
The "D7" sensor detects possible blockages at the

exit to the unscrambler rollers. For optimum operation
of the preform feeder, the "D7" sensor must never be
masked.
cell using a clean, dry cloth. 5 3 4

4- Position the support (4) for the "D7" sensor on the tube
(5) at 50 mm before the unscrambler roller exit.
F Check that the emitter (1) and the reflector (2) are lined
up.
any object.
F Check that the yellow lamp is out when there are no
preforms.
- If the yellow lamp is on.
The yellow lamp on the cell "D7" goes out. 2
The switching mode for the "D7" cell is set.
1
7- Position 1 preform on the unscrambler rollers (7), level
with the sensor "D7".
9- Lower the emitter (1) until the yellow lamp lights up.
8
10- Raise the emitter (1) until the yellow lamp goes out.

1-010438-01-xx.svg
12- Position several preforms in a tight group such that their
necks are raised in front of the sensor "D7".
F Check that the yellow lamp is lit.
Setting the "D2" sensor cell (option according to model)
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers BRE-016 3/4
cell using a clean, dry cloth. 13
11
15- Position the support (12) on the sensor "D2" on the last
third of the tube (5).
16- Tighten the bolts (11). 5 9
F Check that the emitter (9) and the reflector (10) are
lined up.
any object.
F Check that the yellow lamp is out when there are no 7
preforms.
- If the yellow lamp is on. 12
The switching mode for the "D2" cell is set. 10

18- Position 10 preform on the unscrambler rollers (7), level
with the sensor "D2".
19- Unscrew the bolts (13) but do not remove them. 1-010442-01-xx.svg
20- Set the incline of the emitter/reflector assembly to make

an angle of 30° with regard to the vertical axis of the
preforms.
21- Set the axial position of the support (12) so that the
beam from the sensor cell "D2" passes between the
unscrambler rollers (7).
F Check that the yellow lamp is lit.
- If the yellow lamp is out.
The sensor support "D1" is positioned as far up the

tube (5) as possible.
23- Repeat the steps "Setting the "D2" cell" from step 13 to
set the "D1" cell.
Setting the sensitivity of a photoelectric cell
Do not press the button (6) for too long 10 s. This

action will invert the cell switching mode. For the

preform feeder to function correctly, the green and
yellow lamps on the "D7 ; D2 ; D1" cells must be lit 6
when preforms are present.
24- Press the button (6) for 2 s until the red lamp flashes.
The red lamp goes out.
The yellow lamp and the green lamp flash alternately.
The cell is in programming mode.
25- Position one/some of the preform(s) in front of the cell.
The yellow lamp and the green lamp for 1 s.
The yellow lamp and the green lamp flash alternately. 1-010431-03-xx.svg
27- Remove the preform(s).

The yellow and green lamps go out.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRE-016 Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers 3
After 3 s the green lamp lights up.

The cell has been set and is in operating mode.
If the red lamp flashes immediately after setting the
sensitivity, the setting has failed.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper BRE-017 1/2
GENERAL INFORMATION
The sensor cells (1 ; 2) on the mini-hopper are

capacitor-type sensors.
1-010248-05-xx.svg
1 Detection at mini-hopper low level B121.0

2 Detection at mini-hopper high level B121.1
Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment 2

regulations.
MACHINE STATUS 3

1
procedure "BCU-002,
procedure "BCU-001,
1-006674-06-xx.svg
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools

being carried out,
PROCEDURE

machine.
Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper
2- Clean the detection surface of the sensors (1 ; 2).
3- Slightly unscrew the fastener (3).
4- Position the sensor (2) at the required height.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/2 BRE-017 Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper 3
If possible, use 2 joined preforms to be sure that you

can do the settings without your hand being detected.
The sensor cells (1) and (2) have inverted switching

4 5
modes.
6- Position a preform in front of the sensor you need to set
up.
7- Set the potentiometer (4) on the sensor (2) to obtain the
detection threshold.
The lamp (5) on the sensor (2) goes out when preforms
are detected.
The lamp (5) on the sensor (1) lights up when it detects
a preform.
9- Remove the preform.

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly BRE-018 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION
The sensors (1 ; 2 ; 3) on the hopper are capacitor-

type sensors.
1 Detection of the hopper low level B72.2

2 Detection at the hopper highlevel B72.3
Detection of supply to the elevator
3 B78.3
column
1-007021-26-xx.svg
The height of thee sensor (3) is correctly set when the

2
number of preforms between each lath on the elevator
belt is constant.
If the hopper is fed either by a tipper or manually, the

sensor (2) will determine the minimum required level
of preforms before filling up. If the hopper is fed by a 3
conveyor, the sensor (2) will determine the maximum
required level of preforms before the conveyor stops.
In cases where the hopper cannot be fed with

preforms, use, where possible, 2 joined preforms to 1
ensure the adjustments are carried out without
detection of your hand. 1-008537-01-xx.svg
MACHINE STATUS
- hopper filled with preforms.
procedure "BCU-001,
procedure "BCU-002,
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parts
None
Consumables
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRE-018 Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly 3
1- Clean the detection surface of the sensors (1 ; 2).

2- Loosen the nuts (4) but do not remove them. 2

4- Position the sensor (2) at a distance of 1 to 2 mm from 4
the body of the hopper (5).
1-008523-02-xx.svg

5
7- Position the sensor (1) at a distance of 1 to 2 mm from
the body of the hopper (5).
1-008524-02-xx.svg
9- Slightly unscrew the fastener (7).

3 7
1-008525-02-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly BRE-018 3/4
12- Set the potentiometer (8) for the sensors (1 ; 3) to

obtain the detection threshold. 8 9
The lamp (9) on the sensors (1 ; 3) lights up when
preforms are detected.
The lamp (9) on the sensor (2) goes out when preforms
are detected.
BEFORE YOU FINISH
1-007370-03-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRE-018 Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Calibrating the multi-parameter tester BRE-019 1/4
GENERAL INFORMATION

laboratory.

1-006757-01-xx.svg

Multi-parameter tester
1 2 3 4
For further information regarding the multi-parameter
tester (2) refer to the documentation supplied with the
equipment.
If there is a problem with the display or the reading on

the tester (2):
- Replace the battery kit .
- Replace the sensor (3).

cleaned using the supplied cleaning solution, see
procedure "BNM-051.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-011217-02-xx.svg
Parts
None
Consumables
- latex gloves,
- apron,
- "tampon pH 4",
- "tampon pH 7",
- "tampon pH 10",
- "solution de conductivité 1,413 µS/cm",
- "solution de conductivité 12,880 µS/cm".
Specific tools
- standard thermometer ,
- receptacle ,
- beaker .
PROCEDURE
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/4 BRE-019 Calibrating the multi-parameter tester 3
Before using the tester (2), immerse the sensor (3) in 2 5 6 7 8

a container filled with tap water for 30 min.
Never use de-ionized water.
Calibrating the pH
Clean the tester (2) and the plastic tube or the beaker
(9) using distilled water, see procedure "BNM-051.
4- Press the key "CAL"(6).
The selection has been validated.
5- Fill the plastic tube or beaker (9) with a buffer solution
pH.
F Wait until the reading on the tester (1) stabilizes. 1-011251-02-xx.svg
To validate the reading, the sensor (3) must be

immersed in the solution 2
7- Press the key "MODE_/_ENT"(7).

The reading has been validated.
(4).
10- Repeat the procedure above, from step 3, for all of the
other calibration solutions . 9
Calibrating the conductivity
13- Select "cond" mode using the "MODE_/_ENT" (7) 1-011233-01-xx.svg
button.
15- Fill the plastic tube or beaker (9) with a conductivity

solution .
F Wait until the reading on the tester (2) stabilizes.
To validate the reading, the sensor (3) must be
immersed in the solution
The reading has been validated.
(4).
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Calibrating the multi-parameter tester BRE-019 3/4
20- Repeat the procedure above, from step 13, for all of the
other calibration solutions .
Temperature calibration
23- Insert the standard thermometer in a container filled
with tap water.
F Wait until the reading on the tester (2) stabilizes.
27- Press "HOLD" (8) for 5 seconds.
The display reading changes.
28- Set the temperature using the keys (6 ; 8) until you
obtain the temperature on the standard thermometer
The tester (2) has been calibrated.
BEFORE YOU FINISH

The tester (2) goes out.
Check the cleaning date on the tester (2). If
necessary, clean the tester (2), see
procedure "BNM-051.
32- Note the calibration date on an information sheet.

27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
4/4 BRE-019 Calibrating the multi-parameter tester 3
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the optical sensors BRE-021 1/3
GENERAL INFORMATION D2 D1
D1 Preforms detected in oven turn (option) B33.6

Preforms detected at oven outfeed
D2 B33.7
(option)
Preforms detected in oven (option)
D2 B33.7
(option)
High level of preforms detected in feeder
D3 B105.0
stabilization rail
D3
1-006030-139-xx.svg

sensor cells "A".
The cell "A" is a fiber optic cell in indirect optical

mode. 1
The cell "A" is fitted with 2 lamps:

- the yellow lamp indicates that the cell is on and
has not detected any object,
- the red lamp indicates that the cell is locked. 2
The beam from the cell "A" is not visible. The arrow 3
(1) indicates the direction of the beam from the cell
"A". A
1-012854-01-xx.svg

settings.
4
Depending on his location, the sensor "A" is fitted with
A
a protective cover (4)

regulations.
MACHINE STATUS
- machine stopped,
- machine power live,
- no articles in machine.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Parts
None
Consumables
1-012838-01-xx.svg
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
2/3 BRE-021 Setting the optical sensors 3
Specific tools
being carried out.
PROCEDURE

machine.
Setting a type (A) sensor
2- Position a preform at the "A" cell.
3- Set the height of the suppport so that the beam from the
cell "A", as shown by the arrow (1), falls half way
between the neck of the preform and the rim.
4- Remove the preform from the optic beam.
F Check that the red lamp is out.
- If the red lamp is lit.
The "A" cell is unlocked.
F Check that the yellow lamp is continuously lit.
· Pass your hand 1 time in front of the "A" cell.
- If the yellow lamp lights.
The red lamp lights for 3 s.
The yellow lamp lights after 6 s.
The switching mode for the "A" cell is
set.
· Press the "+" (2) button until the yellow
lamp lights.
The sensitivity of the cell "A" has been
increased.
During the settings, the beam of the cell "A" is
directed according to the diameter of the preform
(maximum transparency zone) in order to obatain a
single signal.
5- Pass a preform slowly in front of the "A" cell.
F Check that the yellow lamp goes out when the preform
passes.
- If the yellow lamp stays lit, or only slightly goes out.
· Press the "-" (3) button until the yellow lamp
goes out in the a preform is present.
The sensitivity of the "A" has been reduced.
6- Pass 10 preforms in front of the cell "A".
F Check that the yellow lamp goes out when each
preform passes in front.
- If the yellow lamp stays lit.
7- Press the "+" (2) and "-" (3) buttons simultaneously for 3
s.
The "A" cell is locked.
27/05/2013
SBO 34/28 N° 8054
3 Setting the optical sensors BRE-021 3/3
BEFORE YOU FINISH

27/05/2013

Servicing Procedure Catalog: SBO 34/28 - #8054

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Servicing Procedure Catalog: SBO 34/28 - #8054

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Servicing Procedure Catalog: SBO 34/28 - #8054

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Translation of the original technical documentation

Servicing Procedure Catalog

SBO 34/28 - N° 8054

NESTLE WATERS EGYPT

SIDEL - Avenue de la patrouille de France - 76930 Octeville sur mer, FRANCE

© SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

GENERAL PRESENTATION Part A

USER PROCEDURE Part B

MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Part C

ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Part D

© SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

GENERAL PRESENTATION Part A

© SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

Before using a procedure, first read the User Manual.

1.2 General Information

m Operation pictogram (1)

Production process procedure

Inspecting / cleaning procedure

© SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

1.3.4 Contents of the procedure files

Obligatory before carrying out a procedure.

Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action.

Remark or observation on the results of an operation.

m Symbols and writing conventions

Symbol or convention Signifies

Step number in the procedure file

The location of the operation

Number reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part

Color code: identifies and/or locates an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part in an

Alpha-numerical reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part

Indicates the result of a step in the procedure

Highlight key words or phrases to make reading easier

Indicate supplementary information relating to this word in the current manual’s

Indicates a reference to another procedure or chapter

1.4 Documents supplied with the machine

GENERAL PRESENTATION Part A

OPERATING PROCEDURE BCU

Inspecting the preforms on delivery .......................................................................................................... BCU-016

Setting the dedust air pressure ................................................................................................................. BCU-030

PRODUCTION PROCESS PROCEDURE BPU

© SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

© SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

1 Safety: opening/closing molds BSU-001 1/2

The holding brace (1) prevents the locking system

Never attempt any work on an open mold support unit

Hot metal, risk of burns.

There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high

- PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004,

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

2/2 BSU-001 Safety: opening/closing molds 1

Opening the mold support unit

8- Remove the locking system holding brace (1).

BEFORE YOU FINISH 5 3

10- Close the safety doors.

1 Safety: blocking the manual rotation system BSU-002 1/2

Blocking the manual rotation system prevents the

For all major maintenance operations, use the locking

The visual may be different depending on the 1-006030-14-xx.svg

machine model ad configuration.